Home

Canon Studio Solution User's Manual

1. F Flip Orientation Num Pad 3 Add Package 3 to Cart CTRL F Find Photos Num Pad 4 Add Package 4 to Cart H Horizontal Landscape Orientation Num Pad 5 Add Package 5 to Cart Repeat Last Import Num Pad6 Add Package 6 to Cart CTRL Import Single Photo Num Pad 7 Add Package 7 to Cart SHIFT Import Multiple Photo Num Pad 8 Add Package 8 to Cart K Get Express Color Code Num Pad 9 Add Package 9 to Cart O Clockwise Orientation PAGE UP Scale In SHIFT O Counter Clockwise Orientation CTRL PAGE UP Scale In largest increments P Proof SHIFT PAGE UP Scale in smallest increments SHIFT P Picture Properties RETURN Place Order R Import Camera Images CTRL RETURN Save Order S Save Changes RIGHT Move Photo Right Moves Photo Right in largest CTRLS Slideshow Start CTRL RIGHT increments Moves Photo Right in smallest T Border Text or Photo Text SHIFT RIGHT increments CTRL E Edit Border Color ALT E Edit Graphic List CTRL P Add New Shape ALT R Reset Border Take Picture Fire Cameras CTRLT Photo Text Options SPACE Shutter Release or multiple import if no camera attached V Vertical Portrait Orientation TAB Move to next photo ALT BACK Picture Properties gt Photo Data Undo CTRL TAB SPACE 347 Shortcut Keys Photo Workshop DELETE Remove Photo SHIFT TAB Move back one photo Paste Photo Attributes from the Moves Photo up DIVIDE UP Clipboard Moves Photo up in largest DOWN Move Photo Down CT
2. 342 Slideshow Shortcut Keys Shortcut Keys Slideshow CTRLC Crop Orientation Horizontal END Move to last photo ALT C Crop Orientation Horizontal ESCAPE Close SHIFT C Crop Orientation Vertical F1 Rating 1 Star F Flip F2 Rating 2 Star SHIFT F Flip F3 Rating 3 Star H Horizontal Landscape Orientation F4 Rating 4 Star L Horizontal Landscape Orientation F5 Rating 5 Star O Clockwise Orientation HOME Move to first photo SHIFT O Counter Clockwise Orientation LEFT Move one photo next P Vertical Flip PAGE Move next one page DOWN V Vertical Orientation PAGE UP Move prior one page DELETE Delete Photo RIGHT Move one photo back DOWN Move to next photo UP Move one photo back 343 Shortcut Keys Presentation Mode Presentation Mode Shortcut Keys EEES i Moves to previous photo row View Less Photos Increase thumbnail LEFT Enhance Presentation Mode size Move photo left Moves to previous photo row View Less Photos Increase thumbnail antes Enhance Presentation Mode FS rl Le size Move photo left in Largest Increments Moves to previous photo row View More Photos Decrease thumbnail Shiti Lett Enhance Presentation Mode ift Le size Move photo left in Smallest Increments 0 Order A La Carte Item PAGE DOWN Scale Out CTRL PAGE 1 Add Package 1 to Cart Scale Out in Larges
3. Save Booking Cancel Booking Notes No notes found Adding a Task A task is any maintenance job or reminder for an employee of your studio or just the studio itself Tasks can only be added from the calendar while viewing by day To add a task from the calendar 1 Make sure you are in the Tasks and Events calendar not the Schedule 2 Select to View by day w Double click any time in any day in the Tasks column you change this in the next step You must double click in the Tasks column while viewing by day Choose a date starting time and end time for the task Enter a name for the task You must enter a name Enter a description for the task This is optional Update or add a status to the task Examples assigned completed oe a A e If you want to automatically add a Reminder for this task to your calendar select the checkbox next to Reminder then set the reminder time from the dropdown list This reminder will appear on the prior to the assigned time 9 If you want to make the task a recurring event select Recurring Options to setup the task 96 Using Your Studio 10 Assign an employee or multiple employees to the task If you need to add or edit an existing employee read the previous section on setting up employees 11 Select Save Task 12 The task will now appear on your Tasks and Events calendar on the specified date and time KA Task Information Choose Date 5 31 2009 St
4. To manually enter a sharpness value select the sharpness number below the tool and manually type in a value Adjusting Saturation You can adjust the saturation of a photo by plus or minus 4 points P saturation v Saturation options include e Select to increase the saturation by 1 point up to 4 e Select to decrease the saturation by lpoints down to 4 e Select the box to reset the saturation to 0 e Select saturation to open a dropdown menu with preset values To manually enter a saturation value select the saturation number below the tool and manually type in a value Adjusting Color Tone ufc You can adjust the color tone of a photo by plus or minus 4 points color tone y Color tone options include e Select to increase the color tone by 1 point up to 4 e Select to decrease the color tone by 1points down to 4 e Select the box to reset the color tone to 0 e Select color tone to open a dropdown menu with preset values To manually enter a color tone value select the color tone number below the tool and manually type in a value Adjusting Filter Effect You can apply a black and white filter effect to a photo by filter effect v selecting one of four filter types 201 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets Filter effects include e Select Yellow to apply a yellow effect e Select Orange to apply a orange effect e Select Red to apply a red effect e Select Green to apply a green
5. Do not draw missing photos C Do not draw missing photos and generate an automatic caption listing lhe names of anyone not pictured Font Corcel _ To change a query select it in the list and click the Change Query button A cursor appears allowing you to type changes to the query To remove a query select it in the list and click the Remove button Change the sorting of individual photos in the composite by clicking the Change button You can set up to three levels of sorting Select the item you want to sort by and then choose either ascending or descending You can choose to draw all images that match the queries including photo placeholders of missing photos If you do not want to have photo placeholders in the composite select Do not draw missing photos You can also choose not to include photo placeholders and in addition include a list of the names of those not pictured If you choose this option you can set font attributes for the list by clicking the Font button Image Cell Settings Set the fixed aspect ratio for the images to be on the composite Click the Edit button to set the size You can select a common size or to enter a custom size select Custom from the Common Sizes drop down and enter the height and width 282 Tutorial Border Workshop Enter the size of the area you want to fill enter the number of rows and columns and select the orientation of the photos If there are more photos
6. ORDERSUBTOTAL ORDERTAX ORDERTAXRATE Inserting Special Text This option will print the order discount amount in dollars using two decimal places 9 99 This option will print the order ID associated with the print job Order IDs can be found by searching within the Orders tab Order IDs are in numeric form 12345 This option is helpful when the original order was split into multiple print orders or if the printer order represents the complete original order then an asterisk is generated This symbol can be used to indicate whether the operator will need to combine separate portions of the order together to create a complete order This option is most helpful when the order was sent to multiple printers for printing This option will print the quantity of partial sheets in the current print order This is represented by a numerical value This option will print the order total dollar value with two decimal places 99 99 This option will print the entire number of sheets along with what sheet number the current page is For example if you were holding the Gi page in a 10 page order the software would print 6 10 This option will print the order shipping cost value in dollars using two decimal places 9 99 This option will print the order subtotal dollar value using two decimal places 99 99 This option will print the order tax amount in dollars using two decimal places 9 99 This option will print the
7. REPEATCOUNT 001 002 003 010 ON This option will print the roll size 203 mm 357 Inserting Special Text This option will print the date with the month abbreviated but the numbers will be in extended for Feb 14 2006 SHORTDATE This option will print the time of day using AM and PM designations For example 12 14PM is just after noon TIME This option will print the time under military distinction This will indicate the time on a 24 hour cycle rather that a 12 hour repeating cycle For TIME24 example 2 35PM is represented as 14 35 This image will print the user name which is the login name of the image supplier U YEAR This option will print the year using four digits 2006 This option will print the year in a two digit sequence For example the year 2006 will be represented by only 06 YY 358 Index Index A La Carte Items 141 add effect tool 288 add graphic tool 284 add multiple photos tool 279 add photo tool 273 add text tool 259 286 Advanced Tilt 184 align tool 293 Application General Settings Add text on the fly 41 Delete after archiving 41 Image format 42 Show Desktop 41 View previews 41 Application Options 39 Archiving 40 General Settings 40 Restoring 40 Studio Information 39 Application Shared Settings 359 Caption Logo 41 File Management 41 Archiving 119 arrays in borders 279 Attributes Applying 131 Custom 131 Saving 130
8. Select Advanced to set advanced options a Media amp Profile Select Use a color profile for this device and browse to a color profile location if you want to use a specific color profile Select Media Rules and the corresponding media to sent specific items to specific printers Set the Bleed amount in pixels and select if you want to Apply bleed on wallets amp arrangements 57 Setting Up Your Network b Margin Text i Select Control options for if and when to print margin text ii Enter text to appear on lines 1 and 2 at left center and right justification iii Select Insert Special Text to enter pre made text for customers dates packages and other information iv Select Restore Default Text to set the text to printer defaults 6 Select OK 7 Select a Page Size 8 Select Arrangements for that page size use Quick Setup to quickly add or delete print sizes of one type Select OK when finished 9 Select OK to save printer settings Setting Up a Raster Printer A raster image printer will output each print as an image file on your computer The image file size and type can be specified for output This is especially useful when you want to modify the image size and output as another file type To add and set up a raster printer 1 Select Add Raster Printer A window appears 2 Select the print size of this image printer 3 Select Options ad oo 9 y Confirm or ch
9. 8x10 4 wallets 5 8x10 and 5x7 6 44x5s 7 35mm 8 4 5x7s and 2 8x10s 9 24x 65 place order 7 Ordered Packages 0 00 Your catalogs are always located on the far left of the Photo Library There is a default list of catalog types to help you organize your catalogs including 113 Using Photo Library e PhotoReflect these are portfolios that will be uploaded to your PhotoReflect site as examples of your work a photo of you or promotions You may have up to five portfolios here at one time bai F Catalogs Sort View e Portrait any customer sittings will automatically be PROOUBTary saved here Click the next to a customer s name to ne j i New Catalog Find Info see all of their available catalogs 0 a 48 Events 1 jtaloas e Desktop this is your computer desktop Navigate 2 8 Portrait 3 e Jones Elaine through the tree structure to view and edit any 8 Smith Nicole gt x amp Nicole s School Photos 10 photos you may have in a different location 8 Smith Tina 5 School 1 Click the next to a catalog type to view all the catalogs gt bh posa within it 96 Sports 1 Q Wedding 1 6 Desktop To refresh the catalog list select Catalogs from the very top left of the software and select Refresh Or hit F5 Sorting and Viewing Catalogs To sort your catalogs 1 Select the Sort menu located at the very top left of the software 2 Select to sort catalogs by Tim
10. Ignore domain names e g xyz com Report doubled words e the the Case sensitive Phonetic suggestions English only v Typographical suggestions Suggest split words v Auto correct Main Dictionary language American English y Suggestions Fast but less accurate Moderately fast and accurate Slow but accurate Help Cancel e Dictionaries this setting allows you to add or delete words used by your dictionary 45 Setting Up Software Options PhotoReflect Account PhotoReflect com is an online storefront for uploading and selling photos You simply set your packages products and publish photos through Studio Solution to your site where customers will automatically be notified and able to purchase photos from your studio 24 7 Find PhotoReflect options in Manage Studio gt Options gt PhotoReflect Account Select Login Now to login into your PhotoReflect account Once logged in you can manage all of your account information set up web products and pricing manage your online portfolio promotions and view automatically generated reports of your sales and orders Select Sign Up to make an account within the software This requires an internet connection Labtricity Account Labtricity is a network of labs that makes ordering professional lab prints and services easy Once you create an account you can send orders to any Labtricity enabled lab where they will print and mail the photos b
11. e Photos select the number of photos to view at once Press SHIFT as a hotkey to display photos e Auto View Photos let the software decide how many photos to display Enabled by default e Show Less or More photos press or as hotkeys to show less or more photos e Show Lab Name show the fulfillment tyoe and name below each photo e Show Filename show the filename below each photo e Show Item Description show the product information below each photo e Show Editing Guides display grid lines and aspect ratio lines while editing e Soft Proof with Printer Profile display the photo with the printer color profile e High Quality Preview view higher quality images Enabled by default 155 Using Orders Workspace e Order Proof or Photo Proof Mode order proof displays all photos and all toolsets Photo proof displays only correction and color balance tools e Show and Choose Reference Image you can select an image to show alongside each photo you are editing While you may move between photos and orders the reference image will remain locked Select Choose Reference Image to browse for an image Select Show Reference Image or press R to hide and display the image Orienting Photos For information on orienting photos click here Saving and Applying Attributes For information on attributes click here Changing Order Properties While in Order Proofing you can change the properties of a selected item
12. e Next view the next photo in the album e End view the last photo in the album You can also use the mouse wheel to quickly move through a catalog Viewing Multiple Photos To view multiple photos at a time select view from the top of the software and select a number of photos to view or press SHIFT 1 through SHIFT 0 as hotkeys To view more or less photos select view from the top of the software and select View Less Photos or press as a hotkey or select View More Photos or press as a hotkey Viewing Photo Information To view filenames beneath photos select view from the top of the software and select and check Show Filenames To view photo numbers beneath photos select view from the top of the software and select and check Show Photo Numbers Viewing High Quality Previews To view high quality previews of your photos select view from the top of the menu and select and check High Quality Preview These images have more detail and are easier to edit Managing Photos in Presentation Mode Changing the Aspect Ratio To change the aspect ratio of all photos in Presentation Mode select view from the top of the software and select Viewing Aspect You set up your viewing aspects here select one from the list 160 Using Presentation Mode Sorting Photos To sort photos in Presentation Mode 1 Select view from the top of the software 2 Select to sort photos by e Rating sort by your assigned 1 to 5 st
13. e Select Studio Solution to bring up the standard Windows menu where you can move resize logout and exit the software e Select_or or X to resize or exit the software e Select to see the software version User Centered directly below the title bar is the current employee s username and their role Select Logout to log into the software as a different user Back and Forward Your current software location is found to the left above the studio tabs Your current location will be displayed here If you are editing a specific vendor s information your location might appear as Vendors gt Setup Vendors gt Vendor 1 for example Select the lt and gt arrows to navigate back and forward through your previously viewed windows 90 Using Your Studio Search Directly above the studio tabs is a large text field with a magnifying glass This is your search function To search for an item 1 Type the full or partial name of anything you wish to search for into the text field 2 Hit Enter on your keyboard or click the magnifying glass 3 The search results page will appear Items here are organized by type name and details 4 Click on your desired name to go navigate to that item s details page 5 If you want to narrow the search by date select a search period from the right side of the window If you choose Custom type or select dates from the calendar and select Apply Now 6 If you want to narrow the
14. 1 Select an item 2 Select Properties from the top of the software or right click on a photo 3 Select to Change Product Select from Lab Products or press CTRL SHIFT R or Select from Local Products or press CTRL R Change Filename replace the item with another on file Press ALT F as a hotkey Change Quantity change the number of packages for this item Press Q as a hotkey Change Media change the type of printing media for this item Press M as a hotkey Service Notes add or edit services for this item Press as a hotkey Order Comment add an order comment to this item This comment will appear in the order information window on the Orders tab Edit Shipping Info edit customer billing and shipping information 156 Using Orders Workspace To change an order property select a photo and select Properties from the top of the software or right click on a photo for the previous options Undoing and Redoing Changes To undo or redo changes to a photo or order select Undo from the top of the software and select one of the options or press the corresponding hotkey e Undo or CTRL Z e Undo Photo Changes or CTRL U e Redo or CTRL Y e Undo Order Changes or CTRL O Saving Orders To save your selection as a new order 1 Select a package or product 2 Select Print from the top of the software 3 Select Save Selection as New Order or press CTRL S as a hotkey 4 The item will be saved in the O
15. 116 Photo Icons 17 Photo Library Navigating 113 Using 113 photo lookup 297 Photo Workshop Finding Photos 170 Importing Photos 173 Photo Information 171 Using 165 Photographer Notes 126 Index Photoreflect 46 photos drop shadow 277 283 285 Portfolio 113 Portraits 114 Presentation Mode 158 Managing Photos 160 Navigating 159 Preset Color Balances 203 Print Commands 144 Print Media 144 Print Queue 150 Printers Arrangements 58 Connecting 55 Margin Text 57 Media amp Profile 57 Raster Printer 58 Rolls 56 Setting Up 56 Sheets 56 Printing Orders 149 Products Creating 63 Package Groups 63 Proofing Photos 136 Custom Proof Sheet 138 properties borders 270 queries in composite borders 280 lookup 298 on border objects 297 Quick Import 175 Rating Photos 127 Receipts 153 Redeye 194 Redo Retouch 269 Renaming Photos 126 Reports Running Reports 109 Retouch Methods 233 Retouch Settings 232 364 Index Retouch Tools 234 Retouch Workshop Using 230 Retouching Photos 186 rotate tool 295 Schedules Printing a Schedule 108 Search Studio 91 Service Lab Service 75 Local Service 74 Service Notes 128 Services 74 Shadows 194 Shipping and Handling Tax 81 Shipping Info 128 Shipping Options 79 Shipping Groups 80 Shopping Cart A la Carte Items 141 Adding Items 140 Adding Services 144 Hiding the Cart 139 Package Groups
16. Here is a list of all attributes that will be saved and applied e Color Balance e Drop Out e Color Correction contrast etc e Services e Enhancements vignettes e Input Profile e Cropping e Color Mode sepia duotone etc To save attributes 1 Select the photo with attributes you want to save 130 Using Photo Library 2 Select Attributes from the very top center of the software 3 Select Save Attributes to 4 Select to Copy the attribute settings to the clipboard This is only temporary and will be overwritten if you use the clipboard again so use this setting only if you will be applying the attributes immediately Press as a hotkey for this option Set the photo attributes as the system attributes Every new photo in the software will now have these attributes as a default Set the photo attributes as the catalog attributes Every new photo in the catalog will now have these attributes as a default Set the attributes to Custom 1 4 These attributes will be saved in the software until you manually save over them Create a New custom setting With a new custom attribute setting you can leave out specific attributes or only save one or two different attributes of a photo For example you could copy over the Services and a Vignette but leave the Color Correction and Color Mode the same Applying Attributes To apply attributes l 2 3 Select any number of photos to apply the attribu
17. However there may be times when you want to have multiple photos on the page in a row column format as in a composite To create a template for this type of layout click add multiple photos on the toolbar to open the Composite Object window 279 Tutorial Border Workshop Composite Object O Photos Labels Options Postion and Size 2 How many photos Fixed number of rows columns Rows 2 Columns 2 Fixed number of photos Lookup the photos by query O What is the size of each photo O Fixed aspect ratio Fixed size 1050x1312 Edit How should the photos be oriented Al Vertical O All Horizontal 27 How are the photos spaced Tight no extra spacing O Spaced O What should happen if other objects overlap this one Skip image cells that are overlapped by later objects O Allow other objects to overlap O What number do you want to start the count at Starting number If you want a fixed number of rows and columns set the array size by specifying the number of rows and columns If you want a specific number of photos enter the number of photos you want on the page You can choose to lookup photos from a query since the number of photos could vary by job You can also select the value to start the count for the photos Photo Queries On the Photos tab select Lookup the photos by query to set queries specifying which photos you want to print
18. Presentation tab at the bottom of the software Select exit presentation mode from the very top right of the software to exit Presentation Mode For a complete reference guide to Presentation Mode including detailed screenshots and button locations go here 158 Using Presentation Mode Opening the Photo Library and Photo Workshop You can use both the Photo Library and the Photo Workshop without exiting Presentation Mode To open the Photo Library select choose another catalog from the bottom of the workspace To open the Photo Workshop select enhance selected photo from the bottom of the workspace Navigating in Presentation Mode The software will automatically be maximized to full screen so that no other programs will interrupt the session The software itself will hide all other tabs The top of the workspace has a single toolbar for viewing and adjusting photos compare ratingy sortw fullscreen music orientation view y The bottom of the workspace has a single toolbar for navigating between photos catalogs and editing A Am choose another catalog enhance selected photo a service notes Viewing Photos in Presentation Mode Viewing Individual Photos To switch between photos within the current catalog select an option from the navigation menu at the bottom of the workspace 159 Using Presentation Mode e Home view the first photo in the album e Previous view the previous photo in the album
19. Rebekah L This option will print the customer name in the format First Middle Initial Last Rebekah L Thompson This option will print the phone number divided by dashes 555 555 5555 This option will print the complete address where the prints are to be shipped 123 Main Street Suite 100 Austin TX 78746 This option will print the first line of the address where the prints are to be shipped this is usually the street address 123 Main Street This option will print the second line of the address where the prints are to be shipped This is usually the suite apartment or building number Suite 100 This option will print the state abbreviation of the address where the prints are to be shipped TX This option will print the city name state abbreviation and the zip code of where the prints are to be shipped It will print in this format City State Zip Code Austin TX 78746 This option will print the company name of the receiving company 352 Inserting Special Text This option will print the country of residence of the address where the prints are to be shipped United States CUSTOMERSHIPCOUNTY This option will print the receiving customer s email address customer company com CUSTOMERSHIPEMAIL This option will print the name of the receiving customer in the format First Middle Initial Last Rebekah L Thompson CUSTOMERSHIPFIRSTLAST This option will print the name of the receiving customer in the format
20. complete an ee le Assign an employee to the call If you need to add or edit an existing employee read the previous section on setting up employees N Select Save Call 8 The call will now appear on the customer details page and the calendar Call Information Choose Customer Dan Brown Search AddNew Customer Info 555 A Street Edit Customer P 555 1212 dbrown internet com Choose Date 11 17 2009 amp Choose Time 4 45 PM Enter Description Call to Dan Brown Enter Call Details Update Status Assigned v Add Status Rename Status Delete Status Reminder E None Recurring Recurring Options Assign Employee Admin Search Add New Save Call Cancel Call Notes No notes found 104 Using Your Studio Employees The Employees tab will keep track of all your employees and roles We ve already covered adding new employees and roles so we ll start with managing existing ones iii Be Search bar Shove to find a partaular employee Click check Wott to ind O IN Employee Name Role Next Schedule Check In Out Coy O Yaz Akrout yakrout Photographer NA Check Out Nicole Riddle Nriddle Manager NA Check Ir New Empl After selecting the tab a list of employees will appear with names roles next schedule and check in status e Clicking Check In or Check Out will record employee actions and shifts e Clicking on an employee s name will take you to the details page for that employ
21. gt Zoom In or Zoom Out from the dropdown menu Viewing at Page Size To view the entire border area select fit page from the right toolbar The border will be displayed at whatever zoom is necessary to view the entire border You can also view at page size by right clicking any border item and selecting Zoom gt Zoom Reset from the dropdown menu Viewing at Actual Size To view the border at actual size in pixels select actual size from the right toolbar The border will be displayed and zoomed in to show the full editable size You can also view actual size by right clicking any border item and selecting Zoom gt Zoom Actual Size from the dropdown menu Viewing and Editing Border Properties At any time in the workshop you can view and edit the border properties To view and edit border properties 1 Select border properties from the left toolbar A window appears 2 Enter a border description 3 Entera filename and location for the border 4 Select the page size for the border a Select Custom to enter your own width and height in pixels Select the orientation horizontal or vertical Select the resolution in pixels per inch Select Choose to change the page color A i Select and check Rotate 180 when printing to have the back rotated This is useful if you want the back of the border to be flipped upside down compared to the front This option is only available if the border has a back 9 Selectthe photo orient
22. gt arrows to change months You can view all of the information for multiple days e Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor to select any number of consecutive days e Select and hold CTRL and click individual days to select any number of inconsecutive days 92 4 June 2009 gt SMTWT FS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Using Your Studio e Select and hold SHIFT and click individual days to select any number of consecutive days Editing a Booking or Task View and edit any booking or task that appears on your home page by clicking on the name of the event You will be taken to the appropriate booking task or call creation page Here you can edit delete or add notes to the event Calendar Your calendar will help you schedule and keep track of every single booking task and call for your studio Find your calendar by clicking the Calendar button in the studio tabs There are four different calendars Tasks and Events Schedules Rooms and Employee Tasks and Events show all actions whether it s a portrait shoot cleaning a studio or making a confirmation call to a customer Schedules show all employee shifts for that time period E Tasks and Events Schedules l Rooms Admin wm Rooms will provide you with a detailed schedule for each room in your studio The Employee view will provide you with a detailed schedule for each employee of your studio Use
23. l OR Ensure that the camera is set up properly and connected to the software via USB cable or through WiFi Take a photo with the camera or press SPACE on the keyboard The photo will automatically be added to the current catalog Ensure that the camera is set up properly and connected to the software via USB cable or through WiFi Select Live View at the top of the software A window appears showing the view of the connected camera Select Shutter from the new window or select Take Picture from the top of the software to take a photo The photo will be automatically added to the current catalog Toke Picture Live View 176 Using Photo Workshop Creating a Catalog To create a catalog in the workshop l 2 Select Catalog from the bottom left of the software If you want to create a new catalog and automatically import photos from your quick import location select and check Create New amp Import 3 Select Create New 4 Select Add Photo Catalog 5 A wizard opens Select a category type from the drop down box 6 7 8 9 Enter an event name You must enter an event name Enter a description event city state and country This is optional Enter an event date You must enter an event date Enter event notes 10 Select Next 11 Enter customer information a If you are using 3 party studio management software enter in your customer and session values These must match in both sof
24. return to Setting Up a Server Computer and follow the steps in the section If the connection still fails you will need to check your network connections and settings 54 Setting Up Your Network 7 Your Client Computer has been set up successfully 8 Repeat Steps 1 7 on all other client stations B Connecting Printers Now that we ve finished with basic settings and have the network up and running it s time to connect and add any printers that you ll be using Find printer options in Manage Studio gt Printers Printers should be directly connected to the server station or through a network hub so that each client can communicate with the server and use the printer If you are using a single computer setup connect the printers directly to your computer or through a network hub There are many different types of printers you can use with the software e Canon Pixma Pro 9000 amp 9500 e Any Windows Printer Mark and II e Canon IPF Series 5100 6100 6200 8100 9100 e Raster File Printer If you have installed the proper printer driver and have the printer connected via USB the software will automatically recognize it If a printer is not automatically detected select Add for that printer type and select your printer from a list If the printer does not appear in the list please confirm the printer s detection within the Windows operating system Canon Printers e Canon iPFS1C Canon Pro900 Ca
25. white photos naturally fade to this color over time e Retro sets the color to retro tones Aged color photos naturally fade to this color over time e Duotones the photo is turned to grayscale with a subtle color tone applied Select from o Ruby Bronze Tarnished Emerald Turquoise Selenium Blue Vineyard and Rose Adding a Frame You can add a small frame around the edge of your photo To add a frame 1 Select View from the top of the software 2 Select Frame 3 Select a frame color a White Black or Gray 4 Select None to remove the frame Adding a Texture You can apply a paper texture to the photo to create the appearance of different Canon media To add a paper texture 1 Select View from the top of the software 2 Select Paper Textures 3 Select a texture 187 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets a Polished Satin Canvas Velvet Watercolor Glossy or Heavy Canvas 4 Select None to remove the texture Applying a Border Borders are backgrounds text overlays or composites to be applied to on text off products All borders exist on a different layer from the photo and can 2 7 r always be turned off and removed by returning to the workshop borders To search for and add a border to the photo 1 Select the magnifying glass from the borders tool 2 Awindow appears 3 The top of the window includes all of your local borders Use the tabs and arrows to navigate between grou
26. A E AE 112 SESION MONOS al A AE A E A A E 112 ASK py TY DG EXPO A NA 112 Using the PROTO LIDIGIY cisco iii idad ica 113 Navigating the Photo Library desa 113 Using the Catalog MENU ai 113 Sornng and Viewing CAM hice eed teehee ts 114 ANNEER E A A RE E EREA 115 Aele ae COMO GS AEE A E E ETE 115 Viewing COLGIOG INO reesei ie E R EEE E EE Eae E EE ar RI Eerie aeS ia iei 116 Table of Contents EGUEING GC GTONO GHIA Osc ias tl ao donen dads AEEA Hales terets 116 REMOVING Catalogs iii Edades 117 Adding a Photo Eroupro aC AA iii Ai 117 PUBIS DIN ETA tad 118 Unpublishing RENE ELE iti ania seein A lada 118 Batch Publishing and Unpublishing Catalogs cccecsscccceesseceessececesssececseceeeeeseeeecseaeeecseseeseesseeeesesaeeeseeaeeeneaea 119 ALCHIVING GOIGIO OS eis Riss BASE ie ee ee As a e a Ra A a 119 URGICRIVING CATAS a dao ias TS 120 Setting PROTO NUMBENS ici idad cad e EEEE EAEE TE naik 120 Photo PONS 121 Using the Photo Mido 122 SOMING kelate A110101 E A10 OEA E A E E A E EEA lee eet 122 TRUMBROUSIZS oieri sin an EERE E E E E RE E E ET ERE ETE 124 Addam o a P A a e e ias o eo o 124 IMporling PHOTOS OMG COMEIO ti A A Na Si aada 125 Importing Photos from Camera Cn vsccccccvscccalaveescedauieccecatiecoectiessuhicesscatussdecatbesshsetsessdenndecceceb ecdacsssed 125 FINGUING MPA scvees sy eee tie ex ek es Se Ree in en eee tn Se Ss eae eects 126 RENAMING PHOLOS cis Anies Sass a nein e ee lee heed 126 Adding PRoto Grapher TS e te
27. A ei 212 Viewing the Using the Border ITEMS LiSf ooococonnccncconocanooonnnonnnnnncnononnnnnnonnnnnnnn nn nro nnncnnnn nn nnnnnn nn nnnn nn rcninnnnss 212 VIEWING GNA USING the AAA a 213 VIEWING TEST PROTOS s 3ecch et chs cig Seki a Re eee a oe Reet he E ENEE 214 VIEWING Test POMS assis cu A a chants ci nd lactea 214 Editing Items in the Border Workshop ccssccssssecsssseessscecsssceesssceessecessccesseecesseeeesaseeseaes 214 Basic Editing TOOIS ii dust cadgtateedancchsedadanestdecuncecaeeesaetseceeed 214 EN BUE FONT AA PAE A E e ad E 215 FHA OLQNGEFITING ING E E caze25 23 oo ec sdseesdbce cbt das Ses 2ica AS nido 215 Making ITEMS The SAME sristi nta beadealbaced Soesbhscdedansexdbeeteesgedligeddieetbessecaness 215 Centering MEMS essenin aiiiar EEN inn ri Ee Eo ian iE ek o Eteri ESEA o Eke KEER kS Sikati Eee i iante 216 Table of Contents PALIN OATS TAS srs te skecz acc o 216 SPOGCING HENMS EA E Lei Soeeavee dee Hate ddanea aiii 217 Changing Tem Order vt as ASE Ake A wae Re SB eee 218 ROTQHAG MENS asa 218 HAN OMS ase acral bea ta al gees o de oe 219 LOCKING A AE EE 219 MS A E a RL ee se ah se RS ad 219 SOVING CHARGES ON GBOFAGSTS cacao iaa lina nro shee coudheestaebehideteatecars 220 Adamo Borderline td oidos 220 SEIECTING POSITION and SIZE ti A ia 220 AID APRO MN sk ugh au diana o kaos a ii ae 221 Adding a Multiple PHOTO ITOM 0 ccecccscesssccecesnececnsccecssssececsessecessncecsesseeeceeaaeceseasecsesaesecseaaec
28. A status indicator for the Auto Focus AF ON will turn on when it is enabled ON Live View Take Picture OAF ON OX Importing Photos If your camera isn t connected to the software and you need to manually import photos follow these steps e Get the photos from your camera into a location this computer can reach whether it s a network location a file on this computer or a media card attached to the computer via a card reader e Return to the booking in the Photo Workshop e Select Photos from the top of the Photo Workshop workspace 246 Tutorial Running a Shoot Photos v Attributes v Sorty Vieww Fullscreen Import Ctrl I Portrait Sitting Y eventl5jpg Y Quick Import I Quick Import Setup Shift I e Select Import e Navigate to the location of your photos and select Import All All of your photos will be automatically added into the Photo Workshop Retouching Photos Now that you have captured or imported all of the photos it s the ideal time to quickly retouch and edit them in the Photo Workshop We will assume that the customer you just took photos of is going to hang around for a little bit to preview and proof the photos you took so right now we ll just worry about minor adjustments If you are not familiar with the retouching tools click here for the Photo Workshop tools and here for the Retouch Workshop tools e Select the Enhance tab to make quick adjustments such as centering the subject scaling
29. Add Package 9 to Cart F7 Opens the Attribute Menu View More Photos Decrease Copy Photo Attributes to the aa MULTIPLY f thumbnail size Clipboard Save Advanced Custom CTRL MULTIPLY A Add Photo Attribute window marked with current clipboard attributes CTRLA Select All Num Pad O Order A La Carte item C Create New Catalog in Catalog Wizard Num Pad 1 Add Package 1 to Cart CTRLALTC Clear Preview Cache Num Pad 2 Add Package 2 to Cart D Catalog Info Num Pad 3 Add Package 3 to Cart 341 Shortcut Keys Photo Library F Flip Orientation Num Pad 4 Add Package 4 to Cart CTRL F Find Photos Num Pad 5 Add Package 5 to Cart Photo Group Information in Catalog Num Pade had pack Beat um Pa ackage 6 to Car Wizard H Horizontal Landscape Orientation Num Pad 7 Add Package 7 to Cart Repeat Last Import Num Pad 8 Add Package 8 to Cart CTRL Import Single Photo Num Pad 9 Add Package 9 to Cart SHIFT Import Multiple Photo RETURN Place Order O Clockwise Orientation CTRL RETURN Save Order Take Picture Fire Cameras SHIFT O Counter Clockwise Orientation SPACE Shutter Release or multiple import if no camera attached P Proof TAB Move to next one photo SHIFT P Picture Properties CTRL TAB Picture Properties gt Photo Data R Import Tethered Camera Pictures SHIFT TAB Move back one photo Rebuild Catalog Tree use with caution CTRLR Scroll photos up backup files first
30. An order proof is a printed sheet with small previews of photos We ve already covered printing proofs of entire photo catalogs but offen you will only want to print a proof of photos that the customer has ordered To print an order proof 1 Select the order you want to print a proof for 2 Select print order proof from the bottom of the software or right click on the order and select Print Order Proof 3 Awindow appears 4 Select the page size This is the size of the sheet you will be printing on 5 Select the orientation portrait or landscape If you are only printing one image select to use the image default orientation 6 Select a media Leave this dropdown menu blank to use the default media 7 Select to choose a page color White is the default page color 8 Select Print all proofs on a single sheet per order to fit every photo proof for an order on a single sheet 9 Selectthe number of rows and columns This option is disabled if you are printing all proofs on a single sheet 10 Select Square Cells to organize the proofs in equal squares for a symmetrical presentation 152 Using Orders Workspace Print Order Proof Page Options Page Size 34x10 Orientation Portrait Page EJE k Media Page Color Print all proofs on a single sheet per order Proof cells 3 la Ly rows 2 columns Eaj Square Cells Printing
31. Catalog Info information specific to the catalog can be entered here e Remove Catalogs delete selected catalogs e Publish Catalogs publish selected catalogs to your online e UnPublish Catalogs remove selected catalogs from your online storefront e Quick Archive quickly store backups of photos for the selected catalog e Archive To back up and archive the selected catalog to a root folder e Quick Unarchive quickly unarchive photos for the selected catalog e Unarchive From select a location and event to unarchive photos from e Reset Photo Numbers reset all photo numbers from a specified starting number e Set Starting Photo Number set a starting number for all new imported photos e Refresh refresh all catalogs 310 Reference Photo Library Sort Catalogs by Time sort catalogs by time and date of the event Sort Catalogs by Name sort catalogs by the event name Sort Catalog in Ascending Order sort catalogs by time in chronological order or by name in alphabetical order Sort Catalog in Descending Order sort catalogs by time in reverse chronological order or by name in reverse alphabetical order View Catalogs Default view catalogs by software default view View Catalogs By Date view catalogs by time and date of the event View Catalogs Alphabetically view catalogs in alphabetical order View Catalogs By Type view catalogs by the event type Arrange Catalogs o Arrange Catalogs By Day organize all cata
32. Library Reference Find the Photo Library by clicking the Photo Library tab at the bottom of the software Top Catalog j OLU Photos Alljouiess Sory Viewy mE PhotoUBrarV Portrait Sitting location Austin TX 1 4x6 your collection of photo catalogs no description 4 images date 6 3 2009 2 25x7s Find Info Add Photo v Fine Orient Enhance Preview Publish Copy Batcl 3 8x10 kkk kkk 4 wallets 1 5 8x10 and 5x7 Bottom Catalog Bottom Photo Viewer E 2 e 7 35mm Jones Elaine 2 Smith Nicole 8 4 5x7s and 2 8x10s amp Smith Tina 9 2 4x 6s ics School 1 D A Sports bel 1 nicole010 jpg 2 event11 jpg 3 event12 jpg 4 prev more E Wedding 1 LE ik ake place order save order Bm Desktop ordered Packages 0 00 4 event13 jpg 5 event14 jpg 6 event15 jpg Shopping add package a clear order change cropping remove item Below are the menus for the Photo Library Click a specific menu to jump ahead to that section 309 Reference Photo Library Top Catalog Menu Top Photo Viewer Menu Bottom Catalog Menu Bottom Photo Viewer Menu Right Clicking a Catalog Right Clicking a Photo Top Catalog Menu STUDIO SOLUTION RSS Catalogs y Sort View Photos y Soriv Viewwv s EN Show Data Hide Cart Portrait Sitting 10 A iptior mages 1 4x6 2 2 5x7s 3 8x10 PhotoLibrary N Catalog v Find Info Add Photo v Find Orient Enhance Preview Publish Copy Bat Catalogs e
33. OK Using Photo Queries When using photo composites you will need to add multiple photos to each border after a shoot This can become a very time Consuming process and photo queries will eliminate a lot of the work A photo query is basically a search function tied a photo placeholder that will search the for specific photo types to automatically fill the placeholder For example if you are shooting a bunch of different sports teams and creating sport composites you will probably need a team photo for each composite Simply create a photo query within the photo placeholder where the team photo would go for each player and set it to search for a photo type of Team within the catalog Then use photo data detailed here to add the Team type to your team photo The team photo in the current catalog will now be automatically imported for each player when you add that player s photo to their team composite To add a query to a photo placeholder 1 Select add photo from the left toolbar 2 Select Lookup 3 Select Queries 4 Select a predefined query or select Type to add your own 228 Using Border Workshop Replace with a photo type that you added in photo properties found here Create the rest of your photo item and select OK When this border is applied to a photo this placeholder will automatically search for and populate the placeholder with a photo matching the photo type within that catalog 22
34. PHOTOS dona 179 EGIING SNIDPPING NATO ies aed da tte eS ah ce e alge weal i OP oh cele 179 REMOVING PROTOS seniai iesse aian Eeee iine ae iek oere a isek o reee sekso keok esie iise kies 179 saving Ehanges anda PhO O S a as ee o Re ea Be a ds 179 CTI PINO ROS Aes Ate ce ccn ie cutest ht E teatadaue eatahe Date E Mckee abled 180 Using the SHOP PING VOM A iaa ete 180 Using Toolsets in the Photo Workshop ooocccccccccncncncnoncncnnnnononcnncncncnccnonnnnos 181 USING TKE BAS NOOO ISS cadet ect ada cea lanvesincy a ao doi 181 SIMA ENANA SS A e de leelo E 182 MOVING Poltica indiana andando 182 SC ARA al eo o atti 182 Qnrenting a PAO ek A e IO 183 o A E lhveeustde Usacsicausedehdatgaccacansedchdesiaced EE 184 Using the Enhance LOOMS Tag a a e a 185 A E E E T 186 RETOUCHING BE E KALON ONEEN E ETE T E AET 186 ADDIVING Eolo e e SS en 187 AGING G FraMe ss ce a e ana ido io e aes 187 AIN TOXIULG sas ii a te rel lo nt dad reed e e ti dret bel da edo at 187 Applying a Bl aid Ainas 188 Using Basics Border UICN das 189 Table of Contents Switching between Borders in the Current GrOUP eeseceseseesseceeeeeesseceeeeecsaeceneecsaeceeaeecsaeceeaeecsaeeseaeecsaeeeenes 189 setting the Border Group and Directo iciciicccnionini ii eeii ee eii an oi r sai 189 Adding andsEditing Border ii ts 190 Editing BOS dolia 190 SAVINO BO SSL a a dl e a o E A O A 192 81070 o E AAA ON 192 Greating a COmposiie Ni o as Bere o E 192 AQUA
35. Photo Library and the Photo Workshop Working Space select one of the following color profiles o sRGB ColorSpace o Adobe RGB 1998 Default o ProPhoto RGB Select options for Prompts and Warnings Allow free packages without warning when you add a package with no cost to the shopping cart you will not be reminded that the package is free Prompt for Administrator password when accessing program settings if you are not logged in as Admin and attempt to change the software settings you will be prompted for the Admin password in order to continue Prompt for copies when adding packages to cart if you routinely add more than one copy of a package to the shopping cart at a time select this option to prompt you for a number of packages each time you add one to the cart Prompt for copies for Quick Print packages if you routinely print more than one copy of a package using quick print select this option to prompt you for a number of packages to print each time you use quick print Display quick print warning message you will be prompted for confirmation when using quick print to avoid accidentally printing items 43 Setting Up Software Options B Fulfillment Options These options affect customer orders Automatically print orders containing locally fulfilled items this option works with the auto print function in the Orders tab and will automatically print all placed orders that you fulfill in house This option is ena
36. Select Always use a border for this package item 2 Select Choose A window appears 3 The top of the window includes all borders currently in the software while the bottom shows borders for sale from the online Template Marketplace Use the tabs and arrow keys to navigate and select a border then select OK 4 The Border Name and description field is automatically populated 66 Setting Up Your Products 5 Select the Tile Layout for how the border appears once tiled with the same photo or tiled for use with different photos 6 Select the Orientation best fit landscape or portrait 7 Select the Placement 8 If you want to add or edit text select Use default border text Select Edit Default Border Text to view and enter new text A template must have text included for this option to be available 9 Select OK 10 This template will always be automatically applied to this product e Services Select to add or remove existing services to a product You must have created services for options to be available Adding Digital Delivery Products A Digital Delivery Product lets a photographer select an entire catalog or specific photos in a catalog and within just a few clicks send the images to CD DVD or file Preview thumbnails Watermarks slideshows complete with music and any additional files can be added to the digital media In order to sell your digital media you need to set up a package to add to your pack
37. Select and drag photos from your workspace into the blank frames in the shopping cart Adding Items with the Keypad You can use the numbers or number keypad on your keyboard to quickly add items and their quantities to the cart Each package has a number to the left from 1 9 To add an item using the number keypad 1 Select the photo or photos you want to add to the cart 2 Select the keyboard number that corresponds to the package you want to add 3 Select a keyboard number to select a quantity of this package If you selected more than one photo the package will be added for each photo Adding an A La Carte Item to the Cart A la Carte items are single items and not part of a package you have set up To add an a la Carte item to the cart 1 Select the photo or photos you want to add to the cart 2 Hold and drag the photos into an empty space in the shopping cart A window appears 3 Select the item type and quantity for your photo a Use the dropdown menu at the top of the window to view specific print sizes b You can select multiple different items at the same time for your photo 141 Using Photo Library c If you selected more than one photo these items will be added for each photo d Select Clear Quantities to start over 4 Select OK Placing an Order Once you have every package and item set you can send the order to your orders workspace and off to printing To place an order 1 Select
38. This is where you will create organize publish and archive your photo catalogs General headings are available upon installation but can be changed at any time Selecting a catalog here will determine which photos appear in the Catalog Viewer Photo Viewer This is where you will review orient and organize photos within a catalog You can ada retouch and order individual photos here Shopping Cart This is where you will select packages and photos for purchase Any created package groups and products will be available here Photo Data This is where you will be able to view a histogram for any image and add tags to a photo or catalog Photo Workshop Here you will touch up edit or manipulate your photos before sending them to print All of the changes made here will be saved as a new file Your original photo file will remain unaffected There are five different tabs located at the bottom of the screen to provide editing Enhance Correct or Picture Style when working with Canon RAW files Color Balance Drop Out and View 36 Overview 2x 3x focus y 114 ae a min med max save changes 1 nicole010 jpg save as new photo save lo y Enhance rect Colo lance Drop Ou Manage Studio Photo Library Photo Workshop Orders Client Presentation Enhance This is for adding borders text and retouching your photos Correct Picture Style This is for adjusting light options such as shadows bri
39. a Top Level group that will contain subgroups or to create a Subgroup that will be added to the current group Select a name for the group Select OK Removing Groups To delete the group you are currently viewing l 2 3 4 Select the group you want to remove Select Delete Group from the bottom of the software Select to delete the current top level group or to delete the current subgroup you are viewing Select the name of the group you wish to delete Editing Groups To rename a group li 2 3 Select the group you want to rename Select Edit Group from the bottom of the software Select to rename the current top level group or to rename the current subgroup you are viewing Select the name of the group you wish to rename 77 Setting Up Your Products Setting a Default Group The default template group will open automatically when you want to select a border in any other part of the software To set a default group select a group and select Make Default from the bottom of the software Creating Templates You can create your own templates in the Border Workshop detailed here Select New Template to automatically open the workshop and start creating a template Importing Templates You can import any templates you have downloaded or created into the software To import a template 1 Select the group and subgroup you want to add the templates to Select Import Template from the bottom
40. a front and back display the back Viewing Aspect select the photo viewing aspect from your preset list of aspects Setup Aspect Ratio List setup a list of aspect ratios Frame view a white black or gray frame around photos in the workspace Soft Proof with Printer Profile select to copy a printer profile for viewing more accurate colors High Quality Previews view higher resolution images for photo previews Show Photo Numbers show photo numbers below each photo Show Make Editable Dialog check to prompt you to make saved photos editable in the future Guides o Show Guides show guidelines to help center photos o School standard school portrait guide with face bubble and aspect ratios o Standard show centering line and aspect ratios Paper Textures select a texture to be applied to all photos in the workspace o Polished Satin Canvas Velvet Watercolor Glossy Heavy Canvas Fullscreen view selected photo as a fullscreen preview View Hidden view hidden photos Catalog Menu Catalog Enhance Correc Color balance Drop Out change croppina remove iterr Manage Studio Photo Library Photo Workshop Orders Client Presentation 331 Reference Photo Workshop e Slideshow view all photos as a fullscreen slideshow e Sort Photos O O Sort Photos by Rating sort by your assigned 1 to 5 star rating Sort Photos by Time sort by the time assigned to the photo Sort Photos by Photo Nu
41. additional order sheets for easy scanning or for aesthetic value such as on the back of a baseball card or poster 263 Line Tutorial Border Workshop You can add a line and set or modify its attributes with this tool The line style will depend upon the effects that are applied by the tool Save Edit and Add Custom Object Line Options Type Line v Weight Ya pt Style Color MN Opacity 100 Join Square Ma Start MIN End Visibility Shown Drawing Mode h O Editing Mode v 4 4 4 4 The Border Workshop allows you to quickly use the previously mentioned tools to create and edit an object photo effect shape or text object and then save it as a custom object A Custom Object is something you create and name then save in a predetermined Custom Objects directory Once you have created an object you wish to save select Save Custom Object from the drop down menu which will bring up the Custom Objects prompt 264 Tutorial Border Workshop Custom Objects Name Heart object Add Diamond object Heart object Move Up Move Down Remove The Custom Objects window has two primary parts a text field and the Custom Objects list Click on the text field and enter the name you wish to associate with your custom object It is recommended that you name it descriptively so that you can recognize what each custom object is O
42. all the options you chose in the first three steps and gives you the opportunity to check and change them The Summary page is made up of links There are four headings one for each section of the Digital Delivery Wizard General Slideshow Extra Files and Summary Clicking on one of these headings or any of the links under it will take you back to that page of the wizard and allow you to change every option on the page 72 Setting Up Your Products General Slideshow Extra Files Summary Notice that the links below each heading include each specific option you have already selected You can quickly scan the choices you have made without returning to every page of the wizard to check them The Digital Delivery Wizard saves these settings for all future digital media Whenever you start the Digital Delivery Wizard the Summary page will always contain the options used for burning the last digital media This allows you to quickly start the wizard click on the Summary page and burn the media immediately if you want the same options selected as last time If you need to change the location a watermark or the music just click the appropriate link change it and return to the Summary page to burn the media This will save you a lot of time since you do not need to complete the entire wizard every time you need to create digital media 73 Setting Up Your Products Adding Services Now that you ve created some
43. also right click a photo in the photo bar and select Refresh 170 Using Photo Workshop Showing Photo Information Showing and Setting Photo Numbers To show photo numbers above photos in the photo bar select View from the top of the software and select and check Show Photo Numbers To set a starting photo number for all new photos added to the catalog select Catalog from the bottom left of the software and select Set Starting Photo Number All existing photo numbers will remain the same To reset the photo numbers for every photo in the catalog select Catalog from the bottom left of the software and select Reset Photo Numbers You will be prompted to enter a starting number for the photos Showing Photo Icons To show photo icons above photos in the photo bar select Catalog from the bottom left of the software and select and check Show Photo Icon Possible photo icons e i Printed e 4 Archived e El Enhanced e amp Hidden from Publishing Published Showing and Setting Photo Ratings To show photo ratings above photos in the photo bar select Catalog from the bottom left of the software and select and check Show Photo Rating To set a photo rating 1 Select any number of photos that you want to have the same rating 2 Right click on one of the selected photos 3 Select Edit Photo gt Rate Photo 4 Select 1 to 5 stars 1 being fair and 5 being best 171 Using Photo Workshop Showing and Se
44. b Select Lookup to browse photos and graphics already used in this border 4 Select Transparency options a Simple set a preset for transparency 0 is opaque and 100 is invisible b Predefined Mask select Edit fo choose a predefined vignette or transparency setting c Chroma key select a green or blue screen background d High Key select a white background e Low key select a black background 5 Select Movement options a Adjustable moving and scaling within an image cell b Fixed fixed position c Floating free movement throughout the border template d Relative moves relative to a previous object 6 Select and check Advanced options a Allow photo to overlap composite objects the photo will overlap other photos in a composite 221 Using Border Workshop Display image on screen as guide but do not print the image will display as guide for placement c Draw a frame around the photo create a frame around the photo Draw a drop shadow create a drop shadow under the photo Require photo to be manually selected you must manually select and drag a photo into the placeholder it will not be automatically populated with the current photo Rotation select a rotation angle to rotate the placeholder clockwise Rotate photo only when printing orientation is changed when printing only Test Photo select a browse for a photo to display as a guide while editing the border 7 Select Position and S
45. choose an action on the right Use search bar above to find a particular customer Click email to send them an emai Customer Name Phone Nicole Smith 456 2203 Sam Spade 344 223 2212 Fall Fall Gal Jack Sparrow none jackisback pirate com This is the customer information page Here you will find all address and contact information for this customer Enter the following information about the customer and select Save Customer e Name e Zipcode e Address e Phone Number e City e Status e State e Email 238 Tutorial Running a Shoot Customer Information First Name Test Last Customer Middle Address 123 Road City Austin State Provice TX Postal Code Phone Number 123 456 7890 Alternate Number Status Lead lt Add Status Rename Status Delete Status Email testing customer_net You will be returned to the customer information page Your new customer will appear in the list Studio Customers Use search bar above to articular c Customer Name Phone LL Test Customer 123 456 7890 K ll Nicole Smith 456 2203 New Customer hu Sam Spade 344 223 2212 Lu Jack Sparrow none Creating a Booking You must have added the customer to the software before you can add a booking Select the Manage Studio tab from the bottom of the software and select the Customers tab from the top of the studio Select the customer for the booking Customer Details ew all the customer s informatio
46. click in the text fields and type in the desired amounts Note Changing the coordinates within the Position fields can change the size of your object To quickly change the position of object you can click the Alignment Options button This option will bring up a drop down list of available alignments Left Center Right Center of Page Top Middle or Bottom The Size fields determine the width and height of your shape Click the arrow buttons or click in the text field to enter the desired size of your object To quickly change the size of a object you can click the Fill Options button This option will bring up a drop down list of available fill options Fill Entire Page Fill Width Fill Height Choosing one of these will extend those parameters to the edge of the border Adding an Effect You can add an effect object to overlay other objects in your template The effect object takes on the effect you specify such as grayscale or color saturation When you layer the effect object on top of another object on the page the effectis applied to the object 288 Tutorial Border Workshop Using the grayscale effect object you can create an image such as the one shown above The large photo is Photo and the small photos are Photo2 and Photo3 The effect object is layered under the small photos in the layer stack but on top of the large photo so only the large photo has the effect The layer the effect
47. create new ones The Photo Library and the Photo Workshop both use the same set of attributes To apply or save attributes select a photo and select Attributes from the top of the software Here is a detailed guide to attributes To reset attributes for a photo 1 Select a photo 2 Select Attributes from the top of the software 3 Select Reset Current to revert to the currently applied attributes A Select Reset System Defaults to revert to the default software attributes Applying Services You can apply and edit services from the Photo Workshop To apply or edit services 1 Select a photo 178 Using Photo Workshop Select Attributes from the top of the software Select Service Notes Select to add or remove a photo service for the selected photo Select to add a service comment or additional service Select OK Qs 72 BB You can also apply and edit services for a photo by right clicking the photo in the photo bar and selecting Edit Photo gt Service Notes Orienting Photos You can change the orientation of photos within the photo bar These options are the same as Photo Library orientation options found here Editing Shipping Info To edit a customer s shipping info right click on any photo in the photo bar and select Shipping Info or press CTRL H as a hotkey Edit the billing and shipping info and change the shipping type and cost and select Save Changes Removing Photos To remove a pho
48. discounts encourage your customers to purchase more pictures per order Use 64 8 Setting Up Your Products Add Edit and Remove to adjust volume discounts and set prices The largest discount for an order will always be applied automatically Select A la Carte Package if you want to allow purchase of individual products within this package Select Quick Print if you want to print this package immediately upon purchase Select High Priority if you want to print this package before other orders in the queue Select OK Editing a Package To edit a package select Edit Product near the top of the window and change the selected package settings To delete a package select Remove Product to remove the selected package Select Expand All or Collapse All to see every item and package included in the selected package group Creating a Product Products are individual items that are included in a package You can select the number of prints printing media any special print commands templates and services to be automatically applied to a product To add a Product l Select both the package group and the package you wish to add the product to Expand the package by selecting the down arrow to the left of the package name Select Add Item A prompt appears Select Fulfiller to determine who will print the item You can choose to fulfill the item yourself Local Print or log into your Labtricity account and se
49. ees pad 85 Editing UserRalesa a e el deco da e e a Sh RRS 85 FEPITUSSION SH S020 25s oes a OS O dada 85 Suggeste Role SEIU DS ka os SR eas Bee eis eR EN A AN A NSN 87 ACGING ON EM ploy O o de odiando 87 FONG Gn EMPIOY Ce o deel als ee oh wee flO es ele hassle 88 IMportand EXPO FIC serasi eati aeaee ea aE EA Ee E AEren AEE EATE cdl aaees cadevsecdecsads s vleviocsacsesedse 88 DUAA ESEE o EE E EE AE E E 88 rolo ioke R ENORI ER A EA TS EEEE E da 88 Editing A AAA ainei Ek tine e S iek o Sre i Eee Ere r e Seek o ieo esineti sine riis 89 mMporond EXPO s RR Es i ER RES 89 Using Studio Solution seas cccccceccnccccccanccacccacadecacanacacecanacenacanacedecancceuccanccenecanccenccanacenetanesan 90 Basic Studio FUSSION 90 AAA co tack E E E ARA EE E mets 90 Uta E I EEE EEE AA A ov edu EE au E SE E ETE 90 ota Lo oz GIO PORE E EE E A S 90 NO A RO 91 O O A E TO 91 l E RAEE ES EEEIEE TA ELA IEP E OEE D TO EE E EEEE E ee eee 91 SHOTUS BIEL A A A de 91 OO AO A E E A E A A AA 92 HOME PAIS A a e ii 72 Table of Contents AIRT RDE ESTA AEE el ea DOS counts 92 Editing BOOKING OF TASK iii aE EE A e eer aie a eeni ENR eiia 93 LBs 21g 2 peer erect a E SS 93 VAATE NOTS EEE E E A E E E a E EE Aloe O 94 TasKs INO EVENTS CONO E E kel A ai ino de 94 Adang BIN o Se o 95 AN e a do o td ca 96 ADMITA A A SEEE N 97 Using the Schedules COE NOM sccc c vscccicseccscvceuseccecsnieideetlccdeccbeessecaibecsecetdeddncedbectucabsesshce deccacsndessneeb ecdacei
50. effect e Select None to restore the photo Adjusting Tone Effect You can apply a black and white tone filter effect to a photo by selecting one of four tone types Tone effects include e Select Sepia to apply a sepia effect e Select Blue to apply a blue effect e Select Violet to apply a violet effect e Select Green to apply a green effect e Select None to restore the photo Using the Color Balance Toolset The color balance toolset includes tools for adjusting and selecting white balance settings color profiles and stored color settings These settings will correctly balance the color of your photos To open the color balance toolset select the Color Balance tab from the bottom of the Photo Workshop workspace The color balance tools will appear either to the right of the workspace Color balance toolset options are in order Preset Lighting Preset Balances Color Balance and Color Profiles 202 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets 128 click balance color balance color profile Saving Changes The software will not save color balance settings for a photo if you select another photo To save your settings for a photo use the save options detailed here Using Preset Color Balances Select a preset color balance to automatically compensate for lighting conditions There are four preset balances for the most basic types of lighting conditions e Daylight Incandescent compensates for the additio
51. effect specific Advanced options a Select Invert Mask to invert the transparent area of any mask you have selected Select Position and Size options found here 225 Using Border Workshop 8 Select OK Once you have created an effect use the make same tool to apply the effect to a specific item or the fill amp fit tool fo apply it to the entire border You can also apply an effect by selecting Add from the top of the software and selecting Effect and selecting an effect type which contains the previous options Adding a Custom Shape You can add a custom shape to the border Custom shapes are graphics with optional text that you can create edit and save for later use To add a custom shape 1 Select Add from the top of the software Select Shape Select a shape from the list A window appears Select graphic options found here Select text options found here DLON U OG IS Select Position and Size options found here 8 Select OK If you are adding a saved custom shape you can add it by selecting Add from the top of the software and selecting Add Custom Object and selecting your shape from the list To save your custom shape in the software 1 Select your shape Select Add from the top of the software Select Save Custom Object A window appears Select a name for your shape Select Add Select OK Oy 9 Br 20 IS 226 Using Border Workshop To edit saved custom shapes 1 Sele
52. employee can access Check the list below for more details on each feature 5 Select Save Role Editing User Roles Click an existing role to edit rename or delete it Permissions Here is a list of all user role features Check a permission to allow that role to use the feature e Schedule View has access to view the Calendar tab e Customers View has access to view the Customers tab e Employee View has access to view the Employees tab and check in out e Vendor View has access to view and use the Vendors tab 85 Setting Up Your Studio Products View has access to view and use the Products tab Printers View has access to view and use the Printers tab Cameras View has access to view and use the Cameras tab Reports View has access to view and use the Reports tab Options View has access to view and edit the Options tab Photo Library has access to view and edit items in the Photo Library Photo Workshop has access to view and edit items in the Photo Workshop Orders has access to view and edit orders in the Orders tab Add Task has access to add and assign tasks Edit Task has access to edit existing tasks Delete Task has access to delete tasks Add Customer has access to create new customers Edit Customer has access to edit existing customers Delete Customer has access to delete existing Customers Note This role should be limited to the Administrator Add Employee has access to create ne
53. exact size and positions the object to the exact position of the object you selected first e Make Same Width Sizes the object to the exact width of the object you selected first e Make Same Height Sizes the object to the exact height of the object you selected first e Make Same Font Applies the same font attributes as the text object you selected first Center Tool Use this tool to center selected items on the page When you have multiple items selected they are centered as a single unit e Horizontally Centers the object between the left and right of the page e Vertically Centers the object between the top and bottom of the page e Center Centers both horizontally and vertically Align Tool This tool aligns two or more selected objects with each other The first three align options are for the horizontal alignment of objects stacked vertically The last three are for the vertical alignment of horizontal objects e Left Aligns objects by their left edges e Center Aligns objects by their centers 293 Tutorial Border Workshop Right Aligns objects by their right edges Top Aligns objects by their top edge Middle Aligns objects by their middles Bottom Aligns objects by their bottom edges Space Tool Use the Space tool to evenly space three or more selected objects You can set spacing from the object edges or from the object centers Gaps Horizontally Equally spaces the gaps between objects lined horizonta
54. example in the Adding an Effect section Movement Options The Movement setting determines if you can move the photo inside the border when you apply the border in the Photo Workshop The default setting Adjustable gives you freedom to move the photo within the image cell The Fixed setting does not let you move the photo at all The Floating setting gives you freedom to move the photo anywhere on the page The Relative setting allows you to move the photo but its position remains relative to the object on the previous layer This is useful if you want to keep the relationship between two photos or a photo and text Using this option is like grouping objects In the example below you want to be able to move the photos as a whole but you do not want to be able to move them independently The large photo is set to Adjustable and the small photo is set to Relative 276 Tutorial Border Workshop Advanced Options You can add a frame to the photo and specify the frame color size and offset from the photo edges If you want a photo to have a shadow select the Draw a Drop Shadow option With this selection you can have the shadow appear either below the photo or on top of the photo so the photo appears inset Specify the offsets and radius of the shadow You can choose whether or not a photo must be manually selected When you disable this option selecting photos in the photo bar of the Photo Workshop automatically fills in the im
55. in a list View Photo Info List view photos as a detailed list of information Display Thumbnails display photo thumbnails in five sizes High Quality Preview view a higher resolution preview of photos Bottom Catalog Menu STUDIO SOLUTION 02X Catalogs Sort View Photos Softy Viewv a EB Show Data Hide Cart PhotoLibrary Portrait Sitting calor Austr TX V A y le 1 1 tal od iptior mages j o 2 2 5x7s Add Photo y Fir Orient Enhance Preview Publist py Bat 3 8x10 314 Reference Photo Library New Catalog Create New amp Import check to create and import photos when adding a catalog or event Add Photo Group to event add a photo group to the selected event Add Photo Catalog add a photo catalog to the selected catalog type Add Portfolio create a portfolio for using on your online storefront Find search for selected catalogs using a search string and method Info view and edit information for the selected catalog Bottom Photo Viewer Menu STUDIO SOLUTION 0 x Catalogs Sort View Photos Sorte Viewv EB Show Data Hide Cart PhotoLibrary Portrait Sitting location Austin TX 1 4x6 ii ial ii ideal das si ssi 2 25x7s Catalog v Find Info Add Photo v Find Orient Enhance Preview Publish Copy Bat 3 8x10 Add Photo import photos into the selected event Find search for selected photos within the catalog using a search string and method Orient Arrows click to rotate selected photo 90
56. item and select Show Object to show it again Locking Items You can lock items from editing The item will still be visible but cannot be selected or edited Use this to keep from accidentally moving or editing an item To lock an item 1 Right click a border item 2 Select Lock Object 3 An L will appear next to the item name in the border items list 4 Right click the item and select Unlock Object to make it editable again Linking Items You can link items to each other so that when one is moved they all move together To link an item 1 Right click any number of border items 2 Select Link Object 3 Right click the item and select Unlink Object to remove it from the linked group 219 Using Border Workshop Saving Changes and Borders You can save your border changes as the current border or save the border as a completely new border Select save changes or save as new border from the bottom of the software If you select to save as a new border you will need to rename and specify the location to save your border Adding Border Items Read on for guides to adding items to your border Selecting Position and Size Every border item can have a preset size and position upon creation You will set these options in the window that appears after selecting to add an item To adjust position and size 1 Select the Position and Size tab from the top of the window 2 Select the Units to work with inches pixel
57. make same from the right toolbar 4 Select an option 215 Using Border Workshop a Make Same Size make the item the same size as the last item b Make Same Size and Position make the item the same size as the last item and move the item to the same location as the last item These items will now overlap and it will be easiest to select one from the border items list c Make Same Width make the item the same width as the last item d Make Same Height make the item the same height as the last item e Make Same Font copy the font properties of the last item and apply them You can also right click one of the selected items and select Make Same from the dropdown menu for the previous options The last item will always be the one copied Centering Items You can center an item or a group of items to the page To center an item 1 Select a border item a You can use CTRL or SHIFT to select any number of border items They will be treated as one large group when centered 2 Select center from the right toolbar 3 Select to center an object a Horizontally within the page b Vertically within the page c Both horizontally and vertically within the page You can right click an item and select Center from the dropdown menu for the previous options Aligning Items You can align items to other items on the page To align an item 1 Select a border item 216 Using Border Workshop a You can use CT
58. most difficult subjects to reproduce photographically because skin color can vary significantly depending on lighting conditions and exposure balance The Portrait Picture Style adjusts the color fone magenta to yellow close to red range and adds brightness Skin color is reproduced in light pink with the correct exposure It is particularly well suited for shooting people To keep the soft and natural feeling of skin sharpness is set modestly Landscape Deep blue sky and vibrant green leaves call for more vivid colors The Landscape Picture Style changes the color respectively blue to a vivid and deep color green to a vivid and bright color 198 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets This style also uses a stronger sharpness setting to bring out details in mountains trees buildings and other subjects in the distance Neutral The Neutral setting is suitable for expressing subtle nuances within vivid colors even for objects with considerable contrast when wishing to convey delicate textures Contrast and saturation settings are moderated so there is less risk of overexposure and color saturation compared to other Picture Styles resulting in a more restrained and calmer expression Richer detail is retained as data so corrections can easily be rendered using Digital Photo Professional or Adobe Photoshop etc for JPEG output as well Faithful The Faithful setting enables reproduction of images that are c
59. of the software as STUDIO SOLUTION 07x e Front Back Add v Edit v Options v Undo Redo border items M Graphic sports jpg Fl Text First Name C Text Last Name O Text Team Name C Text Organization item o Text Year properties E Photo Photo2 C Photo Photo1 tot F T graphic gan i moke 3 ons A effect ae E duplicate space v Ta cut order My copy Ms COCR se E paste X delete next image First Name Ls y E previous image 00 measurements E X 2382 Y 1376 Manage Studio Photo Library Photo Workshop Orders Client Presentation sil 334 Reference Border Workshop Below are the menus for the Border Workshop Click a specific menu to jump ahead to that section Top Menu Left Toolbar Right Toolbar Right clicking an Item Top Menu STUDIO SOLUTION 0 x Front Back Add y Edit w Options v Undo Redo border items Front if your border has a front and back display the front Back if your border has a front and back display the back or create a back Photo add a photo placeholder to the border Multiple Photos add a photo composite placeholder to the border Graphic add a graphic to the border Text add text to the border Effect add a selected effect to the border o Brightness Color Darken Duotone Duotone Color Grayscale Invert RGB Negate RGB Overlay Sepia Saturation Watermark Antique Blur Shape add a selected
60. on your computer without exiting the software Enable auto orientation of captured images if supported the software will try to decide if photos you take are meant to be portraits or landscapes View a large preview of your photos on a second monitor this option is only available if you have a second monitor or Canon projector attached to your computer Any time you select a photo in the Photo Library the second monitor will display the photo full screen with a black background 41 Setting Up Software Options e Use the numeric keypad as shortcut keys for color correcting photos the numeric keypad will be used in the Photo Workshop for basic color correction functions e Ignore preview thumbnails embedded in images the software uses preview thumbnails for storing edits but other software will not recognize these files properly and the images you see in Studio Solution will not have the full edits when printed or published If you routinely use different software to edit and retouch photos select this option e Always show the import photos confirmation dialog when importing files this prompts you for confirmation when selecting Import All from Add Photo gt Import e Always show the quick import confirmation dialog when importing photos if you are using quick import this prompts the user for confirmation when importing photos e Always show the burn to disk confirmation dialog when burning files or catalogs this promp
61. open the folder containing the photos 1 Select Photos from the very top center of the software or right click on a photo 2 Select Open Containing Folder 3 This is the location and subdirectory containing your selected photos To copy the file location containing the photos 1 Select Photos from the very top center of the software or right click on a photo 128 2 Select Copy Path to Clipboard Using Photo Library 3 The location is now saved in your clipboard Selecting Paste or CTRL V will paste the location of the photos Viewing Photo Properties To see the properties of a selected photo select Photos from the very top center of the software or right click on a photo and select Properties A window with two tabs appears The following information is displayed on the properties tab Filename Path Image Size File Size Date Last Modified Orientation Cached status Archived status Published status Hidden status Photographer s Notes The Photo Data tab is used for setting queries A query has a property and a value and is used to organize photos automatically when dealing with large groups Keep reading for a brief example Imagine you are creating composite photos for a soccer team where each player will have a team photo and a player photo Now imagine you are creating composites for twenty different teams You can simplify your search and creation process l 2 3 4 5 Select
62. page ES Booking Information Choose Customer fest Customen A E ee iy Search Add New Test Cuslomer lil Customer Info 123 Road Austin TX Edit Customer 123 456 7890 testing customer net Delete Booking Choose Date 6 3 2009 Start Time 7 15 AM y End Time 8 15 AM w Enter Name Portrait Sitting Add Note Enter Description This is a test booking for a tutorial Update Status Booked Iw Add Status Rename Status Delete Status Choose Room Studio m Add Room Rename Room Delete Room I Goto Schedule Call Z Add a reminder call to the calendar for this booking Session Assign Employee s Unassigned Assign Employee If you could not find the booking on your home page or you are starting the booking early select the Customers tab from the top of the studio and click on the customer 243 Tutorial Running a Shoot name in the list Then click on the booking name to open the booking information page Select the Go to Session button on the right side of the software Goto Session The booking will open automatically with a new catalog in the Photo Workshop The catalog created is under Portraits titled with the customer s name last name first The photo group within the catalog is titled with the booking information you entered STUDIO SOLUTION 0 x Single Multiple Photos Attributes y Sortw View Fullscreen Show Data Show Cart Cap
63. photos as soft proofs with your printer profile to get a better idea of what the printed product will look like To view photos with a printer profile select View from the top of the software and select Soft Proof with Printer Profile and select or browse to a printer profile Viewing and Setting Aspect Ratios Every photo in the workshop is displayed cropped to an aspect ratio The default aspect ratio will depend on your camera settings but once an aspect ratio is set for a photo it will be saved To view the current photo with a different aspect ratio 1 Select a photo 2 Select View from the top of the software 167 Using Photo Workshop Select Viewing Aspect Select a viewing aspect from the list All viewing aspects included in your packages will appear in the list Select a photo 2 3 At the top right of the window is a viewing aspect with arrows on each side Select the lt and gt arrows to cycle through the available aspect ratios You can also add edit and remove aspect ratios from the list To set up available aspect ratios 1 ek a eS Select View from the top of the software 2 Select Setup Aspect Ratio List 3 4 A window appears Select Add to create a new aspect ratio a Select a name width and height Select an aspect ratio and select Edit to edit an existing aspect ratio a Select a name width and height Select an aspect ratio and select Remove to delete it Se
64. photos in the catalog o System Defaults apply the system default photo settings to all photos in the catalog o Catalog Defaults apply the catalog default photo settings to all photos in the catalog o Custom 1 4 apply custom photo settings 1 4 to all photos in the catalog Service Notes view and edit services for selected photo Reset Current reset selected photo to previous attributes Reset System Defaults reset selected photo to system default photo attributes Sort Photos by Rating sort by your assigned 1 to 5 star rating Sort Photos by Time sort by the time assigned to the photo Sort Photos by Photo Number sort by the assigned photo numbers Sort Photos by Filename sort by the photo filename Sort Photos by Full Pathname sort by the entire computer pathname Sort Photos by File Size sort by file size Sort Photos by Published sort by published and unpublished Sort Photos by Archived sort by archived and unarchived Sort Photos by Exif Comment sort by Exchangeable Image File information Sort Photos by Sort by Custom manually click and drag photos to their positions 330 Reference Photo Workshop Sort Photos in Ascending Order sort by the previous criteria in ascending order Sort Photos in Descending Order sort by the previous criteria in descending order Clear clear the workspace of all photos Front if your photo has a front and back display the front Back if your photo has
65. process service nip Pronin Process m Service Cost 5 00 3 Selecta price 4 Select OK 74 Setting Up Your Products Adding a Lab Service A lab service will be provided by one of your Labtricity labs Each lab will offer different services at different prices You will see the lab s wholesale cost so that you may mark Up appropriately To add a lab service 1 Select Add Lab Service 2 Select a lab from the dropdown box 3 Select a service from the available list 4 Select OK Editing a Service Select Edit or Remove in the Studio Services list to modify or delete an existing service t Managing Templates Templates are borders backgrounds text overlays or composites to be applied to products We ve already covered assigning templates as you create products so now we ll worry about managing groups and organizing existing templates Find these options in Manage Studio gt Products gt Templates and Composites Viewing Templates Directly under the Studio tabs you will find a list of template tabs Each tab includes multiple templates of that type Templates are organized in groups and those groups contain all related subgroups For example Sample Borders is a group containing several subgroups such as sports composites and holidays composites Use the lt and gt arrows to the left of the template tabs to jump back or forward within the template tabs and click on a specific title to view te
66. registered through a connection to a computer For more information on Picture Styles visit http www canon co jp imagin icturestyle index html Adjusting Contrast Adjusting the contrast will lighten the light colors and darken the dark colors Contrast options include e Select to increase the contrast by 1 point e Select to decrease the contrast by 1 point e Select the box to reset the contrast to 0 e Select contrast to open a dropdown menu with preset values To manually enter a contrast value select the contrast number below the tool and manually type in a value Adjusting Exposure a You can adjust the exposure of a photo by plus or minus 3 stops exposure Exposure options include e Select to increase the exposure by 25 points up to 3 e Select to decrease the exposure by 25 points down to 3 e Select the box to reset the exposure to 0 e Select exposure to open a dropdown menu with preset values To manually enter an exposure value select the exposure number below the tool and manually type in a value Adjusting Sharpness You can adjust the sharpness of a photo up to 7 points aj je sharpness v Sharpness options include e Selecta to increase the sharpness by 1 point up to 7 200 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets e Select to decrease the sharpness by 1 down to 0 e Select the box to reset the sharpness to 0 e Select sharpness to open a dropdown menu with preset values
67. section on setting up employees 10 Select Save Call 11 The call will now appear on your Tasks and Events calendar on the specified date and time Call Information Choose Customer Sam Spade x Add New Customer Info Edit Customer 344 223 2212 Spysam pandora net Choose Date 5 31 2009 di Choose Time 10 30 AM y Enter Description Sam confirmation Enter Call Details Sam and Pam ready to go Update Status Assigned v Add Status Rename Status Delete Status hen Employass Yaz Alcoi x Using the Schedules Calendar Select the Schedules button from the bottom of the window to access this calendar This calendar shows all of your employee schedules If you are viewing your tasks and events by day the day will be divided into as many columns as employees that are scheduled that day Sunday 5 31 2009 Nicole Riddle Yaz Akrout New H Yaz Akrout Early shift Dur 3 45 Nicole Riddle Training Yaz Dur 1 00 To schedule an employee 1 Make sure you are in the Schedules calendar 98 Using Your Studio 2 Double click on any day 3 Choose an employee from the dropdown box a If you want to search for an existing employee select Search Type in part of the employee information in the Find box select the criteria to search for in the From dropdown box and select Search You can also organize the list of employees by clicking on a header to sort When you have found the employee d
68. shape to the border o Arch Circle Diamond Ellipse Hear Octagon Rectangle Star Triangle Barcode add a barcode to the border for storing information and scanning Line add a line to the border 335 Reference Border Workshop Save Custom Object save a custom shape or graphic you created Edit Custom Objects view and edit a list of custom shapes or graphics you created Add Custom Objects view a list of and add one of the custom shapes or graphics you created Duplicate copy and paste an exact duplicate of the item including item description Cut copy an item to the clipboard and delete it Copy copy an item to the clipboard Paste paste the current item from the clipboard Delete delete the current item Select All select all available border items Options Undo and Redo undo and redo the last step Show Grid check to display a grid for aligning and snapping objects Grid Options view a list of grid options for displaying and snapping objects border Auto Alignment automatically align objects to the grid OS photo Left Toolbar multiple photos Border Properties view and edit border properties Add Photo add a photo placeholder to the border graphic text Add Multiple Photos add a photo composite placeholder to the border Add Graphic add a graphic to the border duplicate Add Text add text to the border cut Add Effect add a selected effect to the border Sopy e
69. sista eens OER EKNE ETEN EA eE erR EaR oE TENE aiat 74 Adding koi Ko SIA E TA EE L E ate da 75 Table of Contents SSA eee tare teks bie cars A ON ieee neta 75 Managing LENNIE S irsana ace ds 75 VIEWING Templo te Bette es ee A A Ses Be es ee A ee ss 75 AGING GrOU KEA a e AAU aaa MAS Aang Shea eee 77 REMOVING OU ii A A Ee EE eera arie ien eeki ae T eaa 77 Editing BUS e 77 SEMANA DETIUIAEIOU de cestu oi a aap 78 Creonng Templates a o 78 IMPOLtING TEM PATO cicciocoacciincinoccinca antonia dior bis cdecstiedchgeleeoss ath oedsucebbesdhcetbes chueWseccecsageninuebeccdacseseses 78 DeletingTEMPlI Ei eet ce eee oe ale th ee se ed se A a ein Secs 78 EGHING TEMPIGIES E ess nde ah Se adi s 78 es A E OR 79 Setting Up INE Der QUIF SOU A A lc E 79 Adding G SHIPPING Group ii A A e none 80 EJAT O SAIPDING IEMs cr eerie the slate eet e bd cela rl o Nd ela dacs o 80 ARA dcebsscaeawasbepes ai adcaea esd E A E E tecatssdaiiaagedcecansecsdesseetee concedes 80 TG IMO NUCH MO NA e E E wedaens 80 LOECONOLGESr SASS LOX Ai sibs ue cesses seated tases ie o a E da 80 Shipping and Handling TAK ii ada 8l Seting Up Your SIUGIO ponian iaa 82 Ve dorsand Inventory ii A A A AA AA Aca Pela 82 lo eS poo A eee ay Bid els dot ta Md octane ts oe ya BS ph RE Ld ea ie 82 Editing AMEN decia iaa 82 Adding AN NA tii 83 Table of Contents UDAGTIAG USEGIAVERTORY soiree eo ay LE ect aa ih dat de ian reo OM ace teen St 84 EMPlOYEES LE OEE a 84 Adding USECPROIE 00 a A a o
70. size The Position fields determine exactly where each side of the shape is located The farthest point up down left and right of the shape will be placed at these coordinates A Top entry of O means the topmost part of the object will extend to the very edge of the top border A Left entry of 50 means the object will start 50 pixels from the leftmost 278 Tutorial Border Workshop edge of the border To change the position of the edges of your object use the arrow buttons or click in the text fields and type in the desired amounts Note Changing the coordinates within the Position fields can change the size of your object To quickly change the position of object you can click the Alignment Options button This option will bring up a drop down list of available alignments Left Center Right Center of Page Top Middle and Bottom The Size fields determine the width and height of your shape Click the arrow buttons or click in the text field to enter the desired size of your object To quickly change the size of a object you can click the Fill Options button This option will bring up a drop down list of available fill options Fill Entire Page Fill Width Fill Height Choosing one of these will extend those parameters to the edge of the border Add Multiple Photos Adding multiple photos using the Add Photo tool lets you create layouts where photos are positioned anywhere on the page
71. that will be flipped on a horizontal hinge rather than the normal vertical hinge used in most books This option can only be enabled if your border has a back and then only from the Border Properties on the back tab If you are in the Border Properties of the front tab this option will be grayed out In most cases you will use the default photo orientation setting of Use photo orientation When you apply a border to a photo the photo retains its original orientation in the border opening Choose one of the rotate options to rotate the photo either clockwise or counterclockwise within the image cell If a border has variable fields that require you to input text you can set the Text Dialog option to either show the Text Fields window each time the border is applied or open the window only when you click the border Text button 271 Tutorial Border Workshop Using the Border Items List As you add objects to a border the objects are listed in the Border Items column on the right side of the screen Use this list to select items on the page You can also select an item on the page by clicking it but as you overlap items it can be difficult to select items underneath When you select items in the Border Items list they are also selected on the page You can double click an item in the list to edit its properties or select the item and click item properties on the toolbar Delete a selected item by clicking delet
72. the border to a photo the application prompts you to enter the name of the person in the photo so his or her name appears To add text click add text on the toolbar The Text Object window appears Enter the text you want to appear on the page If you want to enter a text variable type a percent sign before and after the variable name For example you enter the text My name is Zname This example prints the static text My name is and then prompts you for a name You might also use variable text without static text For example Atitle prompts you for the person s title and prints only the title You can insert predefined variables such as the date or copyright by clicking the Insert Auto Text button and selecting a variable Attribute Options Select the font settings and text alignment You can set color attributes by checking the attributes you want to use and choosing a color This section allows the photographer to set text opacity the background color for the text box and the background color opacity Movement Options The Movement setting determines if you can move the text when you apply the border in the Photo Workshop The Fixed setting does not let you move the text at all The Floating setting gives you freedom to move the text anywhere on the page The Relative setting allows you to move the text but its position remains relative to the object on the previous layer This is useful if you want to keep the rel
73. the current aspect ratio of the images Studio Solution will fit the larger dimension to the picture and crop out any parts of the shorter side that are beyond the specified dimensions Advanced Options Advanced Options will allow you to add a watermark to the copied images Watermarks are semi transparent graphics repeated over the picture to deter image theft and unauthorized copies of the original picture To add a watermark to the copied images check the box next to Would you like to add a watermark to these images Uncheck the box to disable this option 69 Slideshow Setting Up Your Products The second page in the Digital Delivery Wizard is the Slideshow component It is possible to export a slideshow of all the photos along with the photos themselves You can also add music and promotional images to the slideshow General Slideshow Extra Files Summary Slideshow Would you like to add a slideshow to the digital media Enter the number of seconds you would like to see each image Y Do you want a smooth fade in out transition in the slideshow Select the music file you would like played for the slideshow If you would like to add promotional images to the slideshow select tl that contains the promotional and stock images Browse he directory Browse To enable a slideshow for the digital media click the Slideshow tab at the top of the Digital Delivery Wizard window and check
74. the drop down menu another drop down menu will appear with available shapes add edit options undo re Photo Multiple Photos Graphic Text Effect Shape gt Arch gt Circle enla Diamond Save Custom Object Ellipse Edit Custom Objects Heart Add Custom Object gt Octagon Rectangle gt Star gt Triangle Some shapes have multiple versions of the shape available in additional drop down menus Once you have selected your desired shape you will be taken to the Shape Object menu where you can modify every part of the shape 260 Tutorial Border Workshop Barcode You can add a barcode object to your border by selecting the Barcode option in the Add menu A barcode provides a reliable way to keep track of data allowing you to simply scan the code to determine price order number or any data desired r Barcode Object General Size and Position ZOrderld Barcode Format Codabar o Show Text Insert Special Text derld 8 Once you have selected a barcode the Barcode Object window will appear There are two tabs a General tab and a Size and Position tab From the General tab first select the barcode format you will be using Click the drop down menu next to Barcode Format and select your desired format from the list The empty text field at the top will determine what data is put int
75. the photo size e Select the arrow to increase the photo size e Select the box in the middle of the tool to revert to the original size Select Scale to open a dropdown menu with additional options 182 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets Select Reset Scale to revert to the original size Select Reset Scale and Position to revert to the original size and center the photo Press CTRL R as a hotkey Select a to increase or decrease the photo size You can also scale a photo by moving the mouse wheel up and down Orienting a Photo You can change the orientation of photos in the workspace Basic orientation options include en orientation Select the clockwise or counter clockwise arrows to rotate the photo 90 in that direction Select the vertical orientation box to view the photo vertically Select the box again to rotate it 180 Select the horizontal orientation box to view the photo horizontally Select the box again to rotate it 180 Select Orientation fo open a dropdown menu with additional options Vertical oriented vertically Horizontal oriented horizontally Vertical Flipped oriented vertically but upside down compared to the original Horizontal Flipped oriented horizontally but flipped sideways compared to the original Rotate Clockwise rotate the photo 90 clockwise Press O as a hotkey Rotate Counter Clockwise rotate the photo 90 counter clockwise Press SHIFT O as a
76. the photos or fixing orientation e Select the Correct tab to lighten darken or add contrast e Select the Color Balance tab to set the white balance e Save all changes to each photo If the customer is not waiting on you feel free to take your time and make major adjustments and edits Presenting Photos Once you have finished fixing any technical problems with photos it s time to present the photos to the customer For this we ll switch to Presentation Mode for a cleaner and friendlier look free of distractions 247 Tutorial Running a Shoot If you left the Photo Workshop you need to reopen the booking in the Photo Library or the Photo Workshop e Select the Manage Studio tab from the bottom of the software and select the Customers tab from the top of the studio Select the customer name and ensure that the booking was properly saved ustomer Details iew all the customer s informat ookings and history Perform a ustomer Details by clic dei opriate tools at the bottom of the ere fej Test Customer Current Bookings 123 Road No current bookings available Austin TX E Previous Bookings Portrait Sitting View Photos 6 3 2009 7 15 AM tatus Lead Calls The booking should appear under Current Bookings or Previous Bookings with a time and link to view photos e Select View Photos to open the photos in the Photo Library Make sure this is the correct photo group and catalog If so let s assume the custome
77. the photos and manually import them Go here for more information on importing photos Setting Filename Options Regardless of how you import photos you can set the software to generate new filenames for all photos you import Find these options in Manage Studio gt Cameras and select Changed File Naming Options from the middle of the screen Select a bubble to set new photo filenames The following filename options are available e Automatic the unique filenames will be based off the day and time or the Filmbar number You can add a prefix for the filenames in the textbox An example of your format will appear Note The Filmbar is displayed on the left side of the Photo Workshop window when Single is selected at the upper left hand corner of the window The Filmbar number is the number displayed under the image e Numbered the unique filenames will be numbered starting incrementally from the starting number you specify You can add a prefix for the filenames in the textbox An example of your format will appear e Customer Driven the unique filenames will be based off the customer ID and one of the following date and time picture number or picture name Select to Show the filename dialog for every picture taken if you want to view filename info for imported photos 62 Setting Up Your Products Setting Up Your Products Now that the general options are set and your network is working it s time to set u
78. the small calendars near the right of the window to navigate dates Select the lt and gt arrows above the calendar view to change the week or month 4 June 2009 gt SMTWT FS a 456 e Select the to automatically go to the current day and 789 ma TET week or month 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 93 Using Your Studio Viewing Modes The calendar has three viewing modes day week and month To change the viewing mode select the day week or month buttons located to the right below the calendar Viewing by Day This will show the selected day or days if you selected more than one with an hour by hour schedule The current date or dates will appear above the large calendar view Viewing by Week This will show a full week listing all bookings tasks and calls Viewing by Month This will show a full month listing the top few bookings tasks and calls A will appear in a calendar day if other events exist You will need to switch to viewing by month or day to see all events for that day Viewing by Custom Select and hold CTRL and click the mouse button to select any number of days from the small calendar located on the right side of the screen The calendar will display these days Tasks and Events Calendar Select the Tasks and Events button from the bottom of the window to access this calendar This calendar shows all of your current bookings tasks and calls for the studio
79. through running an entire shoot from the moment the customer schedules a booking to the moment you send the order off for printing If you re already familiar with some of the steps feel free to click a link and jump ahead to a later step Adding a Customer Creating a Booking Setting Up Your Camera Starting the Shoot Capturing and Importing Photos Retouching Photos Presenting Photos Creating an Order Printing an Order 39 PS eS ee oS bP Each step has its own guides for using tools and navigating the software so don t worry if you ve never used the software before All specific directions for using tools will be written in red for easy reading Now let s start at the beginning Adding a Customer If a customer comes into your studio or calls to make an appointment you ll first need to enter them into the customer database 237 Tutorial Running a Shoot Select the Manage Studio tab from the bottom of the software and select the Customers tab from the top of the studio Manage Studio Photo Library Photo Workshop Orders Client Presentation The customer tab will display a list of all studio customers If you are adding a booking for an existing customer just select them from the list For this shoot we re going to add a new customer Select New Customer from the right side of the window Studio Customers Click on a customer name below to view details and bookings or
80. turn off the software while publishing Select any number of photos you want to publish 2 3 Select Publish located above the photo viewer 4 Select Publish Selected 5 The status bar at the bottom left of the software will turn blue and show a of publishing 6 When a photo is published you will see a prompt and all published photos will show a P in the upper left hand corner Un Publishing Photos To remove photos from your online storefront 1 Select any number of photos you want to unpublish 2 Select Publish located above the photo viewer 133 3 4 5 Using Photo Library Select Un Publish Selected Confirm that you want to unpublish the catalog Select Yes Batch Publishing and Un Publishing Events To publish or un publish more than one event at a time select Publish from above the photo viewer Select which events you want to publish or un publish then select Batch Publish or Batch Un publish Copying Photos To copy photos from the photo viewer to another location l Select any number of photos Select Copy located above the photo viewer A window appears 2 3 4 Browse to the location of the photos you wish to copy to Select how to copy the files a Simply copy the files to the destination without changing the file type b Or Convert the files to another format while copying i Select a new file format for the imported photos If you want to rename the import
81. with files to play and loop automatically e Choose Music Folder select a music folder to play and loop alll files e Choose Music File select a single music file to play and loop 326 Reference Presentation Mode Orientation Vertical orient selected photo vertically Horizontal orient selected photo horizontally Vertical Flipped orient selected photo vertically and flipped 180 Horizontal Flipped orient selected photo horizontally and flipped 180 Rotate Clockwise rotate selected photo 90 clockwise Rotate Counter Clockwise rotate selected photo 90 counter clockwise Flip flip selected photo 180 Set Crop Orientation o Auto let the software decide to crop selected photo vertically or horizontally o Vertical crop selected photo vertically o Horizontal crop selected photo horizontally Set Default Orientation o Vertical set selected photo with vertical orientation as default o Horizontal set selected photo with horizontal orientation as default o Vertical Flipped set selected photo with vertical orientation flipped 180 o Horizontal Flipped set selected photo with horizontal orientation flipped 180 Set Tilt Angle set a custom tilt angle for selected photo 1 12 Photos view 1 12 photos in the workspace at one time View Less Photos view less photos in the workspace at one time View More Photos view more photos in the workspace at one time Show Filenames show filenames
82. worrying about losing data This chapter will guide you through getting all of your computers printers and cameras on a network and talking to each other Typical Networks You will first need to determine what kind of network you wish to run Below is a compilation of common network setups for different studios If you already know which kind of network you plan to use feel free to skip down to Your Network Single Computer Studios A typical single computer studio includes one of the following setups Most of these setups will do their printing through any number of local printers to fulfill orders Both tethered and un tethered cameras can be used in any setup Tethered cameras will import quickly and automatically but require you to be close to the system un tethered cameras will require an import step but work best for mobile shoots 48 Onsite Studios A typical onsite studio includes one of the following setups Setting Up Your Network These setups deliver prints on demand Use local printers for smaller prints onsite and send larger prints back to your studio The computer in this setup works as a preview and order station while cameras can be tethered or un tethered at the station or roaming around with photographers and manually imported later during the event a D EIN Gr As Small Studios A typical small studio includes one of these setups If one Computer station is not enough the software can b
83. 140 Placing Orders 142 Saving Orders 142 Single vs Multiple 166 Slideshow 164 Software Supported CD DVD 32 Supported File Formats 32 space tool 294 Station ID 40 Status Bar 9 Errors 300 System Properties 46 targa 255 Tax Information 80 Local Order Sales Tax 80 Template Marketplace Show purchased 42 templates borders 254 365 Index Templates Creating 78 Importing 78 Viewing 75 test form tool 297 text fonts on borders 292 on borders 259 286 variable fields on borders 297 Thumbnails 124 Title Bar 90 Tone 194 Toolsets 181 Undo Retouch 269 User Roles Adding 85 Users 90 Vendors Setting Up 82 Viewing Guides 169 Vignettes 193 Index Zoom 296 366 Canon Allimages and effects simulated Not responsible for typographical errors Availability and specifica tions subject to change without notice Canon is a registered trademark of Canon Inc in the United States and may also bea registered trademark or a trademark in other countries 2010 Canon U S A Inc 2009 ExpressDigital Inc All Rights Reserved
84. 38 Setting Up Software Options Setting Software Options Before using the software you will need to set many of the basic software options Let s start with the most basic functions Change your Settings Setup your Online Accounts and Configure your Network Studio Information General Settings ck here to change Network Options ck here to configure your netwo Photoreflect Account Labtricity Account System Properties Calibrate Monitor Find and select the Manage Studio tab at the bottom of the software 0 Studio Information Find these options in Manage Studio gt Options gt Studio Information The first step is entering your studio information Enter your studio name address and contact information and click Save This information will be used automatically in other parts of the software Studio Information Studio Name Address 1 Address 2 City State Region PostalCode Country Studio Contact Information First Name Last Name Phone Fax Email Mobile Save Cancel 39 Setting Up Software Options General Settings Find these options in Manage Studio gt Options gt General Settings Select a heading to change the software options Below is a list and description of each header and its options dar Customers Employees Vendors Products Printers Cameras Reports Options Change your General Settings Use this page to change your settings so the aj App
85. 52 A a A EA 253 Advanced Border WorkshOD ici si n 254 Border WOrkKSMODs MENU ees edad 255 FLORES BOCK TODD eii 256 O O E T 258 e E A EEE evade a ARAN AAN AN 266 18 0 110 8 EAN E cia 266 Setting Border Properties nannini reroror are e EE EEE EEE i E 270 Using the Border hemis Lists ss sscssssescessaascgavasnesasssesioassieapasavashy cabsoaescasnanenagapagnveanesuesers 272 Adding Photo PlaceholderS AAA O A enone ei er teeta PEINE 272 TFANSPALENCY OPIO id let 274 MOVEMENT OPTIONS 2 A A A A A A A RE 276 AAVANCSA OPIONS E E EAE tir e di ralla a dele blico 277 SIZE ANO POMO o A a aia ey Dre Des e cau a tes a aoe tals 278 Adda Muliple cd ML KO Soa eer ee ee 279 RA OLO QUENES ol leed dad 280 Image Cell SettihgS ici iii 282 RROTO MODAS a O o de Wea uh a E A Ol Sidi Geet fate 283 23 Table of Contents GOMPOSHESODHONS 2 eich re tere dial tee cans ete es Mb e o ES EE dd fiber artic ON toes aod 283 COMPOSITE SIZES CINE POSITION iii a E 283 AAGING GC Border Graph cee catch sui aouaiea eae eee ate 284 HANSPAFENGCY OC PHOS A OER MERE RA otis 284 MOVEMENT OPTIONS wecsvedcccciveieend A iaa 284 AVANCE OPINIONS skeet ise i es EI BI IBIS 285 SIZEQNG SA NO 285 ao A A E A AA 286 ATITIDUTS OPM Susini aia 286 MOVE Men ODIN iaa 286 Vertical AliQnment OPIO aa 286 Character and line SPACING serienn etine sirk oira is kio ir iis ek iiiki setier ries 287 ARVIN CO RODIN it dais 287 SIZE ANA POSO aia aeea E ae snug uegnseGibsae serena AE E a EA A E
86. 9 Getting Started ror Running a Shoot If you re only concerned with the steps necessary to run a shoot start to finish jump ahead to the tutorial Click here to run a shoot T Troubleshooting Click here to troubleshoot Reference If you re looking for detailed screenshots button descriptions or shortcut keys check the reference guides Click here for reference material If you re looking for a list of shortcut keys click here instead Looking for Something Specific Try looking in the Table of Contents or the Index To view a permanent and collapsible Table of Contents to the left of this manual select View gt Navigation Panels gt Bookmarks from the PDF menu Just click on a heading to jump to that section Want to Print the Manual The manual is a considerable size but you can print it if you want a physical copy Simply select File gt Print from the PDF menu or press CTRL P as a hotkey Installing Studio Solution Supported Operating Systems Studio Solution is supported on Windows XP Vista and Windows 7 You can run the software on any Mac OS that supports Boot Camp For more information on running Boot Camp go to Apple s support page Recommended Operating Requirements e Pentium 4 Celeron 1 8GHz or AMD equivalent e Microsoft Windows XP Vista or Windows 7 with all installed service packs e 1GBRAM 30 Getting Started 80 GB hard drive or more depending on storage requirements SV
87. 9 Using Retouch Workshop Using the Retouch Workshop The Retouch Workshop provides a workspace for making any necessary retouches and edits to a photo The workshop has an extensive series of tools for fixing even the smallest details of a photo Find the Retouch Workshop by selecting the Photo Workshop tab from the bottom of the software and selecting the Enhance tab from the bottom of the workspace Select the photo you wish to retouch and select the Retouch tool from the enhance toolset Ensure that you have Use Retouch Workshop enabled with a check Navigating the Retouch Workshop The Retouch Workshop is a workspace surrounded on all sides by tools e The left toolbar includes all retouch tools and undo and redo options e The right toolbar includes different retouch methods and navigation options e The top toolbar includes retouch settings specific to the selected retouch tool and method e The bottom of the workspace includes all save options t STUDIO SOLUTION o 02 gt 230 Using Retouch Workshop Panning Select pan from the right toolbar to click and drag the photo around This is most helpful when you are zoomed in for editing small details Zooming In Select zoom from the right toolbar to zoom in and out e Left click on an area of the border to zoom in e Right click to zoom out e Click and drag a box around an area to zoom in and fill the workspace with that area You can also z
88. 994 2009 Express Digital Inc All rights reserved v1 00 1656 Canon password Select the Manage Studio tab then select the Employees sub tab Select Admin then select Edit Employee located at the lower left corner of the page Input a password then select Save Your password is now set Logging Into Your Online Account If you have an ExpressDigital PhotoReflect account you can set the software to log into it automatically First you will need to set your PhotoReflect options here Once they are set you can select to Automatically log in to Online Account at the login screen to connect to your PhotoReflect and Labtricity accounts upon login The user logging in must have access to these accounts to use this feature Logging In as an Employee To log in as an employee they must first have an employee account The password if required can be set when the employee is created The employee s access and permissions in the software is dependent upon the rights assigned to them Learn more about setting up employees here 33 Overview Overview Studio Solution is divided into five tabs to easily manage your photography studio These tabs are located at the bottom of the software screen Manage Studio Photo Library Photo Workshop Orders Client Presentation Manage Studio contains all of the day to day studio operation option such as Calendars Products Printers Cameras and other general settings for the s
89. Add Data Set the Property to Team Name Set the Value to Bumblebees and select OK Select OK When you are creating or using a border you can assign a border to automatically import photos with specific data such as Team Name or even specific data such as Team Name Bumblebees or Team Name Sharks This one query will automatically import the composite photo each time the border is applied saving you precious time You can also view properties by right clicking on a photo and selecting Properties 129 Using Photo Library Showing Photo Histograms and Data If you want to view technical photo data select Show Data from the top right of the software The following information will be shown on the right side of the workspace e Filename e Photo Histogram e Photo Notes e Capture Date e EXIF Data e Photo Rating agame e Editing Software Photo Number e ODE ISO Info Resolution e Flash Settings e Capture Megapixels e Color Space Select Click to Add under photo data to add photographer notes to this photo Select Hide Data from the top left of the software if you do not want to display photo data Saving Attributes Attributes are a series of edits or settings for a photo that can be saved and applied to other photos and catalogs You can quickly assign and apply up to four different attribute settings at once or create new ones The Photo Library and the Photo Workshop both use the same set of attributes
90. Advanced options i Select to draw frames around the photos ii Select to draw shadows 6 Select Position and Size options found here 7 Select OK You can also add a composite item by selecting Add from the top of the software and selecting Multiple Photos which contains the previous options Adding a Graphic Item You can add graphics and other images to the border 1 Select add graphic from the left toolbar 2 Awindow appears 3 Select or browse to a graphic to add a Select Lookup to browse photos and graphics already used in this border b Select Graphic List to add more than one graphic for this item 4 Select Transparency options a None draw the entire image 223 b Gs d Using Border Workshop Simple set a preset for transparency 0 is opaque and 100 is invisible Drop out a specific color remove a color as a transparent area Use image alpha channel 32 bit targa or png 5 Select Movement options 6 Select Advanced options a b C d Allow photo to overlap composite objects Display image on screen as guide but do not print Select to draw frames around the photos Select to draw shadows 7 Select Position and Size options found here You can also add a graphic by selecting Add from the top of the software and selecting Graphic which contains all of the previous options Adding Text You can add text items to your border 1 2 Bo OS PUES Select add text f
91. Auto Orient 41 barcode 261 Basic Toolset 181 Batch Orders 134 border add custom object 260 barcode 261 border items 272 border workshop 255 Border Workshop 209 borders aligning objects 293 centering objects 293 changing order of objects 294 composites 279 drop shadow on photos 277 283 285 editing 254 effects 288 fitting objects to page 292 graphics 284 image cells 272 making objects same 293 masks 275 289 multiple photos 279 photo array 279 photo placeholders 272 properties 270 rotating objects 295 spacing objects 294 testing variable text fields 297 text 259 286 Borders Applying in Photo Workshop 188 Index Creating 210 Editing 214 Brightness 194 Calendar 92 Add Booking 95 Add Call 97 Add Task 96 Adding Notes 99 Schedules 98 Tasks and Events 94 Viewing Modes 94 Cameras Connecting 59 Hot Folder 61 Importing 62 Importing in Photo Workshop 176 Tethered 60 Wifi 60 Catalogs 113 Archiving 119 Batch Publishing 119 Photo Numbers 120 Photo Paths 12 Publishing 118 Unpublishing 118 center tool 293 Checking In and Out 105 Color 194 Color Balance Toolset 202 Color Profile 205 composite borders image cell settings 282 labels 283 photo frames 283 photo queries 280 transparency setting 283 Composite Sheets 192 composites 279 Contrast 194 Correct Toolset 194 custom objects 260 Custom
92. Click the Edit button to open the Photo Query window Click the Add Query button to select a predefined query Many times you simply want to print all photos in a catalog including sub catalogs or you want to print all the photos in the open sub catalog You can choose either of these queries by selecting the Generic Queries menu item You can use other predefined school related queries on the Add Query menu You can have your composite display photos by class grade or entire school 280 Tutorial Border Workshop Note For these predefined queries to return results you must enter photo data for your photos You must enter type in the property field and use a value that matches those in the queries By class you can select a query that displays all photos in the class catalog including the teachers You can select a query that displays only the teachers in the class or a query that displays only the students in the class By grade you can select a query that displays all the photos in the grade including the teachers You can select a query that displays only the teachers in the grade or a query that displays only the students in the grade You can also select a query that displays only the male or female students With this query the gender that appears in the composite depends on the photo you select in the Photo Workshop If the photo data of the selected photo contains a value of female in the Gender field
93. E STUDIO SOLUTION User Guide MIN Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Conteniuiicinsa nian 2 e O 28 REGCING THE MEU a a 2 SOMMNGH Diese Rote et SS ede ei A Se ee 29 Using THE SOMW ONG execs ds clio 29 RUIN DANI it A ic 30 Troubleshooting AAA A 30 RR e e RU e E eas eat 30 LOOKING for something SPECIE Parcial sesenta e a e ed tds on aba aba nd besan 30 Wanito PINTAS MONUO Si ii O a Baad eee 30 stalling Studio Solutii osre nenn A sua E 30 S ppored Opera inG SYSIEMS cc A A a acido 30 Recommended Operating Requirements esssesessssesssseosseressseeeseseesssseossereesseressereesssreesseressseesseseesseseesseeeee 30 Beto MON Rai a 31 INSTA ta dioses at 31 Running Studio SOlUtION do O aaa 32 SUPPOrted CD DVD SO Wa ii iaa 32 SII AAN ara 32 LA A e de a od cet 32 Neo lo NS O o AAA ceuebiecedlbacesdheetisedesebeessveadiessicsteessueetbssndansec 32 Logging Into YOUr ONIINE ACCOUNE Gin a eG in cn ee ee 33 LOGGING INS AN EMPIO E ci A A ayes sR neat a aie ess 33 Table of Contents OVEIV EW ssai nesi As 34 aca e a iaai aiiai 34 plola EAE EE E ESE EEEE E EE E EE AE Pate ed EEA EEA E EE EE EE SEE EEEE E 34 CIO DOM E NN 34 AU AR A E EAEE ATTS 35 EMPIOY COS A AAA EE E EOE 35 A NON 35 PIOGUCIS 0 sect NN 35 PIONS 3 sess OTE ROO E RO RARO RAN 35 A NN NON 35 PRED OMS vais Ras A SEN ON ES a ES NS oat EGER 35 OD THOM EAE EEE Mies A ence Mee Mies teas fee tM este oa O eds teat Etat eas ae 35 PROTO IDIO
94. EIE E EE A AE A A E A 147 NEADIS es o nera ea E ES 147 ERIN Os A il do A i ies Ie a oare lee fs 148 Viewing 0 10 0 O AAA de cateeesecssbensbeets svaidanseacsdobsiccaasesen Sae E En i etii aie 148 Refreshing THE Order Lis Rica dd Se Ss cae ened 148 Viewing DOE A A do 148 o A O he es sacih as tovertah adsl aatt Tole ae 149 Printing an OF Or we css ccc cccsh ce Mossad alcanz 149 Table of Contents Painting Gn Order OIC hice oy it tere det ee ra o ere o etl cos oo tS dace asks ibis o OM tose soe 149 Reptinting OFS iii Ed eeki e een 150 Viewing the PIM QUES a ts 150 OA e e e dd deso UL 150 jala ars ad ee en teehee ae dae tuar tden eg te eased a ela atetnes undey tent See 151 Marking OE NP a ads 151 Canceling orders a a hates a Suet ctteeseaadtat nies 151 DOHA DOS ii e aaa 151 Batching and Unbatehing Orders vs ce ccvscececevsnscdcassesiecsuicccsestiaiceuetlessesticessucedbesdhcetbessivetsescdcnndeccueebiaddecsees 151 Ranting d n Order Proa Se Ae AR erin Sh Rn SG St eee 152 Panting an Order FORNsa Aas nd A eden AAs Oe alanine 153 PANTING Simple RECEIPT 4 a eas Ri ee aI nee elie eee MRA eit leans 153 Editing amp Proofing ANO ue enya ee aS 154 Navigating while EGiting amp Proy A aiewand Sienna 154 AUtOsEOITING Oelse Ar ays Md en ton aan Mid retar o a a Ad nln hE ie ete 155 VIEWING PROTOS ici nati in lados 155 DMA e a e 156 Saving and APPIYINOATMIDU ais 156 Changing Order Properties 2 ss 2 5 65 c vescsecsasccchesSendedeaees caid
95. END Moves to last photo in catalog F4 Photo Rating 4 Star Home Moves to first photo in the catalog F5 Photo Rating 5 Star 345 Shortcut Keys Photo Workshop Photo Workshop Shortcut Keys SA 0 Order A La Carte Item F8 Drop Out Tab 1 Add Package 1 to Cart F9 Home 2 Add Package 2 to Cart Home Border On 3 Add Package 3 to Cart INSERT Picture Properties gt Photo Data 4 Add Package 4 to Cart LEFT Move Photo Left Move Photo Left in largest 5 Add Package 5 to Cart CTRL LEFT E increments Move Photo left in smallest 6 Add Package 6 to Cart SHIFT LEFT increments Copy Photo Attributes to the 7 Add Package 7 to Cart MULTIPLY Clipboard Save Advanced Custom CTRL MULTIPLY E 7 8 Add Package 8 to Cart Attribute window marked with current clipboard attributes Save Advanced Custom 9 Add Package 9 to Cart ALT MULTIPLY Attribute window for NEW custom View More Photos Decrease Scale Out a PAGE DOWN thumbnail size CTRL PAGE Scale Out in largest increments A Save as New Photo DOWN SHIFT PAGE Scale Out in smallest increments CTRLA Select All DOWN B Choose Border Num Pad 0 Order A La Carte Item CTRLC Crop Orientation Horizontal Num Pad 1 Add Package 1 to Cart SHIFT C Crop Orientation Vertical Num Pad 2 Add Package 2 to Cart 346 Shortcut Keys Photo Workshop
96. EU td aer o O La eo 193 Applying a MON eerie a eiie e eeke rie Eee aiae ar een e EA oa E aei 193 Using the COEN ia 194 SAVING CHONGES E E E E A E E ATT 195 STEPS 10 EME es idad 195 SAVIA ATM i 195 AU a e e ias o o ML 195 ACHUSTIAG EXPOSURE NA A o e 196 Adjusting SRA GOWS clic idad 196 AdJUS MN COOP eesst ois hsb Se AE En ee Sin nee 196 AGYUSTINEG TONG since ois ROS wae ack e GHG NARA aaa AE T 197 Adjusting REA a tatoo ob abs uated de ectignd Sb E EA E ERE 197 Using EOS PICTURE STVIES TOS a 198 Adjusting EOS PiCture StyleS s dite ais k anon aera a dba 198 STOO A RIO 198 POMAR o a eee hae oe II iia 198 EA AR NO 198 Table of Contents NG URIs tots O 199 FGI Uli oh Pia hails eva udtaph del Soke ail ahead Rea eee le Read eels noe tel eed ected 199 Monochrome erennere ip 199 CUSTOMIZATION OF PICTUFE SE S fxs ro 199 ERa e EKOLA N PPE EA E E in EE EN E E E AE 200 Adj sting EXPOSU SA eseina isee iaer ein es Sine k enie e SSe er eiia eias iner esoe k eireas inanis 200 re ERa EAEI SIA E E A o Wd at 200 OORE NEIKE OEA ATEA E A ENEA EE AS EEE AT AT A siateate dake 201 Adjusting Color TONG iii deidad E ae aei 201 Adjusting Filter SAAE EEE E AE E AA AE n 201 AUS TOME EOC coi ccccccetesh sueet cbc octes A e a lo o e 202 Using the Color Balance TOS od e ds cod 202 SGVING E ACIR EA A AE A AE AA AAE EAA ct htc ee eet a ae 203 Using Preset Color Balagne ES ui a e ada 203 APPIVIND A MBE E E E E AN 203 Manually Adjusting Color BOIGNCE o ceceeccec
97. GA monitor 24 bit color at 1024x768 resolution CD ROM and CD RW USB connectivity Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 0 or above Before Installation If you will be running Studio Solution over a network you must be logged into Windows as an Administrator during installation This is only for installation purposes and afterwards the software can be used without connectivity problems by any user if they have permission to access Shared folders Note Please make sure the dongle is not installed on the computer prior to installing the software Installation To install Studio Solution 1 2 Setup will automatically start the installation process 3 4 The InstallShield Wizard will begin Insert the disc into the computer CD drive If a security window appears select to Run the install a Select Next to begin the installation b Read and accept the terms in the License Agreement c Select Change to select a location to install Studio Solution i The default location is C Program Files Studio Solution d Select Install to begin the installation non fa 31 Getting Started e The installation will set up basic database information for the software This may take a few minutes 5 The InstallShield Wizard will complete Studio Solution is installed Running Studio Solution Before running Studio Solution you must have the USB protection key plugged into a USB port and verified If the key is
98. ING INE COM ts cutie tier ter tae A An 139 Showing GNA HICING PCE viii ertitek eein Ee Eek eE Eak eesriie ak eSEE aei 140 VIEWING Package GIO UPS eedan a e a aea 140 oae NIE E AEE EAEKO SERE E TEAT EN TE 140 Adding ANTHEM to The CONF iaicociinnaninicndo ideada iee r eiin aS nr i anak ei reiasa tnei 140 Adding Items with th Keypade sias de dido 141 Table of Contents Adding an A La Carte ltem to the Cart ccccsccccssssscesssscecsssseceeseccecssaneeceesaececsnaeecsesaeeecsesseeeeseeaessesaeseceesaeeess 141 Placing an Ori Editada 142 SAM IO e a a a N 142 REPIICIA MO dona 143 REMOVIENDO la 143 REMOVING C PACK AGE AAA ek oere a iseh o ne iseks iieo esineet isinuko 143 Cleanng the Order ice o AGN a Ree oe he Rs de 143 GRANGING CrOPPING FOF AN MSN deseas abia tt alte deca s 143 Adding or Subtracting Copies Of PACKAGES ccccccsssssecssssecesesscecseseeecsesueceesccecsessececsesseceesessecsesesecensaeeess 143 Adding Servic es 10 GA temeraria ke a ie St nc ee et te ee 144 Changing Media A A aa a a e ends 144 Changing Print Commands for an IOM ccccceecsecsessececeesceceessececsesaececeeasecseseeecsesaeeeceeaaecseseesecseaueeeseeaseseenes 144 Editing Shipping AAA eeki isnt e cell essulieesdaubesducstbesdhuedsesadcsasecdecebeeceacsedes 144 Photo POS si E EE ania dias E ra seda 145 Using the Orders Workspace ccccccccccscssssssssscccccccccccccccccccccsscceesecccsececsesceeeeeees 146 Navigating the Orders Wok cod 146 ANNAE KONE
99. If you are viewing your tasks and events by day the day will be divided into three columns Bookings View and manage all bookings for the day Using this view will expand details of the booking showing a description and estimated duration sunday Tasks View and manage all a employee tasks for the day including details and estimated duration Confirmaton Nicole s School Photos Calls View and manage all calls and confirmations for the day 94 Using Your Studio There is no limit to the number of bookings tasks or calls you can have at the same time or overlapping the same times They will appear next to each other in the column Adding a Booking A booking is any type of photo shoot with a customer This is a concrete event with a date time and assigned employee To add a booking from the calendar l 2 a See 00 ES oo 10 11 12 Make sure you are in the Tasks and Events calendar not the Schedule Double click any day you can change this in the next step If you are viewing by day you must click in the Booking column Select a customer from the dropdown box a Ifyou want to search for an existing customer select Search Type in part of the customer information in the Find box select the criteria to search for in the From dropdown box and select Search You can also organize the list of customers by clicking on a header to sort When you have found the customer double click the
100. If you want to specify a query for a photo type other than those predefined choose Find from the query lookup menu and replace the question marks with a type you use in your photo data When you apply the border to a photo the application looks in the catalog for a photo of the type you specified and adas it to the border 299 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If you are having problems with the network or software read on for help Click a link to jump directly to the help for a problem Common status bar errors Can t connect to a server or client station Can t detect a printer or camera Can t connect to the database Can t access the photos folder Can t find a portrait session Can t send orders to print Common Status Bar Errors The status bar is located at the very bottom left of the software and will display to update you of any errors in the software Print Queue Problem The print queue could not be started lt is possible that your print server is not set up or that this client cannot connect to it Click here to troubleshoot server connections File Server Problem An error occurred while connecting to the file server You may not be able to access pictures and customers until the conditions are corrected It is possible that your data server is not set up or that the client cannot connect to it to send and retrieve information Click here to troubleshoot database connections 300 Tr
101. Last First Middle Initial Thompson Rebekah L CUSTOMERSHIPLASTFIRST This option will print the name of the receiving customer in the format First Middle Initial Last Rebekah L Thompson CUSTOMERSHIPNAME This option will print the phone number of the person who is to receive the prints divided by dashes 555 555 5555 CUSTOMERSHIPPHONE This option will print the state abbreviation of the address where the prints are to shipped TX CUSTOMERSHIPSTATE This option will print the zip code of the address where the prints are to be shipped 78746 CUSTOMERSHIPZIP This option will print the state abbreviation of the customer address TX CUSTOMERSTATE This option will print the zip code of the customer address 78746 CUSTOMERZIP This option will print the month as a single digit for the first nine months and two digits for the last three months For example February is represented by the number 2 and December is represented by the number 12 ay This option will print in numerical form divided by front slashes 01 14 06 353 Inserting Special Text DAY DAYOFWEEK DD FILE FILEL FILE2 FILEDATE FILEFOLDER This option will print the day in numeric form If the day is a single digit for example February 1 the day will print with a zero in front 01 This option will print the day of the week Wednesday This option will print the day as a double digit number for every day of th
102. Now when a slideshow is viewed the promotional images you selected will be shown in the slideshow in between transitions from photos Leaving this field blank means no promotional or stock images will be shown during the slideshow Additional Files Z Would you like to add additional files to the digital media Enter the name of a folder that contains any additional files or programs that you would like copied to the root of the destination Browse Extra Files The third page of the Digital Delivery Wizard is the Extra Files step This step allows you to add any additional files to the digital media For instance you could attach stock 71 Setting Up Your Products images of templates you can provide or a price list or even a copy of the customer s receipt To add extra files to your digital media click the box next to Would you like to add additional files to the digital media The second option will now become available First place all of the desired files into one folder Everything in this folder will be added as an extra file You do not need to include the photo files in this folder they will be exported separately Once you have moved all of your desired files into one folder type the folder location into the empty field or click the browse button to locate it and click OK Summary The fourth and final page of the Digital Delivery Wizard is the Summary step This step shows a list of
103. Place Order located below the packages area in the shopping cart 2 Awindow appears showing the receipt 3 Select Automatically Print Receipt to print an order receipt when an order is placed 4 Select Shipping to edit and verify all billing and shipping information 5 Select OK to send the order a If there is an error communicating with your studio management software or the printer is offline the order will be saved in the orders workspace for later Click here for more information about using the orders workspace Saving an Order If you want to save an order to your orders workspace without sending it off to print select Save Order located below the packages area in the shopping cart The order will appear in the Pending Orders tab and can be reopened and edited at any time or just sent off to print Click here for more information about using the orders workspace 142 Using Photo Library Replacing an Item If you want to use a different photo but keep the package you selected select the new photo from your workspace and hold and drag it over the old photo The new photo will replace the old one in the package Removing a Single Item You can remove single items from the cart without deleting the package it belongs to by right clicking on the item and selecting Remove Item or by selecting an item and selecting Remove Item from the bottom of the cart Removing a Package You can remove an entire package and all
104. PrEVIOWS oo ic in555 tests EN 167 Viewing with SSA O 167 Viewing and Setting ASPECURGNOS ii a Sah Ee a 167 VIEWING GUIGES socec scien cxicsngtcs sad cdo das 169 Clearing Photos from the Workspace cecsscessssscsesssececeesseceessneecsesaesecsecsecsesaeeecsesaeeecneasecsesueeecsesaeeeseeaaeesenes 169 Sorting PHOTOS AAA A 169 FIR GING PROTOS i328 A Ns al aa BL hee sed ah se O 170 ASS E A A 170 SHOWING Prato TOIT CTO La ads 171 Sshowing and Setting PhOtO NUMDBENS sx ii ltda 171 SHOWING OOO ICONS cs den Id A 171 showing andSetting PhotoRatINOS i niiin irene ea E ee EA A EE a E ea E a RE eea 171 Showing and Serting FENGIMES a eee 172 Showmngand Copyng PAPA aii O E S ERK Epea ti 172 Showing and Setting INFO TOOMTIOS EE ET E E EE N 173 Showing Photo Properties ss sannsisieasiiieriessretseisretr desros tsinsert eepto i E otr esanei a Siner ei eea ioak e oreesa riei 173 SHOWING PhOTO Histograms and Da Mica lis 173 IMPON mig te riot renee terre me renee rnc a a iar sine mre neat Un Se nase etree IRC eat ice A A en Rne E ere 173 IMPOTTNQ APODO cidade indeed dadaes 174 USING QUICK IMP OM a A A et es Re ett 175 Importing Photos from a COME ou aa aa a EEA aA 176 301 1100 KE 0 10 010 AEPPA OPEN a a a ee tiem edict nett tha In 177 Creating a Photo OU idad 177 Managing PROTOS 25 niet enni acta acters Ata A 178 Table of Contents SEIS STING RADIOS rd o e e a 178 Applying and Saving ATTIDUTES eiii idad ei 178 ADPIC sd 178 QMENTING
105. RL UP increments Move Photo Down in largest Moves Photo up in smallest CTRL DOWN SHIFT UP increments increments Move Photo Down in smallest Undo All SHIFT DOWN X increments END Undo ALL editing CTRL Y Redo ESCAPE Cancel Image Viewer Z 1 1 Zoom Actual Zoom F10 Photo Library Tab CTRLZ Undo F12 Orders Tab ALTZ 3x Zoom F2 Find Photos SHIFT Z 2x Zoom F4 Full Screen Mode SHIFT ALT Z 4x Zoom F5 Enhance Tab Scroll photos up CTRL F5 Refresh Add Service Notes F6 Correct Tab Scroll photos down F7 Color Balance Tab 5 Move back one Photo F8 Drop Out Tab 348 Shortcut Keys Border Workshop Border Workshop Shortcut Keys CTRLC Copy CTRL PAGE UP Scale In Largest Increments CTRL X Cut SHIFT PAGE UP Scale In Smallest Increments CTRLV Paste CTRLY Redo CTRLD Duplicate DEL Delete ALTE Edit Graphics List CTRLE Edit Border Color CTRLP Add New Shape RIGHT Move Right TAB Next Item in Border Items CTRL RIGHT Moves Right in Largest Increments SPACE Pan SHIFT RIGHT Moves Right in Smallest Increments A Scale Out bottom edge of object in Previous Item in Border Items Numpad 2 small increments 3 CTRL Numpad Scale Out bottom edge of object in SHIFT TAB Previous Item in Border Items t 2 large increments i Scale Out right edge of object in CTRL B Change Border View Numpad 4 small increments CTRL Numpad
106. RL or SHIFT to select any number of border items They will all be aligned to the last item selected 2 Hold CTRL and select the border item you want to align with 3 Select align from the right toolbar 4 Select an option to align the item to that edge of the last item selected a Left Center Right Top Middle Bottom You can also right click an item and select Align from the dropdown menu for the previous options The last item selected will always be used for alignment Spacing Items You can space items equal distances from each other on the page You must select at least three items to apply spaces To space items 1 Use CTRL or SHIFT to select at least three items you want to space apart 2 Select space from the right toolbar 3 Select an option a Gaps Horizontally space the items apart horizontally with equal gaps between the edges b Gaps Vertically soace the items apart vertically with equal gaps between the edges c Centers Horizontally space the items apart horizontally with equal distance between the centers d Centers Vertically soace the items apart vertically with equal distance between the centers You can also right click selected items and select Space from the dropdown menu for the previous options 217 Using Border Workshop Changing Item Order You can change the order of item layers within a border To change item order 1 Select a border item 2 Select order from the
107. ROIYWLASSO it dt di O do Ad IR AS a ON 234 Se AA A acabibecesneaatbectiecsdusteessicahussgicssseadicetsscedcaneebencesiesdeabies 234 Oo EEA EEE ON NN 234 21 Table of Contents PUPA es nooo erstes ss thas ateddcagn ets a de e ti 234 Clear Allinnin iee A a 234 Usina ME Retouch TOS E E AA ales Sa i 234 EaI E E E A A A E E 235 ieta a E E A A E E ah A Sal IE 235 Pis 235 DI o e a al leo o o 235 UA A te 235 A NO 235 Bl ios AA lesa 235 COlOr SOTWRONONS cis sa a oo o ia Land 235 Color A O eset hed ta 1 esse Did oe tana A iad een Sed dane oa 235 Color ACCENT ee ee s he ae eee erate ae eat SA ee 236 RECOV EE li ri titi a a aan 236 RUNNING d SAO OT oa ssssisicccccsesessssiaccscccsescsesadeessadececcsesedasssedatencsasasasededansvocadssesesavesesenete 237 PRICING Bs A A cvs etouoid 237 Creating a BOOKING eae tae Ree eed aate 239 Ag e AA IMO itech tae deaeacted E cated tee atl EE E A Rear deel ER 241 setting Up a Tetera CAM AS E A N 241 Seng YA A WILMER ean etn ene eke 242 MANO TG SIIOO Tee saaseetcttat att a Reidel ab at tata 243 Capturing and Oe 244 VE MIS O do N EE E E A 245 Importing PHOTOS a et ne ee eee 246 22 Table of Contents notes ls nton aa a E stc strane a dase Ea a a hess te 247 Presenting PROTOS 2 ceesiccvtactedeedten tanto Ak ee eh eee ee Ree 247 Creding an CCS A O II a EOE NE NERES 249 AGGING TEMS TOTNES CIT a a a e a RE a 250 Placing the Ordf acnee riie ideales 251 Rinting AND ireann a T A A E cris ean te en a TETA 2
108. Scale Out right edge of object in DELETE Delete E 4 large increments Scale In bottom edge of object in DOWN Move Item Down Numpad 6 i small increments i CTRL Numpad Scale In bottom edge of object in CTRL DOWN Move Item Down in Largest Increments y 6 large increments Move Item Down in Smallest Scale In right edge of object in small SHIFT DOWN Numpad 8 5 Increments increments CTRL Numpad Scale In right edge of object in large LEFT Move Item Left 8 increments CTRL LEFT Move Item Left in Largest Increments CTRLZ Undo Shortcut Keys Border Workshop SHIFT LEFT Move Item Left in Smaller Increments ALT Backspace Undo PAGE DOWN Scale Out UP Moves Item up CTRL PAGE gt Moves Item Up in Largest Scale Out in Largest Increments CTRL UP DOWN Increments SHIFT PAGE Moves Item Up in Smallest Scale Out in Smaller Increments SHIFT UP DOWN Increments PAGE UP Scale In Home Shortcut Keys F10 Photo Library Tab F11 Photo Workshop Tab F12 Orders Tab 350 Inserting Special Text Inserting Special Text This option will print a copyright symbol This option will print the color code profile This is represented by numeric values 1234567 COLORCODE This option will print the number of copies of the current sheet requested in the order COPIES This option will print copyright information This will not include company copyright information Copyrig
109. Settings is for previews generated for images under Desktop and My Computer on the Photo Library page Image previews for orders are 44 Setting Up Software Options placed in the folder with the images These previews are found in the X drive The default location is C ProgramData ExpressDigital Common CachePYV Select a new path if desired e Preview Cleaning it is not necessary to keep preview files for catalogs that are no longer being used The default settings will keep the files for two weeks Select a different time period if desired and a time of day to start purging Select Cleanup Older Previews to instantly purge the computer of preview files that exceed the time frame or select Delete All Previews to instantly purge the computer of all preview files Spell Checker Settings These options determine how the Spell Checker will correct comment and description text fields in the software e Enable Automatic Spell Checking enable this if you want to perform an automatic spell check before saving your information e Apply spell check to street address fields enable this if you want spell check to confirm the spelling of your entries in the street address field e Options these settings determine the correction levels for your spell checker Spelling Options S Ignore capitalized words e g Canada Ignore all caps words e g ASAP Ignore words with numbers e g Win35 Ignore words with mixed case e g SuperBase
110. Solution has its own integrated workshop for retouching and cleaning up photos You can use either the software s Retouch Workshop or Adobe Photoshop retouch To set the default retouch click retouch in the retouch tool and select to check either Use Retouch Workshop or Use Adobe Photoshop To open your selected retouching workshop select the brush icon in the retouch tool e Using the Retouch Workshop the photo will be automatically opened in the Retouch Workshop Click here for a guide to using the Retouch Workshop e Using Adobe Photoshop the software will automatically open Adobe Photoshop and import the photo A small window will appear with a Save Retouched Photo button When you are finished retouching select Save Retouched Photo to save the photo and automatically import it back into Studio Solution Adobe Photoshop will remain open Adobe Photoshop must be installed to use this feature 186 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets Applying Colors You can change and apply color schemes to photos Applying a color as does not permanently change the photo a color scheme can be black amp white changed or removed at any time by returning to the workshop sepia retro Select one of the color schemes to apply it to the photo duotone e Color resets the color scheme to the original color of the digital negative e Black amp White sets the color to grayscale e Sepia sets the color to sepia tones Aged black amp
111. TRL G The next Border Workshop menu option is the feature called Auto Alignment This feature allows the user to more closely line up a photo on the exact line on the border palate When the Auto Alignment option is activated guiding lines appear on the screen to guide the user in correct alignment 268 Tutorial Border Workshop These lines show exactly where the photo is supposed to be placed in reference to the other photos and object onscreen The last two Border Workshop menu options include the Undo and Redo options The Undo tool allows the user to remove retouch changes one step at a time If a change is made to the image in the workshop then the undo tool can remove that change The tool removes the most recent change first It is possible to remove all of the changes by repeatedly selecting Undo The Redo tool allows the user to reverse the Undo effect The tool will redo whatever effect the user made to the image and then subsequently removed This is a great way to produce an effect in the Retouch Workshop and then compare a before and after version of that effect You can apply the effect Undo the effect to see what it looked like before and then finally redo the effect 269 Tutorial Border Workshop Setting Border Properties When you create a new border you begin by entering the border properties The Border Properties window appears automatically when you click new on the toolbar When
112. a comma separated value CSV file that includes all tasks by type This file can be used in any data management program that accepts csv files Select Save after the report is generated you cannot print this report 112 Using the Photo Library Using Photo Library The Photo Library is where all event photos will be viewed organized and added to orders Here you can keep track of every photo shoot in the studio Find and select the Photo Library tab at the bottom of the software For a complete reference guide to the Photo Library including detailed screenshots and button locations go here Navigating the Photo Library The library is divided into three areas appearing in the software from left to right e Catalog Menu create organize publish and archive photo catalogs e Photo Viewer review orient and organize photos within a catalog e Shopping Cart select packages and photos for purchase and add to orders AF STUDIO SOLUTION Catalogs y Sort View Photos Sorty Views NM Pray eS Show Data Hide Cart Photolibrary podi iad Photos w Catalog Find Publist gt 48 Events 1 a amp Portrait 3 amp Jones Elaine amp Smith Nicole amp Nicole s School Photos 10 amp Smith Tin E School 1 Spo orts 1 We De dding 1 ole010 jpg 2 nicole fa sktop 4 nicole007 jpg 5 nicole006 jpa 6 nicole005 jpa Using the Catalog Menu 1 4x6 2 2 5x7s 3
113. a ik esir erie Snek o SEn ress ieks Sneki i Srst oiai 156 Undoing nd REdOING CHANGES id ets 157 SAVING Ord OT vce a Angin Aaa Gud aah O O 157 RODADOS in ele Hd daa 157 Using Presentation Mode vsnc cccecacscccccacecccccecscacectendacccacedacscacadasscacsdasccacedesssacecasccasadesse 158 Opening the Photo Library and Photo WOrkshO Dia aia 159 Table of Contents Navigating in Presentation Mod 159 Viewing Photos in Presentation Moda 159 VIEWING INGIVIGUGL POTOS 00d a a E R EE 159 VIEWING MUITIDIS PROTA T E ETE EA 160 VIEWING PHOTO INFOmMAtiON searen a a ia nR EN IEE ES EEKE eA EENE E eksa ia iei 160 VIEWING High QUAY Prev WS dd 160 Managing Photos in Presentation MOS dd ea eiunrvacisetiapienr 160 CRANGING TREsASP OCT ROMO 2 A eS Ria 160 SONTING PHOTOS a a A A ltda 161 RUN A e de o ea la o od 161 Opening RAD OS lara a 161 Adding Sevic ES ici Hives sucts K EREE E EE EE Ees ER EEE e Ea Er AE EESE raies E aR eSEE asai 162 E TN O 162 Playing Baekground MUECA leeis 163 sinathe SOPRANO AA 163 o A Aaa T 164 Using the Photo Workshop iii picas 165 Navigating the PRIOR MO eds IA blo 165 MIE WING E AOLO A A ias 166 VIEWING MOSS A ias 166 VIEWING FUISTE SN ipod t a 166 Viewing a Slideshows saeir e E Er a Siana iN a Earr EE T r e S Seier Ens enrera 167 VIEWING WITHOUT A A cduidevieccestsbestoceVicezecendes 167 Viewing Front and BACK vissiveicdserceatiecbucter ne ar E A tin Gatien Gedo ida 167 Table of Contents VIEWING AON Quality
114. a indicates the graphic value is idcard When you apply your ID card border to a photo the application finds the graphic named idcard and applies it to the border Query Variables You might want to create a border that searches for a photo or graphic of a certain Type value When the search finds that photo or graphic in the current catalog the application inserts the photo into the border For example you might have a group photo like a team photo in your catalog and you want it to always be applied to a 298 Tutorial Border Workshop special border like a memory mate If the photo s data has a property of type and a value of group you can use a query in the border template that tells the application to find the photo of type group when you open the border in the Photo Workshop When the photo is found the application applies the photo to the border Note If there is more than one photo in the catalog with the same type value the application uses the first one it finds Therefore this feature is best used when you only have one photo of the type specified in the query The Queries lookup contains common queries To use these you must use the same type value in your photo data as in the query you want to use For example if you use the query Find Type league and you do not use the type value league in the photo data for any photos the query will return no photos Note The query is not case sensitive
115. a series of montages overlapping images layered graphics and photos and photo queries Use the Border Workshop to create brand new borders for your studio or just to edit and adjust existing borders Find the Border Workshop in Manage Studio gt Products gt Templates and Composites Select new template from the bottom of the software to create a new border or select a border and select edit template to open that border in the workshop Borders are layered objects with each text graphic or photo as its own individual layer Each item can be moved and edited independently or shown in front of or behind other objects For a complete reference guide to the Border Workshop including detailed screenshots and button locations go here Navigating the Border Workshop The Border Workshop workspace is separated into two areas e Workspace view add and edit border items e Border Items List a list of each individual border item as a layer that can be arranged in any order The top of the workshop will show the current border name and description Select cancel changes at any time to exit the Border Workshop without saving STUDIO SOLUTION Sa Front Back Add Edit Optionsy Undo Redo border items V Photo Photo1 Photo Photo2 Photo Photo3 Photo Photo4 Photo Photo5 Graphic frame png 209 Using Border Workshop Viewing in the Border Workshop Viewing Front
116. a specific menu to jump ahead to that section Top Menu Catalog Menu Right clicking a Photo Top Menu STUDIO SOLUTION _o x Single Multiple Photos Attributes v Sorty View Fullscreen Show Data Hide Cart Customer Test Portrait Sitting nicole010 jpg Single view one photo at a time in the workspace Multiple view all of the photos in the selected catalog in the workspace Photos e Import add photos to the selected catalog e Quick Import automatically add photos from a preselected folder e Quick Import Setup select a folder for quick importing Attributes e Save To o Clipboard save current photo settings to the clipboard o System Defaults save current photo settings as system defaults o Catalog Defaults save current photo settings as catalog defaults o Custom 1 4 save current photo settings as custom settings 1 4 o New create a new custom setting for saving attributes to o Edit edit any custom settings you ve created for saving attributes to 329 Reference Photo Workshop Apply From o Clipboard apply photo settings from the clipboard to the selected photo o System Defaults apply the system default photo settings to the selected photo o Catalog Defaults apply the catalog default photo settings to the selected photo o Custom 1 4 apply custom photo settings 1 4 to the selected photo Apply to All in Catalog o Current apply the selected photo settings to all
117. ack to you or ship them directly to your customers Find Labtricity options in Manage Studio gt Options gt Labtricity Account Select Login Now to log into your Labtricity account Once logged in you can manage all your account information select labs set up lab products and services and view all current lab orders Select Sign Up to create an account within the software This requires an internet connection System Properties Find this information in Manage Studio gt Options gt System Properties This is a list of the computer properties including used and free space local paths detected cameras and printers and software versions This is information is helpful when diagnosing any computer related problem 46 Setting Up Software Options Calibrate Monitor Calibration of your monitor is a vital step in managing the quality of your work in your studio You can perform a monitor calibration using X Rite Eye One Match Software in Manage Studio gt Options gt Calibrate Monitor Note You must have the Eye One Match Software and hardware installed on your computer before you can use this feature 47 Setting Up Your Network Setting Up Your Network This software can be used in a network environment with multiple stations for capturing selling enhancing and printing All of the information from each computer can be shared on a simple Windows network making it easy to switch between stations without
118. age cells When you enable this option you must drag a photo from the photo bar to the image cell in which you want the photo to appear Finally you can set a rotation angle for the photo To set the exact position and size of an image cell click the Options tab After you add the image cell you can size it with the mouse Select the cell and position your pointer in one of the corners until you see the arrow pointer Drag the corner to change the size of the image cell 277 Tutorial Border Workshop Size and Position It is possible to select the size and position for the photo from the Photo Object window This is available in the Size and Position tab Photographers can change the position starting at the top left corner This positioning system can be measured in inches pixels centimeters cm or millimeters mm General Size and Position Units Pixels v Position Left 0 a Alignment Options Bottom 2100 lt gt Right 1500 lt gt Size Width 1500 Fill Options Height 2100 a lt gt Before you choose a position or size for your object first check the drop down box in the upper right hand corner there are four possible units of measure pixels default inches centimeters and millimeters You can change the unit of measure at any time and the numbers in each field will automatically change to accommodate the new units without changing the position or
119. age groups This will allow you to easily add a Digital Media option to your shopping cart for a CD you will be creating locally The Digital Delivery Product can be assigned as its own package or added as an additional item to an existing package To add as a Package 1 Select Add Product Assign the package a unique name and price Select OK to save Select the new package and select Add Item Select Digital Delivery Products from the Print Group dropdown list Ore Os ie ae O To customize this product select Edit Item to change any of the components 67 Setting Up Your Products There are four components for creating a digital delivery product General Slideshow Extra Files and Summary General is the general options settings for the digital output such as where the media will be sent the media format and media size The Slideshow component allows you to export an interactive slideshow with the media complete with music and promotional logos images The Extra Files component allows you to export any additional files to the media such as music or text files Summary is a quick list of all the features available and allows you to remove or change options General Slideshow Extra Files Summary Photo Quantities Maximum of photos Destination Information Enter the CD DVD drive or folder that the files are being copied to Photo Format Permanently apply attributes S
120. ailable here from creation to printing to being shipped out to the customer Every order here has been sent through your online storefront or was created through the shopping cart Find and select the Orders tab from the bottom of the software For a complete reference guide to the Orders Workspace including detailed screenshots and button locations go here Navigating the Orders Workspace The orders workspace is made up of three different tabs located at the very top left of the software e New Orders here are all orders that have been created or saved but not yet printed e Pending Orders here are all orders that have been sent to print locally or at a lab but are not yet finished or need to be shipped e Completed Orders here are all orders that have been printed and shipped 4 STUDIO SOLUTION oO x New Orders Pending Orders Completed Orders Auto Print Print Queue View v Refresh wb WMI i Saved None 5 days old 5 00 Print Locally L2WMI UEBCHSS Local North Basketball 5 26 2009 2 05 04 PM Lof 2Printed 5 26 2009 2 42 55 PM 7 day 9 00 Print Locally Order 1D Type Customer Order Time Status Status Time Age Payment Fulfilment lays old L2WMI UEBCZOE Local North Basketball 5 28 2009 9 19 51 PM 1of 2Printed 5 28 2009 9 20 51 PM 5 days old 9 00 Print Locally Located below the list of orders in any tab is the order info window This window will display all current information about any order you have selecte
121. ally To customize a shipping group 1 Seta Handling Cost for each shipment This is your basic cost for packaging and shipping and does not include the actual mailing costs Shipping Fee Shipping Method Standard ly For orders of or over 25 2 Select Add Country to set your shipping rules for a particular country or copy your shipping rules from an existing Country vo 3 Select Add Shipping to add a shipping method and price A prompt appears The shipping costis 8 50 4 Select from Pickup Standard Priority 274 Day or Overnight 5 If you wish to charge a different price for orders over a specific amount enter that amount in the top box and your adjusted price in the bottom box A new rule must be created for each price you wish to charge 6 Select Add 79 Setting Up Your Products Adding a Shipping Group Shipping groups make it easy to apply a different set of shipping rules for different events For instance you would probably charge more for shipping wedding photos than for studio portrait photos simply create two identical shipping methods with different prices in different groups and associate the desired shipping group with a particular event without needing to edit or return to this settings page Select Add Group to create a new shipping group Follow the steps above to customize it Editing a Shipping Item To edit or remove a shipping group country or shipp
122. alog 1 Select the catalog you want to add photos to 2 Select New Catalog located to the left directly above the catalog list 3 If you want to create a new photo group and automatically import photos from your quick import location select and check Create New amp Import 117 Using Photo Library Select Add Photo Group to and ensure that it lists the correct catalog Enter a name for the photo group You must enter a name Enter notes Enter the event date You must enter a date Ce Oe COT as Select Finish You can also add photos by right clicking on a catalog and selecting Add Photos Publishing Catalogs Publishing a catalog will upload it to your PhotoReflect site where customers can view and order photos online If there is a package group assigned to an event it will be Uploaded as well To publish a catalog 1 Do not turn off the software while publishing Select the catalog you want to publish 2 3 Select Catalogs located at the very top left of the software 4 Select Publish Selected 5 The status bar at the bottom left of the software will turn blue and show a of publishing 6 When a catalog is published you will see a prompt and all published photo s will show a P in the upper left hand corner You can also publish a catalog by right clicking on it and selecting Publish Catalog which contains all of the previous options You can reserve a space for catalogs to be publ
123. always displayed in the Photo Workshop when toolsets are visible either at the left of the workspace portraits or above the workspace landscapes Use the basic toolset for adjusting location size and orientation of photos in the workspace 181 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets Basic toolset options are in order Move Scale Orientation and Zoom a amp save changes 4 lt 2 ane eo PRG sevens new photo move v scale v orientation zoom v save to v Saving Changes The software will not save correction settings for a photo if you select another photo To save your settings for a photo use the save options detailed here Moving a Photo Photos will often be larger than the sheet and will need to be centered in some way You can move a photo around within the sheet size Basic move options include e Select an arrow on the move tool to move the photo in that direction e Select the box in the middle of the tool to center the photo Select Move to open a dropdown menu with additional options e Select Reset X or Y Position to set X and Y to 0 e Select an X or Y offset to move the photo left negative or right positive You can also move a photo by clicking and holding the left mouse button over the photo and moving the mouse Scaling a Photo Scaling a photo will increase or decrease the size within the sheet size Qui Basic scale options include scale v e Select the arrow to decrease
124. amount of tax charged to an order 356 Inserting Special Text This option will print the order time associated with the print job The order time is denoted in standard form 01 52PM ORDERTIME This option will print the order total dollar value with two decimal places 99 99 ORDERTOTAL This option will print the quantity of sheets all together in the current print order This is represented by a numerical value ORDERTOTALSHEETS This option will print the computer name that supplied the image This option will print the package name Package 1 PACKAGE This option will print the page number in a series or stand alone For example if were on page 2 of 5 the software would print Page 2 of 5 PAGE This option will print the file pathway of the image directly to the image name For example if the image is saved on the C drive located in the Photos directory then in the Team1 folder and finally called Front jpg the software would print C Photos Team1 Front jpg PATH The option will print the print size of the image 5x7 print PRINTSIZE This option will print the sequential print number within the order This option is specific to Noritsu printers and displays the specific sheet number within an order On most printers if you print 10 copies of a sheet the backprint information will be identical for all sheets On Noritsu printers the printer is able to insert a different count onto each copy
125. an Order Form An order form is a copy of the order information displayed in the bottom half of the orders workspace To print an order form right click on the order then select Print Order Form Printing a Simple Receipt A simple receipt is a quick low resolution receipt with only text and basic information including e Company info e Packages and package cost e Order ID e Taxes e Date and time e Total cost To print a simple receipt right click on the order then select Print Simple Receipt 153 Using Orders Workspace Order Receipt L29E5 HT5RMBY Rebekah Thompson 5001 Plaza on the Lake Austin TX 78749 555 555 5555 webmaster expressdigital com Order 27 09 2006 L29E5 HTSRMBY 02 33 PM Package Single 8x10 10 00 8x10 Print Sub Total 10 00 Sales Tax 0 83 Total 10 83 Automatically Print Receipt Shipping Cancel Editing amp Proofing an Order You can quickly edit and proof photos from the Orders tab before sending orders off to print Order proofing will open the photos in a version of the Photo Workshop that includes additional options and a navigation bar for easily moving between photos pages and orders To edit and proof an order select an order and select edit amp proof from the bottom of the software or right click on an order and select Edit amp Proof Order The order proofing window will appear For more information on editing and correction tools click here to read ab
126. and out as a transition e Music select music options detailed here e Choose select additional viewing options O Single Picture Mode when viewing multiple photos with frames the current photo will appear in every frame Normally different photos from the catalog will appear with it Show Filenames view filenames beneath the photo Show Image Numbers view photo numbers beneath the photo Show Rating view photo ratings beneath the photo Choose Font select a font for any text appearing beneath the photo Sort Photos sort photos with options detailed here Frames select frame styles and size to preview what the photo will look like in a number of different frames and locations Simple is the last option and the default black border e Close return to normal Presentation Mode 164 Using Photo Workshop Using the Photo Workshop The Photo Workshop is where you will enhance correct and edit all of your photos before printing The Photo Workshop works internally within the software and does not require any additional software to run making it quick and easy to edit retouch and save changes to any photos in the software Find and select the Photo Workshop tab at the bottom of the software For a complete reference guide to the Photo Workshop including detailed screenshots and button locations go here Navigating the Photo Workshop The Photo Workshop workspace is separated into three areas appea
127. ange the print size Select Enabled to activate this image printer Select Copy Settings to copy the settings from another raster printer Select Orientation options Select the Print Area and Bleed options Select the Output Folder output File Type Filename Format and the filename and variable to start with 58 Setting Up Your Network 4 Select Media amp Profile ad Select Use a color profile for this device and browse to a color profile location if you want to use a specific color profile Select Media Rules and the corresponding media to sent specific items to specific printers 5 Select Margin Text d Select Control options for if and when to print margin text Enter text to appear on lines 1 and 2 at left center and right justification Select Insert Special Text to enter pre made text for customers dates packages and other information Select Restore Default Text to set the text to printer defaults 6 Select OK to save printer settings Managing Connected Printers If you need to edit the settings of any connected printer simply return to the printers tab and select Setup for the printer you want to edit Follow the steps for that printer from the guides above Note Printer settings are not accessible via a Client Station Since printers are connected to the Server Computer they are only accessible via the Server 123 Connecting Cameras The software is almost ready
128. any of the previous headers to sort the order list by that type 147 Using Orders Workspace Finding Orders You can search for orders by order ID To find an order select find orders from the bottom of the software or right click on the order list and select Find Order Enter the entire order ID into the text field and select Find Note You must enter the order ID exactly as it appears in the software Viewing Older Orders You can view older orders by selecting View from the very top center of the software and selecting an order age Any orders up to and including the age you select will appear These options are only available for completed orders e Select All to view every order you ve had in the studio Refreshing the Order List Select Refresh from the very top center of the screen to refresh the orders and ensure your list is up to date Viewing Order Information Selecting any order will display the following order information in the bottom half of the window e Customer Information the customer s name address and contact information e Order the order number and date received e Shipping Information where the order will be sent when finished e Item List the item list displays the purchased items the quantity photo details and the fulfillment method All photo notes and services will appear here Clicking the filename link for a photo will display a preview image of the photo e Order Summary the total co
129. ar Select Import and browse to the location of the photos you wish to import Select any number of photos by holding and dragging the mouse or manually clicking each one holding CTRL or SHIFT Select how to copy the files 124 Using Photo Library a Simply copy the files to the destination without changing the file type b Or Convert the files to another format while copying i Select a new file format for the imported photos 5 If you want to rename the imported photos select Rename copied files a Select a file name prefix b Select a starting number c Select Reverse Chronological to rename photos starting with the last first 6 Select Delete files after copying them if you want to permanently remove these files from this location after importing 7 Select Import to import selected photos or select Import All to import all photos in the current location Importing Photos from a Camera If you have a tethered or WiFi camera connected and set up in the software you can import photos into the current catalog as they are taken To import photos from a tethered or WiFi camera 1 Ensure that the camera is set up properly and connected to the software via USB cable or through WiFi 2 Take a photo with the camera or press SPACE on the keyboard 3 The photo will automatically be added to the current catalog Importing Photos from a Camera Card If you want to import photos from a camera card you must read the camera c
130. ar rating e Photo Number sort by the assigned photo numbers e Filename sort by the photo filename e Full Pathname sort by the entire computer pathname e File Size sort by file size e Published sort by published and unpublished e Archived sort by archived and unarchived e Exif Comment sort by Exchangeable Image File information e Sort by Custom manually click and drag photos to their positions 3 Select to sort photos by the previous criteria in either ascending or descending order Rating Photos Every photo can be assigned a 1 to 5 star rating These ratings can signify either your favorite photos or the customer s favorite photos To rate a photo 1 Select any number of photos that you want to have the same rating 2 Select rating from the very top center of the software 3 Select 1 to 5 stars 1 being fair and 5 being best You can also rate photos by pressing F1 through F5 as hotkeys with F1 being fair and F5 being best or by clicking a number of stars at the top of the software Orienting Photos To orient selected photos select orientation from the top of the software Orientation options are detailed here 161 Using Presentation Mode Adding Services Service notes are additional services performed on photos above and beyond the normal touchups To add a service to a photo 1 Select any number of photos 2 Select service notes from the bottom of the software 3 Check to select any of you
131. ard from an external card reader To import from an external card reader or drive 1 Attach the external card reader or drive to the computer 2 Select Import and navigate to the folder containing the photos 3 Select Import or Import All to add the photos to the catalog 125 Using Photo Library Finding a Photo Find Photos To search for a photo within the catalog Enter the text to search for Search String sport x 1 Select Find located above the photo Select where you want to search Search Method Filename v viewer Direction C Match whole word only Oup 2 Enter the text and type to search for esa O Down Filename Path Photo Notes Film Number or Exif Comments 3 Select to match only whole words 4 Select to match case of words 5 Select to search up or down within the current catalog Renaming Photos Renaming a photo will also change its filename To rename a photo select a photo and select Photos from the very top center of the software Select Rename Photo and enter anew name You can also right click on a photo and select Edit Photo gt Rename Photo which contains the previous options Adding Photographer Notes This note will appear in the photo info To add a photographer note to a photo select a photo and select Photos from the very top center of the software Select Describe Photo and enter a note You can also right click on a photo and select Edit Photo gt Describe P
132. are method The brush is a circle that you can hold and drag to apply retouches Adjust the size feather and flow and click to use the brush Lasso Use the lasso to draw an area that will have the selected retouch applied to it This method will apply the current retouch method and tool when creating the lasso so select your method and tool beforehand Poly Lasso Use the poly lasso to draw a polygon area that will have the selected retouch applied to it This method will apply the current retouch method and tool when creating the polygon so select your method and tool beforehand Rectangle Use the rectangle to draw a box that will have the selected retouch applied to it This method will apply the current retouch method and tool when creating the rectangle so select your method and tool beforehand Oval Use the oval to draw an ellipse that will have the selected retouch applied to it This method will apply the current retouch method and tool when creating the oval so select your method and tool beforehand Fill All This method will apply the tool and settings to the entire photo Clear All This method will clear the tool and settings from the entire photo Using the Retouch Tools Read on for a brief description of all retouch tools 234 Using Retouch Workshop Clone Use the clone tool to replace an area of a photo using another area of the photo as a source Select opacity and choose a source Blemish U
133. art Time 12 00 PM y End Time 1 00 PM y Enter Task Name Cleaning Studio 3 Enter Description Update Status Assigned Add Status Assign Employee s Yaz Akrout Remove Assign Employee Adding a Call Note Calls can only be added from the calendar while viewing by day To add a call from the calendar 1 Make sure you are in the Tasks and Events calendar not the Schedule 2 Select to View by day 3 Double click any time in any day in the Calls column you change the actual time and date next You must double click in the Calls column while viewing by day 4 Select a customer from the dropdown box a If you want to search for an existing customer select Search Type in part of the customer information in the Find box select the criteria to search for in the From dropdown box and select Search You can also organize the list of customers by clicking on a header to sort When you have found the customer double click the name or select it and select OK b If you need to add or edit an existing customer read the previous section on setting up customers 5 Choose a date and time for the call 97 Using Your Studio 6 Enter a name for the call You must enter a name 7 Enter details for the call This is optional 8 Update or add a status to the call Examples assigned call again complete 9 Assign an employee to the call If you need to add or edit an existing employee read the previous
134. ate orders that need to be ready at the same time such as school pictures To batch orders 1 Select any number of orders using CTRL or SHIFT 2 Right click on one of the selected orders and select Batch Orders 3 The orders are still separate but will be treated as one large order when sent off to printing 4 You can add additional orders to the batch by using CTRL to select the batch and the new order and repeating the previous steps A batched order will be collapsed and given an internal batch order ID Select or to expand or collapsed the contained orders You can print individual orders contained 151 Using Orders Workspace within a batch by expanding the batch selecting the individual order and selecting Print Order Order 1D Type Customer Order Time Status Status Time Age Payment Fulfilment BE1Q7 Batch 6 3 2009 5 38 47 AM Saved None Today 18 00 Print Locally i LOWMJ UEBCHSS Local North Basketball 5 26 2009 2 05 04 PM 1of 2Printed 5 26 2009 2 42 55 PM 7 days old 9 00 Print Locally b L2WMJ UEBCZOE Local North Basketball 5 28 2009 9 19 51 PM lof 2Printed 5 28 2009 9 20 51 PM 5 days old 9 00 Print Locally None L2WM3 UEBCHQ Local North Basketball 5 28 2009 9 10 29 PM Saved 5 days old 9 00 Print Locally Note Batched orders selected for printing may appear as Queued for Processing in the Completed Orders tab but the individual order will display printed Printing an Order Proof
135. ath photos 123 4 5 6 7 Using Photo Library e Show Photo Rating display your 1 to 5 star photo rating above photos e Show Hidden Photos display photos hidden from publishing Select to view photos as e Photo Thumbnails view miniature versions of your photos e Photo Filename List view a list of filenames with file size and creation time e Photo Info List view a list of thumbnails with detailed photo information o Filename Path Image Size File Size Date Last Modified and the Camera Information displaying range of color are displayed Select the size of thumbnails to display tiny small normal large largest Click to place a check and select to Use Second Monitor for Previews a If you have a second monitor connected selecting a photo will automatically display a large preview there with a black background Click to place a check and select to view High Quality Previews You can also sort and view photos by right clicking on any photo and selecting View which contains all of the previous options Thumbnail Size To select to size of thumbnails to display select one of the 5 different box sizes tiny small normal large i m m Adding a Photo You can import a photo or a group of photos into a catalog at any time These photos will immediately appear in the photo viewer To add photos to a catalog l Ze 3 Select Add located above the photo viewer A drop down menu will appe
136. ation 211 Using Border Workshop 10 Select when a prompt will appear asking for text and information when loaded or when you select to edit text and information 11 Select to leave text fields empty when loaded or to use the last value available 12 Select OK You can also edit the border properties by right clicking on the border items list and selecting Border Properties from the dropdown menu Viewing and Editing Item Properties At any time in the workshop you can view and edit the properties of a selected item To view and edit item properties 1 Select an item from the workspace or the border items list 2 Select item properties from the right toolbar A window appears 3 This window contains all of the options you set when creating the item For guides to item properties go here and locate your item You can also edit item properties by double clicking any item or by right clicking any item in the workspace or border items list and selecting Properties from the dropdown menu Viewing the Using the Border Items List The border items list keeps track of every border object as a layer in the border Every item in the border items list corresponds to an active item in your border workspace and will list items by your descriptions when creating items The bottom of the border items list displays measurements for the currently selected item including e The current X and Y location of the cursor e The Xand Y l
137. ationship between two text objects or a graphic and text Using this option is like grouping objects Vertical Alignment Options Choose the vertical alignment within the text box When you add text it is inside a text box that can be sized This setting aligns the text at either the top middle or bottom of the text box 286 Tutorial Border Workshop Character and line Spacing The Border Workshop allows user to set custom character spacing for the text on a border The workshop offers default exact and even options The Exact option allows the photographer an opportunity to set the exact spacing measured in pixels The Evenly Spaced Text Box option means that each character will be evenly spaced with every other character in the text box The Border Workshop also allows the user to set custom line spacing for the text on the border These options include single multiplier and exact The multiplier option takes the amount fixed for single and multiplies that by the entered number A photographer could choose 6 and the result would be 6 single lines between each line of text The exact option allows the user to select an exact pixel width If the user entered 20 in the Exact field then the soace between each line of text would be 20 pixels wide Advanced Options The advanced section of the Text Object window includes seven features These allow the user to display text onscreen as a guide but the text is not printe
138. aves changes but keeps current format Simply copy the photos to the destination Convert the photos to another format while copying Photo Size Choose the size of photos you would like save for the customer Full Size largest size full resolution mi Advanced Options Would you like to add a watermark to these photos General The first page within the Digital Delivery Wizard is the General component The Format page contains all the vital information necessary for exporting your digital media There are four options on the Format page Destination Information Photo Format Image Size and Advanced Options e Destination Information Destination Information is where you set the location for the exported media Click the drop down box to select a destination Selecting lt Browse Folder gt will let you search your computer for a folder or drive You can choose a folder on your computer or network a storage device or choose to copy the files to a CD or DVD If you choose a CD or DVD make sure you have a disc in the drive before attempting to burn the media 68 Setting Up Your Products Photo Format Photo Format is where you set how the images will be copied There are three options Permanently apply attributes Copy the images or Convert the images to another format while copying o Permanently apply attributes will save all of your current changes in the Photo Workshop but
139. below each photo Show Photo Numbers show photo numbers below each photo Viewing Aspect select the photo viewing aspect from your preset list of aspects High Quality Preview view higher resolution images for photo previews 327 Reference Photo Workshop Photo Workshop Reference Find the Photo Workshop by clicking the Photo Workshop tab at the bottom of the software 14 STUDIO SOLUTION make Single Multiple thir A event12 jpg event13 jpg 2 Ra eventt4 jpg Y A event15 jpg nicole010 jf Catalog a Attributes y Sorty Vieww Fullscreen Show Data Hide Cart Photos Customer Test Portrait Sitting nicole010 jpg 4x6 Aspect 1 4x6 2 2 5x7s 3 8x10 4 wallets 5 8x10 and 5x7 6 44x5s amp 7 35mm ane color 8 4 5x7s and 2 8x10s y black amp white 9 24x s sepi eh rote OS 4 prev more gt duotone PS place order save order 4mo ks on text off ord anek 0 00 gt gt A radere ackages l gt LOTT 9 borders v sheets v orientation ja ol focus y min med max x save changes vignette save as new photo retouch y save tov Catalog add package a cleor order change cropping remove iterr Enhance Manage Studio Photo Library Photo Workshop Orders Client Presentation 328 Reference Photo Workshop Below are the menus for the Photo Workshop Toolsets are not listed here but are detailed here in order of appearance in the software Click
140. bled by default Add default back print information to each order enable this option to specify and print text on the back of all photos This option is only available for larger printers with back print capability To enable back print text 1 Select Add default back print information to each order 2 Select Edit Back Print Info 3 A window appears Select Store suggested back print text in each order 4 Enter the text you would like to appear Select Insert special text to add information such as date time names photo numbers copyright symbols etc Add the default package to the shopping cart enable this option to automatically add your default package to every order made Shipping Settings select a default shipping method for all orders you fulfill locally and enable Ship all orders back to the company address to have all printed orders mailed back to you Print to Disc Settings use this to write order information to disc for fulfillment at a lab using Labtricity The studio must have these products configured the same way as the receiving lab Select Test Compatibility to see if your computer supports internal disc writing and can automatically burn the information to a CD Ej Image Preview Settings These options affect preview files Enable Preview Files Preview files are reduced size versions of your photos that will load and edit faster than the digital negatives The Image Preview Setting found in General
141. border if you wish to add a border to each photo a Select Choose to browse the borders you created and organized here b Select Match border orientation to image to rotate the border horizontally or vertically depending on the photo c Select Match border aspect ratio to printsize to resize the border to the correct aspect ratio of the print Select to a Create a single order This will combine every print into one large order Although it may take longer every print will be ready at the same time b Create separate orders for each photo This will divide the order into as many orders as there are photos Each order will contain every different print of that particular photo It is possible that all of your orders will not be ready at the same time i If you selected to create separate orders and you are printing more than event you can select to Create separate orders for 135 Using Photo Library each subevent to create separate orders for each event in the catalog 7 Select Place Orders to send your orders to the printer or lab or select Save Orders to save the orders in the Orders tab to be sent later Batch Order Select which photos to print Y Batch Order Print only the selected photos Print all photos in this event Choose the prints to make for each photo Add Remove All Apply a border to each print Print each photo with a border How to create the print order s Cr
142. by dragging the bars or typing values into the text boxes 3 Select Save Changes As and select Image Only Automatically Adjusting Color Balance You can automatically adjust color balance by choosing a neutral point of a photo and saving those attributes to apply to all photos in the event click balance Ideally you would shoot a gray or white card along with your photos to guarantee a neutral area for accurate color balance To automatically adjust color balance 1 Select the eyedropper tool above click balance 2 Selecta neutral area black white or gray in the photo 3 The color will be adjusted automatically Save these attributes if you want to apply them to additional photos 204 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets Selecting a Color Profile Use this option to select the color profile used when capturing photos This will usually be the camera color profile This is not where you set the printer or monitor color profiles Select color profile to choose your profile e Automatic the software will automatically apply any known color profiles based on the Canon default profiles on each device e None the software will use the standard sRGB color space and will not apply a color profile e Adobe RGB set the color space to Adobe RGB color space e Custom select a color profile from another location Windows has a recommended location for storing these files system32 spool drivers color Select the camera
143. changing the position or size The Position fields determine exactly where each side of the shape is located The farthest point up down left and right of the shape will be placed at these coordinates A Top entry of O means the topmost part of the object will extend to the very edge of the top border A Left entry of 50 means the object will start 50 pixels from the leftmost 291 Tutorial Border Workshop edge of the border To change the position of the edges of your object use the arrow buttons or click in the text fields and type in the desired amounts Note Changing the coordinates within the Position fields can change the size of your object To quickly change the position of object you can click the Alignment Options button This option will bring up a drop down list of available alignments Left Center Right Center of Page Top Middle or Bottom The Size fields determine the width and height of your shape Click the arrow buttons or click in the text field to enter the desired size of your object To quickly change the size of a object you can click the Fill Options button This option will bring up a drop down list of available fill options Fill Entire Page Fill Width Fill Height Choosing one of these will extend those parameters to the edge of the border Editing a Text Object s Font After adding a text object you can change its font without opening the tem proper
144. clockwise and counter clockwise respectively Vertical orient selected photo vertically Horizontal orient selected photo horizontally Vertical Flipped orient selected photo vertically and flipped 180 Horizontal Flipped orient selected photo horizontally and flipped 180 Rotate Clockwise rotate selected photo 90 clockwise Rotate Counter Clockwise rotate selected photo 90 counter clockwise Flip flip selected photo 180 315 Reference Photo Library e Set Crop Orientation o Auto let the software decide to crop selected photo vertically or horizontally o Vertical crop selected photo vertically o Horizontal crop selected photo horizontally e Set Default Orientation o Vertical set selected photo with vertical orientation as default o Horizontal set selected photo with horizontal orientation as default o Vertical Flipped set selected photo with vertical orientation flipped 180 o Horizontal Flipped set selected photo with horizontal orientation flipped 180 e Set Tilt Angle set a custom tilt angle for selected photo Enhance open selected photo in the Photo Workshop for editing Preview view selected photo as a fullscreen preview with slideshow options Publish e Publish Selected publish selected photo to your online storefront e UnPublish Selected remove selected photo from your online storefront e Batch Publish publish a number of selected photos to your online storefront e Ba
145. ct Add from the top of the software 2 Select Edit Custom Objects A window appears 3 Select an object from the list and select to move it up or down the list or delete it 4 Select OK Adding a Line You can add a line as a shape to the border 1 Select Add from the top of the software 2 Select Line 3 Awindow appears 4 Select the following options e Type e Color e Start Style e Weight e Opacity e End Style e Style e Joints e Visibility 5 Select Drawing Mode to create a new line or Editing Mode to edit an existing line 6 Select Done when finished creating and editing your line Adding a Barcode Barcodes provide a reliable way to track data for prints For example you can add a back to a border and apply a barcode to it Simply scan the final print for pricing order number or any other photo data You must have a barcode scanner to read and scan barcodes To add a barcode to a border 1 Select Add from the top of the software 2 Select Barcode 227 Using Border Workshop 3 Awindow appears 4 Youcan encode any information into the barcode a Select a barcode format from the dropdown menu b Select Insert Special Text to add photo data types to the barcode c Select Show Text to display the text below the barcode 5 You can add multiple different types of data into the barcode by separating each type with a space 6 Your barcode will be generated below in the viewer 7 Select
146. ct Camera Type Connect the camera to the computer with a USB cable Turn the camera on Wait for Windows to detect the camera and prepare it for use If the software does not detect the camera and display it on the left side of the software select Detect Camera The camera name will appear in the status bar at the bottom left of the software and at the top center of the Cameras page 241 8 Tutorial Running a Shoot Your camera is now ready to shoot tethered Setting Up a WiFi Camera The software can receive photos wirelessly from any Canon Wireless File Transmitter WFT using an FTP server You will need to have a wireless internet connection set up on your computer to use a WiFi camera Follow these steps to set up your WiFi camera for the shoot l gis ae es iy Select the Manage Studio tab from the bottom of the software and select the Cameras from the top of the studio Select WiFi Camera from the left side of the software under Select Camera Type Make sure the WFT is connected to your camera Turn the camera on Use the WFT connection wizard through the camera menu For more details on finding the WFT wizard refer to the camera manual Select FIP as the communication method in the camera wizard Enter your wireless network amp router settings in the camera wizard Once the FTP Server settings appear on your camera enter the FTP Address and FTP Port listed on the Cameras page in the software You
147. customer s favorite photos To rate a photo 1 Select any number of photos that you want to have the same rating 2 Select Photos from the very top center of the software 3 Select Rate Photo 4 Select 1 to 5 stars 1 being fair and 5 being best You can also right click on any number of photos and select Edit Photo gt Rate Photo and select a rating 127 Using Photo Library Adding Service Notes Service notes are additional services performed on photos above and beyond the normal touchups You defined the services of your studio and your labs here To add a service to a photo 1 Select any number of photos Select Photos from the very top center of the software Select Service Notes Check to select any of your available services to be applied to the photo Select OK S gi e ww ON These services will be applied to this photo in any size in any order You can press the or right click on any number of photos and select Edit Photo gt Service Notes for the previous options Editing Shipping Info To edit a customer s shipping info select Photos from the very top center of the software and select Edit Shipping Info Edit the billing and shipping info and change the shipping type and cost and select Save Changes You can press CTRL H or right click on a photo and select Edit Shipping Info for the previous options Photo Paths You can view the computer folder and paths that contain the photos To
148. cut key for this is Ctrl C Paste pastes the selected object To paste an object you need to have already cut or copied an object The shortcut key for this is Ctrl V Delete deletes the selected object The shortcut key for this is Delete Options The Studio Solution Border Workshop menu provides a way for photographers to access the Options menu This feature is important to photographers who are creating or editing a unique border or template The Border Workshop menu includes grid and alignment features as well as undo and redo options The Options menu specifically allows the user to access both grid and alignment options for the active border These menu listings include Show Grid Grid Options and Auto Alignment Show Grid Grid Options Ctrl G Auto Alignment 266 Tutorial Border Workshop The Show Grid feature allows the user to activate a grid system that can be used in the border creation process Grids are helpful for users who want to make items symmetrical and positioned exactly on the border palate To activate the grid option select Options from the Border Workshop menu Then select Show Grid from the menu A series of dots will appear on screen set in a perfect grid This grid will help the user match up photos and objects on right angles This will also help the user count off spacing and will help ensure that the photos are t
149. d 146 Using Orders Workspace er In xt Order L2WMJ UEBCHQZ_1 ipping Inf J North Bosketboll Recieved 5 28 2009 North Bosketboll Austin TX Austin TX Shipping Method Stondord Packages amp Prints Quantity Photos amp Detais Fulfiment Package 4 4xSs 6 00 1 4 4x5 Prints 1 x sample data 20020415 ed_0005 sport2 jog Print Locally Package 35mm 3 00 35mm Side 1 x sample data 20020415 ed_0005 sport jpg Print Locally Order Summary Customer Payment 9 00 find delete markorder edit amp proof printorder print print print print orders order shipped order proof orderform order allorders tocd Viewing Orders Although there is a new a pending and a completed orders tab the organization and options available for each tab are the same Sorting Orders Once an order enters a tab the following information is shown in the order list from left to right e Order ID this is your order s identifier tied to your lab account e Type each order can be either a local order or a web order e Customer shorthand version of the customer purchasing the order e Order Time date and time the order was placed e Status displays the current status of your order such as printing waiting to print saved or shipped e Status Time date and time of the most current status e Age how long ago the order was placed e Payment cost of the order e Fulfillment orders can be fulfilled locally by you or a lab Click on
150. d It allows the user to draw an outline around the text in addition to a drop shadow or an inside shadow around the text The advanced options allow the user to enter a text rotation angle if you want rotated text Users can also select whether or not you want word wrap enabled When enabled the text wraps within the text box Finally this feature allows the user to make the border editable for future changes Size and Position It is possible to select the size and position for the text from the Text Object window This is available in the Size and Position tab Before you choose a position or size for your object first check the drop down box in the upper right hand corner there are four possible units of measure pixels default inches centimeters and millimeters You can change the unit of measure at any time and the numbers in each field will automatically change to accommodate the new units without changing the position or size The Position fields determine exactly where each side of the shape is located The farthest point up down left and right of the shape will be placed at these coordinates A Top entry of O means the topmost part of the object will extend to the very edge of the top border A Left entry of 50 means the object will start 50 pixels from the leftmost 287 Tutorial Border Workshop edge of the border To change the position of the edges of your object use the arrow buttons or
151. d specify the frame color size and offset from the photo edges If you want a photo to have a shadow select the Draw a Drop Shadow option With this selection you can have the shadow appear either below the photo or on top of the photo so the photo appears inset Specify the offsets and radius of the shadow Composite Size and Position Before you choose a position for your object first check the drop down box in the upper right hand corner there are four possible units of measure pixels default inches centimeters and millimeters You can change the unit of measure at any time and the numbers in each field will automatically change to accommodate the new units without changing the position or size 283 Tutorial Border Workshop The Position fields determine exactly where each side of the shape is located The farthest point up down left and right of the shape will be placed at these coordinates A Top entry of 0 means the topmost part of the object will extend to the very edge of the top border A Left entry of 50 means the object will start 50 pixels from the leftmost edge of the border To change the position of the edges of your object use the arrow buttons or click in the text fields and type in the desired amounts Note Changing the coordinates within the Position fields can change the size of your object To quickly change the position of object you can click the Alignment Options butto
152. d to cover all of the steps between the times when a client is booked all the way through to when the finished order is delivered Studio Solution brings all studio tasks together into a single easy to use software that can manage a complete professional studio workflow regardless of the company s size Because of the scalable design of Studio Solution it can operate stand alone on a single laptop computer on location or it can easily run over a large network managing multiple workstations in various locations Studio Solution uses all of Canon s advanced imaging technologies under the hood to ensure that the image quality being produced at every step in the shooting processing and printing process is up to the highest industry standard Rather than a studio owner or manager thinking about their camera their computers and their printers as separate tools Studio Solution integrates their individual operations effortlessly so that everything operates as a single unit The following are some of Studio Solution s useful features Consistently superior image quality throughout the workflow Canon CR2 RAW workflow Access and permissions for all studio operations Administrators can control which employees have access to individual parts of the software Scalable to any size studio operation Included product support web links Management of all calendar employee and customer databases Keeps track of customer fam
153. discovery File sharing Public folder sharing and Printer sharing Select X to exit this window when finished 301 Troubleshooting c You may also want to disable User Account Control UAC in Vista to eliminate recurring password and permission prompts To do this i Open the Control Panel and under User Account and Family Safety select Add or remove user accounts ii Select Go to the main User Accounts page and select Change security settings iii Click to Unselect the box next to Use UAC to help protect your computer iv Select OK UAC is now disabled 2 Select Share Photo Folder a For Windows XP Select the Sharing tab and select Share this folder on the network The Share Name should be Photos Select Allow network users to change my files Select Apply Select OK For Windows Vista Once you have enabled File Sharing the Photos folder is automatically shared as a subfolder If you wish to share the folder manually you can disable sharing of public folders and enable sharing specifically on your photos folder only by right clicking on it and selecting Share and allowing all users on your network 3 Select Disable Firewall a For Windows XP The Windows Firewall window appears Select to turn the firewall off or to enable Studio Solution as an exception To do this select the Exceptions tab and select Add Program Select Studio Solution and select OK For Windows Vista The Windows Firewall windo
154. dule for pre set dates or enter a Start Date and End Date in the text fields Select the Employee from the dropdown box Select Generate Report A report will appear detailing all of this employee s activity for the time period you specified The very bottom of the report will show all previous current and upcoming shifts for the time period you selected Select Print from the top left of the window to print this schedule a Employees gt Employee Details gt iome Calendar Customers Employees Vendors Products Printers Cameras Reports Options Print Employee Activity Quick Dates Start Date a End Date Employee Admin oa 108 Reports Using Your Studio The Reports tab will generate various information and reports for your studio that you can view and print or export Every report requires that you choose a time period for displaying information View and Print Reports Use this page to view and print various reports Choose the report type below you would like to view Employee Activity Lists and details all activity for a specified employee Employee Export Export CSV file of all studio employees g Employee Schedules Export A list of employee schedules 10 Event Categories Export as Report detailing the number of events by type and their details Package Export A report of all the packages sold Products Export A report of all the products sold Session T
155. e on the toolbar If you want to duplicate an item select it and click duplicate on the toolbar You can only duplicate a single item at a time You can also cut or copy a selected item and paste from the Windows Clipboard by clicking the corresponding tools on the toolbar The order of the items in the Border Items list is important The first item in the list is on the bottom of the layer stack The last item in the list is the top layer You can change an item s position in the layer stack by selecting the layer and using the Order tool See the Order Tool section for information on layer order To help you set the position and size of objects the bottom of the Border Items column displays the coordinates of your mouse pointer You can also view the size and position of a selected object Adding Photo Placeholders When creating border templates you need a placeholder for one or more photos You add photo placeholders to the border template in the position where you want a photo to appear These photo placeholders are called image cells In most cases you will probably have only one image cell because the border is designed for only one photo The example below is a single photo with a simple border overlay 272 Tutorial Border Workshop You might want to create a design using more than one photo In this case you would add multiple image cells and position them on the page where you want the photos to appear The followi
156. e month So days 1 9 will gain a zero 01 02 03 This option will print the image filename This option will print the filename of the primary image used on the sheet If the sheet contains a composite border then this is the filename of the first image This option will print the filename of the primary image used on the sheet If the sheet contains a composite border then this is the filename of the first image This option is a special case used when two prints are optimized on a single sheet For example this could be when two 5x7 s are on one 8x10 sheet This option will print the image file save date in numeric form divided by front slashes 02 14 06 This option will print the folder file pathway that the image file is housed in on the computer For example if the image file was stored on the C drive in the Photos directory and then in the Team1 folder the address would be as follows C Photos Team1 354 FILETIME LONGDATE MEDIUMDATE MONTH ORDERBACKPRINT1 ORDERBACKPRINT2 ORDERCOMMENTS ORDERDATE ORDERDATETIME Inserting Special Text This option will print the time the image file was most recently saved The time will print in the standard form 1 01PM This option will print the date in its most extended form writing out the day of the week an abbreviated month and numerical values for the date and year Wednesday Feb 14 2006 This option will print the month as a sing
157. e been presenting and previewing photos in the customer friendly Presentation Mode we will make the order here Select Show Cart from the top right of the workspace to show the shopping cart exit presentation mod compare rating y fullscreen music orientation y view v 1 4x6 2 25x7s 3 8x10 4 wallets 5 8x10 and 5x7 6 44x5s 7 35mm 8 4 5x7s and 2 8x10s 9 2 4x6s 4 prev more gt place order save order F Ordered Packages 0 00 249 Tutorial Running a Shoot If you do not want to display prices of packages right click any item in the shopping cart and select to uncheck Show Prices This can be done when the customer is not around the option will be saved Adding Items to the Cart If you need to change your current package group select the prev and more buttons from the package section of the cart or select add package from the bottom of the cart and select a group from the dropdown menu Once your customer has decided on which packages to order you can add them to the cart e Selecta photo to add and select a package The package s correspond to 1 9 on your keyboard as hotkeys 1 4x6 2 2 5x7s 3 8x10 4 wallets 5 8x10 and 5x7 6 44x5s 7 35mm 8 4 5x7s and 2 8x10s 9 2 4x6s e Select how many of that package to add to the cart Copies MS 8x10 Enter Number of Copies 250 Tutorial Running a Shoot When the packages are selected and added to the cart y
158. e email address will open a new message to them in your default email program The customer status will also be listed here active inactive lead or custom Current Bookings These are all future bookings for the customer Click on the name of a booking to view or edit details Previous Bookings These are all past bookings If a booking has been completed you can click on View Photos to see the photos from that event If a booking has not been completed click on the name of the booking to view or edit details Calls These are all current calls scheduled for the customer Previous calls will not appear here Click on the name of a call to view or edit details Customer Notes These are all notes created for the customer Click Remove to delete a note Order These are all orders for the customer listed by internal order number tomer Details We Nicole Smith Current Bookings 1304 Broadwa Jim s Portraits 6 3 2009 6 00 AM Ann Arbor MI 48104 Previous Bookings Nicole s School Photos View Photos 6 1 2009 1 30 PM Calls No current calls available Customer Notes No notes found Orders No orders available 101 Using Your Studio Adding a Customer To add a new customer 1 Select New Customer from the right side of the window 2 Enter the customer name address and contact information 3 Enter the customer status Select Add Status to create a new one 4 Select Add Family Member
159. e or by Name 3 Select to sort catalogs by ascending or descending order within Time or Name To change catalog viewing options 1 Select the View menu located at the very top left of the software 2 Select to view catalogs by e Default this will view catalogs within one catalog type e Date this will view according to catalog dates o Select Arrange Catalogs to sort by day week or month e Alphabetically o Select Arrange Catalogs to divide catalogs into 4 6 or 26 groups e Type this will view according to catalog types such as wedding or portrait 114 4 J Using Photo Library Select and check to show the number of catalogs contained within a larger category Select and check to show the catalog ID number added to catalog names Select and check to show archived catalogs in the list You can also Sort and View catalogs by right clicking on any catalog and selecting View which contains all of the previous options Finding a Catalog To search for a catalog select Find above the catalog list Enter the text and type to search for and select whether to search archived photos Adding Catalogs To add a catalog to the list 1 8 9 Select the category type you want to add a catalog to If you want to add a different category type you can change it in this process Select New Catalog located to the left directly above the catalog list If you want to create a new catalog and automatically impo
160. e photo only when printing O Test Photo Ho Edi Cancel Transparency Options The Transparency setting you select depenas on the type of photos you will use with the border If you want the photo to be transparent select the Simple option and enter a transparency percentage If the border is for green screen photos select the Chroma key option If the border is for multi exposure photos you want to overlap select either the High key or Low key option depending on whether the photo you are adding has a white or black background If you want to create effects where a section is masked off so the effect is not applied select Pre defined Mask and select a mask you want to apply 274 Tutorial Border Workshop You can create your own masks if you want a transparent shape that is not available in the pre defined masks For example you might want to create a cut out as in the example below To create a custom mask effect you must first create a graphic file that contains the shape you want to be masked from the effect On the Choose Mask window check the Custom Mask checkbox and browse for your mask file The effect above uses the following mask JPG file 275 Tutorial Border Workshop The inner shape is the masked area and is transparent The default color around the masked area is white If you want the non transparent area to be a color other than white you can use the Color effect See the custom mask
161. e used with any number of stations all capable of previewing and selling any photos on the server station The server and client stations will be connected through a simple Windows network Orders can be printed locally Large Studios A typical large studio includes this setup With a large customer base you can set up even more presentation and sales stations all connected to several different capture stations These will all connect and sync with the server station allowing all the client stations to work simultaneously with updated photos and data 49 Setting Up Your Network Your Network Now that you understand the logic it s time to set up your own network Find these options in Manage Studio gt Options gt Network Options Setting Up a Single Computer A single computer setup means you are running one copy of the software on one computer The setup requires the installation of the USB dongle This is the default upon installation A single computer environment means that e This computer will be used by itself e All photos and data will be stored locally or on an attached external HD or RAID e All print requests will be sent to printers connected directly to this computer To set up a Single Computer network 1 Click Single Computer on the 1 Single Station Set left side of the screen so that or The Single Computer Station option is provided for the simple case where a check appears just one copy
162. e002 jpg 8 nicole003 jpg 7 nicole004 jpg luotone icole005 jpg icole006 jpg icole007 jpg icole008 jpg Double clicking on a photo while in multiple mode will switch to Single mode with the selected photo in the workspace Viewing Fullscreen To view the current workspace photo as a fullscreen preview on a black background select Fullscreen from the top of the software Click anywhere to return to the workshop 166 Using Photo Workshop Viewing a Slideshow To view a slideshow of all photos in the catalog select Catalog from the bottom left of the software and select Slideshow The software will switch to Presentation Mode where you can run slideshows play music and view the photo with different frames Click here for detailed options during full screen Presentation Mode Viewing without Tools To view your photos without the Photo Workshop tools displayed select the View tab from the bottom of the software Select another toolset tab to view editing tools Viewing Front and Back Some photos will have a front and a back when printed To switch between viewing the front and back of the photo select View from the top of the software and select either Front or Back Viewing High Quality Previews To view high quality preview images select View from the top of the software and select and check High Quality Preview These images have more detail and are easier to edit Viewing with a Printer Profile You can view
163. eSt Aaaa bn daria et 287 NOONE KOIRAA E al e e dt Settee 288 Transparency ODHONS ena ei a e a E sees i a ea E E cadet A E EELE 289 MAA 0110 EE E E E E E E E SS 291 Advanced ODIO 3 14 a a Be cette tin e e ot a eE e E A fat 291 OTE ODHOAS a EE 291 Size INTRO a dd 291 Editing a Text Objects AMA A 292 Adjusting the PI e sd A Le A 292 ELECTO cai 292 Make Same TO leccion cado 293 24 Table of Contents COnfer OO PREE EEE A E ates tea hee tet AATAS EAE EAT teens Sh ate teas 293 Al TOO iaa ria 293 PI o N 294 DITA NN 294 ROME TO Lt E E TEN E A EE ti 295 AA TE E A A ANO NO 295 Pd A A A A ateeee 296 LO it et od el te o o ao o ete o O 296 A AAA E E E Re aaia S ER ENa ae Eeee aie Ee ee RE e Tanas 296 ActualSize TOO ita apt 296 Testing Variable Text REIS cocina is 297 Using the Photo and graphic Object Query coooccccnocccconncncnoncnoonnconnnnnononocnon nn nooo nncnnnncnnonnos 297 Gr p hic Variables iii E e E E E E E E We Raves 297 QUIET YV CONIC E SE toa 298 TROUDISSINOOTIING P a E E S 300 COMMONS BAr EONS A a A E A R Aa 300 Pin eQUeve Problemi osr io E E e E RR E 300 File Server Prol 300 Camera Nor DSTO CIOS vecina ia 301 Can t Commect Tora Server or Client Staton eiieeii e eiae iee asiaa 301 Hardware PTOS A A E E A N E a E 301 PErMISSION Srta Eea aeea R O e aeni S 301 ESAE NS EE E O ON 302 EUITIO AN 303 25 Table of Contents Cant Detecta PINTE CAMELO daria traia ia 303 HardWare PTOS daa 304 CONO Printer H E a A de 304 Cano
164. ea ada 35 Catalog MENU raren a A Se es ee ico es 36 MN A RN 36 Shopping COMP AAA a eee E RE Ee Ta enat Ee EE o Ae E A oe alee E e ieia 36 PHOTO Dala an n A A E E E E N ERS 36 PIIOTO WOLKSINO o DPT A E EE ice 36 A O A E ER E eats 37 oE AEAN E E E E E E EE EE E 37 Color BAAN Ea e a E cate E E E A E a E EE a E E ana E EEN ES 37 DIODOS NI A O AE AEST 37 MEW edo daa acidos 37 A aaan aie aa a E a tose vaebenin A eas a a A ovate i 37 Table of Contents Client Presentati sai its 38 Setting Software Options Aaa 39 SUIS MMO AGT ON sr e A A A R E S 39 CSC CIO A a a a a O ora aa tee eetan 40 Application LoGal Se S a e Md eit ene Neen abel de 40 ApplicatornSshared Settings it ernen eee ie et E A N A 4 Application Generals ett dea 4 EVI MEE ODORS A ie Bich ected ae Be ah nee Die 0d hss hen hth inl Nie 1 ah ooh te ye 44 IMAGE Preview SEHINGS A ON 44 Spell Checker Serias iii Se SSA Be SE e eases ees 45 NOTO RENTES ACCOUN OA AA 46 Labtricity ACCOUN sesasi riensi sesers iiiar a aio 46 Systemi Proper eS it A A A AAA Wie 46 Calibrate MONTO Sara a 47 Setting Up Your NEWOrk cocinada src cacas 48 AECA NETOS ie cda 48 SIDE COMPU US Tes da 48 ONES TUDO 2 A E A ii 49 Smal STICIOS a A A Ad ca lides 49 Kolo Ee OEE A SG Se RA EES E ci 49 a A O A OE 50 Se NO UB SINGIS COMPU atlantis Cocos eens Adan a san de cassddtesedadecassadeatetuesetactinse 50 Setting Up a Server COMPUTER iccccs ceciccscccceesdcetsesshcauseschcebdscdacseescecebiedcasandedeeseticede
165. eate a single order Create separate orders for each photo Proofing Photos Proof sheets are single sheets containing small printout of photos for presenting to customers You can quickly print a pre made proof sheet or you can create custom proof sheets with advanced options Press P as a hotkey for proofing photos To quickly create a proof sheet 1 Select any number of photos 2 Select Proof from above the photo viewer A window appears 3 If you have already created a custom proof template select a Proof Template Otherwise this field will remain blank 4 Enter a Title for the proof sheet This title will appear on each page of the proof 136 Using Photo Library Qr Select the page size for the proof sheets Es Select the size of the individual photos that will appear on the proof sheet N Select the orientation a Portrait or Landscape page will set the entire page b All portrait proofs will orient every photo as a portrait c All landscape proofs will orient every photo as a landscape 8 Select the number of copies to print 9 Select to Print Filenames under each photo 10 Select to a Create a print order this will be an individual order for just the proof sheet b Add proof sheet to shopping cart this will add the proof sheet to the shopping cart as part of the current order 11 Select Print All to proof every photo in the event or Print Selected to only proof the
166. ect borders from the borders tool to open a dropdown menu Select Borders Select a border from the current group pe Ges oS The border will be applied to the photo If the border is a different aspect ratio that aspect ratio will be automatically applied to the photo Setting the Border Group and Directory To activate border groups 1 Select borders from the borders tool to open a dropdown menu 2 Select Set Border Group 3 Select and check to activate a border group You can have multiple border groups activated at once To set the border directory 189 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets Select borders from the borders tool fo open a dropdown menu 2 Select Set Borders Directory 3 4 Select OK Select a directory where your borders are located Adding and Editing Border Text Text is considered a border To add text to a photo without text l 2 3 OR E Select text from the borders tool A window appears Select your text settings detailed here Select borders from the border menu Select Edit Border Select Add Border Text or Edit Border Text Select your text settings detailed here You can also add or edit border text by pressing CTRL T as a hotkey If a photo has a border applied that includes text you can edit the text in that border by following the previous steps To add text to a photo that already has a border applied that includes text you will need to edit the b
167. ected or moved 337 Reference Border Workshop Hide Object hide object to view beneath it Link Object link an object to move with other objects Cut copy an item to the clipboard and delete it Copy copy an item to the clipboard Paste paste the current item from the clipboard Duplicate copy and paste an exact duplicate of the item including item description Delete delete the current item Fill amp Fit Page fit selected item to page edges Make Same copy properties of another item Center center item to page Align align item edges to another item Space space three or more items evenly Order send an item back or bring an item forward in layers Rotate rotate an item Zoom zoom mode for zooming in and out Set Test Photo select a photo to view within a photo placeholder 338 Shortcut Keys Orders Workspace and Retouch Workshop Shortcut Keys and Special Text There are a lot of options in Studio Solution but fortunately there are a lot of shortcut keys for quickly accessing those options Shortcut keys change depending on which part of the software you are in so select a link below to view shortcut keys for that section Orders Workspace Shortcut Keys Retouch Workshop Shortcut Keys Photo Library Shortcut Keys Slideshow Shortcut Keys Presentation Mode Shortcut Keys Photo Workshop Shortcut Keys Border Workshop Shortcut Keys For a table with all special text for p
168. ecting Select All or Deselect All To refresh photos select Photos from the very top center of the software and select Refresh Or hit F5 Sorting and Viewing Photos To sort photos within a catalog 1 Select a catalog or photo group 122 Using Photo Library 2 Select Sort from the very top center of the software 3 Select to sort photos by Rating sort by your assigned 1 to 5 star rating Time sort by the time in the photo Photo Number sort by the assigned photo numbers Filename sort by the photo filename Full Pathname sort by the entire computer pathname File Size sort by file size Published sort by published and unpublished Archived sort by archived and unarchived Exif Comment sort by Exchangeable Image File information Sort by Custom manually click and drag photos to their positions 4 Select to sort photos by the previous criteria in either ascending or descending order To change photo viewing options 1 Select a catalog or photo group 2 Select View from the very top center of the software 3 Click to place a check next to a viewing selection Show Photo Filenames display all photo filename extensions beneath photos Show Photo Icons display tiny icons above photos indicating archive publish printed enhanced and hidden status o fm Printed o al Archived o E Enhanced o H Hidden from Publishing o E Published Show Photo Number display photo numbers bene
169. ed photos select Rename copied files a Select a file name prefix b Select a starting number c Select Reverse Chronological to rename photos starting with the last first Select Delete files after copying them if you want to permanently remove these files from this location after importing Select Copy All to copy all photos from the event or Selected to only copy the selected photos Creating Batch Orders Batch orders are used to print or order a large group of photos A batch order will create one large order containing the same size prints for a number of different photos These orders can save a lot of time during large scale portrait sittings such as school 134 Using Photo Library pictures or ID cards and as one large order they will be printed and ready at the same time To create a batch order l 2 Select any number of photos Select Batch from above the photo viewer A window appears Select to a Print only the selected photos b Print all photos in this event i If you selected to print all photos and have selected a catalog containing more than one event select Print all subevents to print every event in the catalog Select the prints to make for each photo a Select Add to add a print for each photo The available items are products and package groups you created and assigned here b Select Remove or Remove All to delete individual or all of the prints Select Print each photo with a
170. editing a border click border properties on the Border Workshop toolbar Border Properties x General Template or Border Name Description EA Filename Page Settings Page Size amp 10 Orientation Horizontal 9 Vertical Width 2400 Pixels Height 3000 Pixels Resolution 300 vy Pixels Per Inch Page Color Choose Back Layout Rotate 180 when printing Other Options Photo Orientation Use photo orientation zZ Option Dialogs Show text and option dialogs only when requested X Border Text Text fields default to last value used y Enter a descriptive name for the border This description will appear in the Borders menu when you select a border to apply to a photo If this is not a new border the border s filename appears in the Filename field Next select the page settings You can set a page color but in most instances the page will not be visible when the border is applied to a photo because the photo fills the border opening However if you make the photo a smaller size than the border opening the page color will show creating a photo mat look Back Layout There is an option to change the back layout Rotate 180 degrees when printing Checking this box will rotate the back of your border changing the bottom to the top 270 Tutorial Border Workshop and vice versa This option is useful for printing double sided objects
171. ee Checking In and Out Checking employees in and out will keep a record of who does what within the program A filled circle will appear under the IN column when an employee is checked in An empty circle implies the employee is scheduled but not checked in To check an employee in or out 1 Select Check In or Check Out from the Check In Out status column 2 Enter the account password for the employee This password is set in the employee info page 3 Select OK 4 A filled circle appears in the IN column if they have checked in successfully If the circle is empty they are not checked in 105 Using Your Studio Employee Details This is your employee s home page It keeps track of all their information and tasks and is where you can view and manage general info schedules notes and calls The right side of the window will always display the time and date of the event or information The following info will always be displayed Contact Info The left of the window will show the employee address phone number and email address Clicking the email address will open a new message to them in your default email program The employee status will also be listed here full time part time temporary or custom Tasks These are all currently assigned tasks for the employee Click on the name of a task to view or edit details Bookings These are all past and current bookings for a customer Click on the name of a booking
172. ee Rin 336 O EE 337 Rightelieking go ek A e no A Pane ee eee ee ents ree ene cece eee ee 337 Shortcut Keys and Special Text scscccccccsccccescaccccedcsccccescseccsedesscccedehecdsedesesdcedebestsetebess 339 Orders Workspace SHOMCUT Keita dd ad 339 Retouch Workshop Shortcut KOYS cccssssccccececsesessssececececsesensnseseeeeeceesesesssseeeeeeeesesensaeeeees 340 Photo Library ShortCcutKeyS ooooooccccccnnonononananonconononannanononoonononnnno no nnncorononnano no nnnnocoronannnnnnnanoss 34 Slideshow SHOMCUT REY Siccsissceccesetv sve diaiessBecee lev edbaaeae tac caved aad E E base R E AR 343 Presentation Mode Shortcut KEYS sccccccccecssssssnsccccececsensssnsacescecsessnsnsaeeseececsensnsaaeaeees 344 Photo Workshop ShortCutKeyS ccccsessssececececsesessnsececececeesenssseceeeeeceesenesseseeeeeeeesenenssaeeeees 346 Border Workshop Shortcut KOYS ccceessssecccececsesesssseceeececsesensnseseeeeeceesensnseseeeeeceesenensaaeeeees 349 HOME SHOMGCUEK EY Si di A AAA AA A 350 Inserting Special o NA 351 O EE E E 2s Seva tele dy oc aoe ann ae ba son Ss ps ance gv an 0c Re ws tains tu eens as eaves tetnuen wean eT 359 27 Getting Started Getting Started Studio Solution software combines the operations and functions of a professional working photo studio into a single easy to use and automated software Historically for the smooth operation of a working photo studio many different pieces of software would be require
173. elect A to have the paar ves software determine your backdrop color automatically Apia da It is important that customers do not wear the same color clothing as your backdrop as the drop out tools will completely remove any of that color from the photo Applying Presets The software comes with a variety of different preset options to simplify FR the drop out process Each preset will automatically change the rest of la presets the drop out settings in the toolset Select the lt or gt arrows to switch between presets or select presets to open a dropdown menu and select one from the list e Shadows Off Completely removes all shadows The shadows option is turned off and edge control is set to O e Shadows Off Method 2 removes all shadows The shadows option is turned on but the threshold is set to the maximum of 50 e Shadows Off Protect Hair removes shadows while not deleting stray hair The shadows option is turned on but the edge control is set to 30 e Default resets all drop out settings to the default Shadows are turned on and the threshold is set to 10 206 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets e Shadows On Remove Noise removes roughly 80 of shadows and extraneous noise The shadows option is turned on but the threshold is set to 12 e Shadows On Completely all shadows will appear The shadows option is turned on and the threshold is set to O You can select a preset and use the advanced control
174. elect Print Queue from the top of the Orders workspace b Select the Pending Jobs tab c Select the job you want to print d Select Resume Print Job from the left side of the window e Select return to the order page If the order has not resumed printing select Refresh from the top of the Orders Workspace 5 Select your job and select print order 307 Reference Reference So far this manual has listed all the tools and guides sorted by types This section will provide a quick reference for the more complicated workspaces in the software with screenshots and buttons listed by where they appear in your window with a brief description For detailed information on any button in the software you should use the Table of Contents or Index to locate the correct chapter for using that tool but if you re having trouble finding a button or an effect or just want to know what a button does continue reading Select a specific workspace to jump ahead to that section Photo Library Reference Shopping Cart Reference Orders Workspace Reference Presentation Mode Reference Photo Workshop Reference Border Workshop Reference For help with general reading every reference guide will start at the top of the software detailing the top most menu bar and will work down the page left to right Each menu on the screen will list brief descriptions of the functions contained 308 Reference Photo Library Photo
175. elect Show Cart or Hide Cart from the very top right of the software while in the Photo Library Photo Workshop or in Presentation Mode For a complete reference guide to the Shopping Cart including detailed screenshots and button locations go here Navigating the Cart The top of the shopping cart shows the default package group associated with this event You set your default packages here Below the package group is where all ordered items will appear as preview images 139 1 4x6 2 2 5x7s 3 8x10 4 wallets 5 8x10 and 5x7 6 4 4x5s 7 35mm 8 4 5x7s and 2 8x10s 9 2 4x s more gt place order save order Ordered Packages 18 00 2x 8x10 8 00 D 8x10 Print Services none add B 0 2x 4x6 10 00 copies 4x6 Print Services none Using Photo Library Select or to expand or collapse the images below an item Showing and Hiding Prices If a customer is present and you don t want to display the prices of your packages right click on any package or item and select Show Prices A checkmark indicates whether this option is active Viewing Package Groups All of your packages are located at the top of the shopping cart Your default package group is displayed for each event Only 9 items will be displayed at once to view additional items in this package group select More from the bottom of the package window in the cart Select Prev to return to the previous packages Changi
176. em To add photo data right click the graphic in the Photo Library and select Properties Click the Photo Data tab and click the Add Data button Using the background example enter a property of graphic and a value of background 297 Tutorial Border Workshop Picture Properties Add Photo Data Entes the new photo data properly Propesty graphic Value background Caca Photographer s Notes lt None gt When you add a graphic to a border template click the Lookup button to add a graphic variable There are predefined variables for background and logo graphics Use these if you have graphics in your catalogs with a property of graphic and a value of background or logo If you want to specify a variable for a graphic property of a different value choose Graphic from the graphic lookup menu and replace the question marks in the Graphic field with a value you use in your photo data When you apply the border to a photo the application looks in the catalog for the graphic having the value you specified in the variable and applies it to the border For example you want to create a border for membership ID cards Your catalogs contain a graphic with photo data of graphic idcard You want this border to use the graphic photo property of the value idcard so you choose Graphic from the graphic lookup menu and replace the question marks with idcard Your catalog contains an ID card graphic and its photo dat
177. er the FTP Address and FTP Port listed on the Cameras page in the software You must have Auto Detect Address checked for this option Once Login Method appears on your camera use either Anonymous or match the username and password that you entered on the Cameras page You must have Anonymous Username checked to login anonymously without a password Once Target Folder appears on your camera select Root Folder Complete the Wizard 10 Your WiFi camera is now ready A WiFi camera is essentially a tethered camera without a cable While you are using a WiFi camera you can press SPACE on your keyboard to automatically capture and import photos into the Photo Library or Photo Workshop For a detailed guide of capturing and importing photos go here Setting Up a Hot Folder You can set up a folder to automatically import all new photos added to that folder The software will continuously monitor this folder for any photos added by you or a camera To set up a hot folder JA In Local Folder browse to or type in the folder to monitor 61 Setting Up Your Network 2 You can automatically backup every photo to another directory for safekeeping If you want to backup your hot folder photos browse to or type in the backup location in Backup Folder 3 Select Apply Importing without a Camera To import without a camera you will need to connect the camera picture card external drive or browse to the folder containing
178. ered on top of one another Each graphic picture and text are on a different layer The objects on each layer can overlap objects on other layers Another analogy for this concept is paper cutouts laid on a page and arranged to make a design 254 Tutorial Border Workshop As the above illustration shows the border starts with a base layer of a solid color then layers are stacked on top of another to form a composite Each text image and graphic resides on its own layer The Border Workshop allows you to define border templates you can use repeatedly on photos in your catalog You can specify the number of photos you want to use on the page the graphic you want to use as the border the text you want to appear and effects you want to use 07 x border items Photo Photol E Effect COLOR COLOR 2 E Effect COLOR COLOR 2 E Effect COLOR COLOR 2 E Effect COLOR COLOR 2 Manage Studio Photo Library Photo Workshop Orders Client Presentation You can create your own graphics to use as borders and use the Border Workshop to add the border graphic to the template Or you can simply create new borders by editing borders you already have to make them more suited to your needs Note If you are creating your own graphic borders you need graphics software that can create targa files Targa files are graphic files that allow a photograph to show through a border by using an alpha cha
179. ers Add Booking 102 Add Call 104 Index Add Note 103 Adding 88 Details Page 100 Setting Up 88 Desktop 114 Drop Out Toolset 205 drop shadow 277 283 285 edit add barcode 261 Edit amp Proofing 154 effects on borders 288 Employees Adding 87 Adding Notes 107 Adding Shifts 107 Adding Tasks 107 Details Page 105 Setting Up 84 Enhance Toolset 185 Exposure 194 fill amp fit tool 292 361 Finding Photos 126 Fit to Page 296 Focus 193 font tool 292 Front vs Back 167 Fulfillment Options 44 graphic lookup 297 graphics on borders 284 Help 28 Hiding Photos 127 Histograms 130 Home Page 92 Hue Percent 207 image cells 272 Image Preview Settings 44 Importing Photos 173 Installation 30 Before installing 31 Operating Reas 30 Inventory Setting Up 82 Index Updating 84 labels on composite borders 283 Labtricity 46 Login 32 Logging in as an Employee 33 Logging into Photoreflect 33 lookup 297 make same tool 293 masks on border effects 275 289 Music 163 Network Options 48 Client Computer 53 Server Computer 51 Single Computer 50 Typical Setups 48 order tool 294 Orders Batching Orders 151 Finding Orders 148 Managing Orders 146 362 Printing 149 Printing an Order Proof 152 Printing to CD 149 Viewing Older Orders 148 Orienting Photos 132 Overview 34 Pan 296 Password Setting an Admin PW 32 Permissions 85 Photo Groups
180. essesecsesaeeeenesaeeess 222 Adding a Graphic hemden A et Se es 223 ACIGING TEXT A a e e actu do o 224 ACOING OR EHECT wc i nila ce tie Beaker ie lah cies ei Alcs its abe alas el AN 225 Adding a Custom SHOPS s 2 ccs2eeccsdanheess cacecsseedseseddaveeeadaeasccecsasedceeebndedlbacenchsetiiedecetiescudebuesstchieesiecetbessnceness 226 AGING Ko NE a1 a a E Se AE a nc in ee a Ss oes 227 AGING G BOrCO dE heidi e Baie e cede e en Seeks 227 Using Photo Queries A mis crUany ier trener esr reir 228 Using the REtOUCEAWOrkShHOD aa aaa 230 Navigating THE Retouch Workshop aaa 230 RANIA A O E TALAR 231 o E EEE EA ET 231 Fitting th PAGE enraiar A O Ee i iino 231 20 Table of Contents MIEWINGZORACIUGISIZGs s r eres tere dee io OS dere a Mi e toon peek bbe cdr el es 231 Before RETOUCHING ta tits 231 ADP IYINGANO REMOVING 22sec keds oe ees ean ee ne ene eit Ne ee E 231 SAVING REIOUCHES 22 a Anon RAGA Ge Gude do GAA au GE Alea o 232 Understanding the Retouch Settings dia 232 OPI A EE EEEE EAEE EEEE E EEEE EEA SE Fas 232 CHOOSE SOULCE e pre a E EA E a e ea A a Se Adalid ds 232 VIZE sy te E EE A E E a a a 2 232 oi EE E A S E E ana 232 A NN 232 Healing Ele de do alessio ck thes Oo anoles 3 233 SOOM ae as entree eee E A E NN RON RN 233 AO iia A A AA AA a 233 Nc RON 233 RG Bi atole li o rd dle E le el 233 EVE GIO DDE A NN 233 CE ii E ea 233 BIE a e do e DO 233 USING TNE Retouch Method S a o A aa 233 BUS e teases venepshous E E E E 234 A NN 234
181. estart your computer before this takes effect b For Windows Vista The Network and Sharing Center window appears Turn On the following options Network discovery File sharing Public folder sharing and Printer sharing Select X to exit this window when finished c You may also want to disable User Account Control UAC in Vista to eliminate recurring password and permission prompts To do this i Open the Control Panel and under User Account and Family Safety select Add or remove user accounts ii Select Go to the main User Accounts page and select Change security settings iii Click to Unselect the box next to Use UAC to help protect your computer iv Select OK UAC is now disabled 6 You will need to share the photo folder in Windows so that the client stations can access the photos on this computer Select Share Photo Folder 52 Setting Up Your Network a For Windows XP Select the Sharing tab and select Share this folder on the network The Share Name should be Photos Select Allow network users to change my files Select Apply Select OK b For Windows Vista Once you have enabled File Sharing the Photos folder is automatically shared as a subfolder If you wish to share the folder manually you can disable sharing of public folders and enable sharing specifically on your photos folder only by right clicking on it and selecting Share and allowing all users on your network 7 If you are running a firewall
182. este 98 Adding Not es t6 Calendarlems ics ets se atin een ee alc ie ete SE ae eee ee 99 Moving Editing and Deleting Calendar IHOMS ccssccccessssceeescecesssececseseceessccecsesaesecsesaeessseeeecseaeeecseaaeeess 100 CU ed eee 100 Customer Detalla td di eal etait mek 100 Add A CUSTOM A e do o cet 102 lae NNa ROKETI A EEA A A Bd oda te at 102 ACGING A BOOKING iii iii 102 AN e E 103 Adding a EM A iaa 104 EMPIO YE EST o acia 105 CHECKINGAN and DU A ee 105 Employee DETONS iii da 106 FOIING ON EMPIOVEe td O Ma like ade E eS ehh e bie fl Men TE 106 AGING ko MIS N cuan dida 107 AMIGA NS A SEAS SA A eco SR AAS cA ees 107 Table of Contents RAMAS a estate tevatha a a te seateccests 107 Printing A SCHEGUIC AAA ON 108 REPO Si a ais Pot RA A 109 EMPIOY ES ACTIVITY cope Aa NE GE Sa E SSL DITA OER IIE ERENCES 110 EMpIOYee AcM EXP OMT e id sa VeNUENda Ld dsSbebiehn E E RE veeBeveavies 110 EMPlOVEC EXDOM a ato 110 EMPIOVEES CHEGUIES asia in ate ds cbc 111 Employee Schedules ExpPOlT cccceccccccecessessscecececsenessscecececsenessecececseneeseeeeeceesesnsaeeeeeceeseuaaeseesesesenssaeeeeeeeeees 111 AI AAA eiin i Eb iier rie Sr k o Erei Sk o Er Eis ek eiiie ie Erebi o ine riei 111 Empl yee Categories EXPO ic A a a ene 111 Orders SUMMOTY EXPO a A EE A IS A A E 111 Rackage EXPO Maita een e rs Mi arian th ten o E re O o rl te as a a 111 Rackage and ProdUGIS c se ha acne es nee ne ee 111 PIOGUGCTS D 1O A EE cin Rai e aaa 112 NONA E Lee AE T
183. event add a photo group to the selected event o Add Photo Catalog add a photo catalog to the selected catalog type o Add Portfolio create a portfolio for using on your online storefront Right clicking a Photo Remove Photo delete the selected photo Rename Photo change the name of the selected photo Describe Photo assign a description to identify the photo Hide from Publishing do not publish the selected photo when publishing the catalog Rename Photo rename selected photo Orient Photo options listed here Rate Photo assign a 1 to 5 star rating to selected photo Orient Photo select the photos orientation Describe Photo add photographer note to selected photo Service Notes Service Notes view and edit services to be applied to selected photo Edit Shipping Info view and edit billing and shipping information for customer Select All select all photos in the catalog Deselect All deselect all photos in the catalog Refresh refresh photos in the catalog Open Containing Folder open and view the location containing the selected photo Copy Path to Clipboard copy the folder location of the selected photo to the clipboard Properties view and edit photo properties notes and data 333 Reference Border Workshop Border Workshop Reference Find the Border Workshop by navigating to Manage Studio gt Products gt Templates and Composites and selecting New Template or Edit Template from the bottom
184. ey e Rotate Counter Clockwise rotate the photo 90 counter clockwise Press SHIFT O as a hotkey e Flip flip the photo 180 e Set Crop Orientation this determines how the image will be cropped to fit on the photo Select Auto to let the software decide on a per photo basis or select Vertical or Horizontal e Set Default Orientation this determines how photos are automatically oriented Select No Default Orientation to let the software decide on a per photo basis 132 Using Photo Library e Set Tilt Angle enter a number between 0 and 360 and select to rotate clockwise or counter clockwise You can also orient photos by selecting any number of photos and right clicking on them Select Orient Photo which contains all the previous options Enhancing Photos To enhance a photo select any number of photos and select Enhance from above the photo viewer The Photo Workshop will open with these photos You can also double click a photo to enter the Photo Workshop and edit any photos from the event Click here for information on using the Photo Workshop Previewing Photos To preview the event photos full screen select a photo and select Preview from above the photo viewer The software will switch to Presentation Mode where you can run slideshows play music and view the photo with different frames Click here for detailed options during full screen Presentation Mode Publishing Photos To publish a photo 1 Do not
185. eye 197 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets Using EOS Picture Styles Toolset picture style v The EOS Picture Style Toolset includes tools for adjusting light and exposure ON setting specific to Canon RAW files et yd Nro The EOS Picture Style Toolset options are in order picture style contrast exposure v exposure sharpness saturation color tone filter effect and tone effect neo sharpness v Adjusting EOS Picture Styles an Choosing a Picture Style is like choosing between different types of film There MA are six different initial Picture Style settings each with a different look and El feel Picture Styles create consistent repeatable color contrast saturation ad and sharpening The Picture Styles are also user adjustable for critical and filter effect y unique results Start by selecting a Picture Style just as you would a film type tone effect v Standard The Standard Picture Style is set to produce the vivid colors and contrast level that people tend to prefer for general photographic subjects It provides the optimal sharpness for printing image without post processing and makes it possible to produce beautifully finished prints for a broad array of subjects from snapshots to sports shooting with no retouching The Standara Picture Style is the default Picture Style setting for all present EOS DIGITAL lineups Color uniformity is ensured even if the model changes Portrait People are one of the
186. ffect paste o Brightness Color Darken Duotone Duotone Color Grayscale Invert RGB Negate RGB Overlay Sepia delete 336 Reference Border Workshop Saturation Watermark Antique Blur Duplicate copy and paste an exact duplicate of the item including item description Cut copy an item to the clipboard and delete it Copy copy an item to the clipboard Paste paste the current item from the clipboard Delete delete the current item Right Toolbar Item Properties view and edit properties for selected item Font view and edit font for selected item Fill amp Fit Page fit selected item to page edges Make Same copy properties of another item Center center item to page Align align item edges to another item Space space three or more items evenly Order send an item back or bring an item forward in layers Rotate rotate an item Select selection mode for clicking items Pan pan mode for examining items Zoom zoom mode for zooming in and out Fit Page zoom the current border to the page size Actual Size view the current border in actual pixels item properties font F fit page same y r align space y val order y hr rotate y e Test Form enter test text fields and queries that will appear when the border is applied Right clicking an Item Properties view and edit properties for selected item Lock Object lock object so it cannot be sel
187. front You must be logged into your PhotoReflect account for this selection to be active 5 If you want to have the option of quickly adding last minute print items to orders in the Shopping Cart select to show the Add Lab Print Items and or the Add Local Print Items options 6 Select OK 7 You will be prompted to add package item to this group Select the type and quantities of the items you would like to offer to your customers Select Cancel to add packages later or read the following sections Editing a Package Group To edit a package group select Edit Package Group near the bottom of the window to change the selected package group settings To delete a package group select Delete Package Group to remove it You must always have at least one package group available for use Make Default Edit Package Group Delete Package Group Add Product Expand All Collapse All Manage Studio Photo Library Photo Workshop Orders Adding Packages Packages are subgroups of package groups that can contain any number of individual items for sale for one total price To create a package 1 Select the package group you wish to add the package to 2 Select Add Product from the options near the bottom of the Products window A prompt appears 3 Entera package name and a price This is the total price of every product included in the package 4 Select Discount Pricing if you want to create a volume discount Volume
188. ghtness and exposure Canon Picture Styles will be made available when Canon RAW files are selected for editing Color Balance This is for selecting or setting a color profile and adjusting white balance Drop Out This is for editing and applying green screen effects View This is what the photo will look like if printed as is Orders Here you will view manage and print all orders created in the Shopping Cart There are three tabs New Orders Pending Orders and Completed Orders Order details appear below the queues 37 Overview STUDIO SOLUTION 07x New Orders Pending Orders Completed Orders Auto Print Print Queue View y Refresh Order ID Type Customer Order Time Status Status Time Age Payment Fulfilment L2WMJ UEBCH Local North Basketball 5 28 2009 9 10 2 Saved None 5 days old 9 00 Print Locally L2WMJ UEBCHSS Local North Basketball 5 26 2009 2 05 0 Lof 2 Printed 5 26 2009 2 42 5 7 days old 9 00 Print Locally L2WMJ UEBCZOE Local North Basketball 5 28 2009 9 19 5 1of 2 Printed 5 28 2009 9 20 5 5 days old 9 00 Print Locally Cl i t l t t i This option will only become available within the Photo Library and Photo Workshop and will change the appearance of the software into a customer friendly presentation tool complete with ratings comparisons music and a slideshow The Shopping Cart will be available during this mode for creating orders XA Smith Nicole Y Nic
189. he correct toolset includes tools for adjusting basic light and exposure settings To open the correct toolset select the Correct tab from the bottom of the Photo Workshop workspace The correct tools will appear either to the right or below the workspace Enhance toolset options are in order Contrast Exposure Shadows Color Tone and Redeye It is recommended that you color balance photos before adjusting light and exposure if necessary Click here for a guide on color balance GADE HES HEG var cool M E contrast v exposure shadows color tone redeye 194 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets Saving Changes The software will not save correction settings for a photo if you select another photo To save your settings for a photo use the save options detailed here Steps to Correcting Here is our recommended order for correcting photos 1 Exposure Shadows Color Contrast Redeye SS m e YR Tone Saving Attributes All of your correction settings can be saved and applied to any number of other photos and catalogs Click here for a guide to saving and applying attributes Adjusting Contrast Adjusting the contrast will lighten the light colors and darken the dark colors AJA contrast Contrast options include e Select to increase the contrast by 1 point e Select to decrease the contrast by 1 point e Select the box to reset the contrast to 0 e Select A to have the software use the pho
190. he different types of reports Employee Activity This report will display all activity for a specific employee with times dates and descriptions for e Bookings e Calls e Tasks e Schedules Employee Activity Export This report will generate a comma separated value CSV file that lists and details all activity for a specific employee This file can be used in any data management program that accepts csv files Select Save after the report is generated you cannot print this report Employee Export This report will generate a comma separated value CSV file that includes all studio employees This file can be used in any data management program that accepts csv files Select Save after the report is generated you cannot print this report 110 Using Your Studio Employee Schedules This report will display a list of all employee schedules with times dates and descriptions for all their activities Employee Schedules Export This report will generate a comma separated value CSV file that includes all studio employee schedules This file can be used in any data management program that accepts csv files Select Save after the report is generated you cannot print this report Event Categories This report will display all event activity for your studio with times dates and descriptions for e All Bookings e All Employee Schedules e All Calls e All Employee Tasks Employee Categories Export This report will gene
191. he grid Select Snap to Grid to have items snap to grid lines when moved Select the Grid Units inches pixels cm or mm Select the size of your grid Select OK a Oe PA N 213 Using Border Workshop Select Options and select Auto Alignment to display guiding lines to help when trying to line up border items Viewing Test Photos You can import any photo into a photo placeholder to preview the border To assign a test photo right click any photo item and select Set Test Photo from the dropdown menu To clear the photo right click the photo item and select Clear Test Photo Viewing Test Forms You can preview all photo queries and textbox prompts that will appear when the border is applied to a photo To preview text fields select test form from the right toolbar Text Fields DK Cancel Reset Editing Items in the Border Workshop Basic Editing Tools For basic editing options select an option from the left toolbar or select Edit from the top of the software and select an option duplicate e Duplicate or CTRL D copy and paste an exact duplicate of the item including item description cut e Cutor CTRL X copy an item to the clipboard and delete it copy e Copy or CTRL C copy an item to the clipboard paste e Paste or CTRL V paste the current item from the clipboard delete e Delete or DEL delete the current item To undo or redo an action select Undo or Redo from the
192. he order will be saved to the CD Ship or deliver the CD 149 Using Orders Workspace Reprinting Orders You can reprint orders that have already been fulfilled To reprint an order go to the Completed Orders tab and select an order then select print order from the bottom of the software or right click the order and select Print Order You will be prompted to confirm that you wish to print a copy of this order Viewing the Print Queue You can monitor and edit the printing status of any local orders that have been sent to print Select Print Queue from the very top of the screen to view and edit the print queue Select the Pending Jobs or Completed Jobs tab to see all pending and completed jobs with a preview status and start time The bottom of the queue shows how many jobs are in the queue and the number of printers available and currently in use Select return to the order page at any time to leave the print queue Select an option from the left side of the window to modify a pending print job e Delete Print Job remove selected print job from the queue e Suspend Print Job temporarily stop selected print job e Resume Print Job resume the selected suspended print job e Restart Print Job restart selected print job from the beginning e Reprint Archived Job find and reprint an old print job e Scan for Printers search for available printers To move a job up or down in the queue select a job and select an option f
193. he same size The Border Workshop menu also provides a way for users to change the grid settings The second feature available in the Options menu is Grid Options When a user selects this function the Snap Grid window will appear 267 Tutorial Border Workshop Snap Grid Grid Options v Display Grid M Snap to Grid Grid Units Inch 10 a4 Grid Units per Inch Cancel Studio Solution users have several options in this window First the photographer can opt to display the grid when it is activated This option is set to default as activated To deactivate the option click on the checkmark to make it disappear The second option allows the user to make items Snap to Grid This means that when photographer moves an object or photo around the border palate the object will line up directly on the grid lines This means that the object or photos will snap to the visible grid line as the photos are moves around The application will pick the nearest grid line The third option allows the user to change the grid units There are four units available in the drop down menu These include inch pixel centimeter cm and millimeter mm Finally users can change the number of grid units per inch This allows the user to move the grid dots to represent a larger size It is possible to activate this option by selecting a shortcut key The keys assigned to this operation are C
194. his computer e Printers are directly connected to this station e Clients can access the photos stored in this station e Clients can access data stored in this station e Clients can send print requests to this station To set this computer as the Server Computer 1 Click Server Computer on the left side of the screen so that a check appears 2 Select a Photos Folder This is automatically selected and it is rare that you would need to change it If you do so you will need to manually copy the existing folder contents 3 Select a Database This is also automatically selected If you change it the database will need to be migrated to the new location Photos Folder C Documents and Settings All Users Docum Browse Folders Database Connection Select Database Setting Up Your Network 4 Notice the Server Name IP Address and Workgroup When setting up a client you will need to confirm these identifiers to ensure you are connected to the correct server Server Name BLUE IP Address 192 168 1 2 Workgroup MSHOME 5 You will need to enable file sharing in Windows so that the client stations can access the photos and data on this computer Select Enable File Sharing Enable File Sharing Share Photo Folder Disable Firewall Click this buttons to view the clients currently attached to this server View Clients a For Windows XP Follow the Network Setup Wizard to enable file sharing on your network You will need to r
195. hopping cart Service Notes view and edit services to be applied to selected photo Edit Shipping Info view and edit billing and shipping information for customer Change Media change the printing media for the selected item Change Print Commands change the printing instructions for the selected item Open Containing Folder open and view the location containing the selected photo Copy Path to Clipboard copy the folder location of the selected photo to the clipboard 32 Reference Orders Workspace Orders Workspace Reference Find the Orders Workspace by clicking the Orders tab at the bottom of the software Payment L2WMI UEBCZOE Local North Basketball 5 28 2009 9 19 5 1 of 2 Printed 5 28 2009 9 20 5 T Print Locally Customer Information Order LAWMJ UEBCHQZ_1 Shipping Information North Basketball Recieved 5 28 2009 North Basketball Austin TX Austin TX Shipping Method Standard Packages amp Prints Quantity Photos amp Details Fulfilment Package 4 4x5s 6 00 1 4 4x5 Prints 1 x sample data 20020415 ed_0005 sport2 jpg Print Locally Package 35mm 3 00 1 35mm Side 1 xc sample data 20020415 ed_0005 sport jog Print Locally Below are the menus for the Orders Workspace The menus in the New Orders Pending Orders and Completed Orders tab are identical Click a specific menu to jump ahead to that section 322 Top Menu Bottom Menu Right clicking an O
196. hotkey Flip flip the photo 180 Set Crop Orientation this determines how the image will be cropped to fit on the photo Select Auto to let the software decide on a per photo basis or select Vertical or Horizontal Set Default Orientation this determines how photos are automatically oriented Select No Default Orientation to let the software decide on a per photo basis 183 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets e Set Tilt Angle enter a number between 0 and 360 and select to rotate clockwise or counter clockwise e Advanced Tilt for manually creating a tilt angle Click and drag either the photo or the scroll bar to adjust the tilt angle Using advanced tilt can change the size of your image as the frame will crop to eliminate blank space Select apply changes to save your tilt Scroll to the bar below or drag the picture to adjust the tilt angle Current 12 27 degrees schon Zooming Zooming in or out on a photo does not change the size of the photo It changes the size of the image viewed on your monitor Use zooming for editing small features and retouching Basic zoom options include e Select an aspect ratio around the zoom tool to zoom in that amount or select Zoom and select one from the list o 1 1 Actual Size represents the actual size of the image pixel for pixel Press Z as a hotkey 184 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets o 2x Represents an image 200 larger than the image size displayed in the wi
197. hoto which contains the previous options Removing Photos To remove a photo from the catalog 1 Select any number of photos Select Photos from the very top center of the software 2 3 Select Remove Photo 4 Confirm that you want to remove the photo 5 Select Delete the picture file s as well if you want to permanently delete the photo 6 Select Yes 126 Using Photo Library You can also right click on any number of selected photos and select Remove Photo Hiding Photos from Publishing Catalogs are usually published all at once If you want to keep a photo in the catalog and photo viewer but don t want it to be published with the rest of the photos you can hide it from publishing To hide a photo from publishing 1 Select any number of photos Select Photos from the very top center of the software Select Hide from Photo s Confirm that you do not want this photo published on your storefront Select Yes 9 PB eis A small P with an X through it will appear in the upper right of the photo This shows that the photo will be hidden from all publishing To unhide a photo from publishing select any number of hidden photos and follow the previous options You can also hide and unhide photos by right clicking on any number of photos and selecting Hide Photo s Rating Photos Every photo can be assigned a 1 to 5 star rating These ratings can signify either your favorite photos or the
198. hoto data and queries click here Orders Workspace Shortcut Keys CTRLF Find Order F10 Photo Library Tab P Print Order F11 Photo Workshop Tab CTRLP Print To CD F2 Find Order ALT P Print All Orders F5 New Orders Tab SHIFT P Print Order Form Q Print Queue F6 Pending Orders Tab 339 Shortcut Keys Orders Workspace and Retouch Workshop Mark Order Shipped Completed Orders Tab DELETE Delete Order F9 Manage Studio Tab ESCAPE Cancel Print RETURN Edit and Proof Order Retouch Workshop Shortcut Keys A PA Page Up Zoom Out Decrease Brush Size Page Down Zoom In Increase Brush Size CTRL Y Redo Increase Feather CTRL Z Undo Decrease Feather 340 Photo Library Shortcut Keys Shortcut Keys Photo Library View More Photos Decrease j 3 UN V Vertical Portrait Orientation thumbnail size View Less Photos Increase thumbnail i DELETE Remove Photo size Paste Photo Attributes from the 0 Order A La Carte item DIVIDE Clipboard 1 Add Package 1 to Cart F1 Find Photo Catalog 2 Add Package 2 to Cart F9 Home 3 Add Package 3 to Cart F11 Photo Workshop Tab 4 Add Package 4 to Cart F12 Orders Tab 5 Add Package 5 to Cart F2 Find Photos 6 Add Package 6 to Cart F3 Find Next Photo 7 Add Package 7 to Cart Shift F3 Find Previous Photo 8 Add Package 8 to Cart F5 Refresh 9
199. ht 2006 COPYRIGHT This option will print the customer name in the format Last First Initial Middle Initial ThompsonRL CUSTOMERABBREVNAME This option will print the customer s complete address 123 Main Street Suite 100 Austin TX 78746 CUSTOMERADDRESS This option will print the first line of the customer address This is usually the street address 123 Main Street CUSTOMERADDRESS1 This option will print the second line of the customer address This is usually the suite apartment or building number Suite 100 CUSTOMERADDRESS2 This option will print the city name of the customer address Austin CUSTOMERCITY This option will print the city name state abbreviation and zip code It will print in this format City State Zip Code Austin TX 78746 CUSTOMERCITYSTATEZIP a This option will print the country of residence of the customer United States 351 Inserting Special Text fee see NA CUSTOMEREMAIL CUSTOMERFIRSTLAST CUSTOMERLASTFIRST CUSTOMERNAME CUSTOMERPHONE CUSTOMERSHIPADDRESS CUSTOMERSHIPADDRESS1 CUSTOMERSHIPADDRESS2 CUSTOMERSHIPCITY CUSTOMERSHIPCITYSTATEZIP CUSTOMERSHIPCOMPANY This option will print the customer email address customer company com This option will print the customer name in the format First Middle Initial Last Rebekah L Thompson This option will print the customer name in the format Last First Middle Initial Thompson
200. ic Lists or press ALT E as a hotkey 3 Select your graphics 191 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets Saving Borders You can save a border after editing it in any way To replace the border with your border changes select borders from the border tool and select Save Border To save your border changes as a new border leaving the original border intact 1 Select borders from the border tool Select Save as New Border A window appears Select the filename and location for the new border Select a description Select which border group to add the new border to Select OK ES AO Cropping Photos You can quickly crop a photo down to a specific photo aspect int To crop the current photo to an aspect ratio sheets v 1 Select a photo 2 Select the sheets tool fo open a dropdown menu 3 Select an aspect ratio to crop the photo to a The aspect ratios listed can be set up here Creating a Composite Sheet You can quickly create a composite sheet of multiple photos on one sheet size To create a composite sheet 1 Select the sheets tool to open a dropdown menu 2 Select Composite Sheet A window appears 3 Select the sheet size Select Custom from the dropdown menu to enter a custom Width and Height in inches 192 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets 4 Select to arrange the sheet as a portrait or landscape 5 Select the cell arrangement a Specify by the Width and Height to create photo sizes of that s
201. ick a photo and select View gt Show Info Tooltip To set a note for a photo right click a photo in the photo bar and select Edit Photo gt Describe Photo Type a note and select OK Showing Photo Properties To show and edit photo properties right click a photo in the photo bar and select Properties Click here detailed information on photo properties Showing Photo Histograms and Data To show technical photo data select Show Data from the top right of the software The following information will be shown on the right side of the workspace e Filename e Photo Histogram e Photo Notes e Capture Date e EXIF Data e Photo Rating nei e Editing Software e Photo Number s C apiure e ISO Info Resolution e Flash Settings e Capture Select Click to Add under photo data to add photographer notes to this photo Select Hide Data from the top left of the software if you do not want to display photo data Importing Photos You can automatically import photos into the workshop by opening a catalog in the Photo Library and selecting the Photo Workshop tab from the bottom of the software The selected catalog will automatically open in the Photo Workshop 173 Using Photo Workshop Importing a Photo To import a photo into the current catalog l Select Photos from the top of the software 2 Select Import A window appears 3 4 Browse to the location of the photos you wish to import Select any number of photos by holdi
202. if you want to associate relatives of the customer with this account Enter the relative information and select Add Family Member 5 Select Save Customer S Customer Information First Name Nicole Last Smith Middle Address 1304 Broadway City Ann Arbor State Provice MI Postal Code 48104 Phone Number 456 2203 Alternate Numi ber Family Members Name m No family members listed Editing a Customer Select Edit Customer from the bottom of the window to edit any customer information Select Delete Customer to remove them Q Edit Customer Tff Delete Customer N Add Booking SJ Add Notes g Add Call Adding a Booking To add a booking from the customer details page 1 Select Add Booking from the bottom of the window 2 Choose a date starting time and end time for the event 3 Enter a name for the event You must enter a name 4 Enter a description for the event 102 9 Using Your Studio Update or add a status to the event Examples booked completed complete no show Choose or add a room for the event If you want to automatically add a confirmation call for this event to your calendor select Add a reminder call to the calendar for this booking This call will appear on the calendar scheduled 24 hours prior to the event Assign an employee or multiple employees to the event If you need to add or edit an existing employee read the previous section on setting up employees Se
203. ill require you to first select an area of the photo Select choose source and select an area in the photo Size Select your brush or method size Feather Feather is the gradient applied to the edge of you tool to soften edges A higher feather is a softer and more gradual edge Flow Flow is the percentage of pixels in the area that will receive the retouch A higher flow applies the retouch to more pixels in the area 232 Using Retouch Workshop Healing Effect Selecting and checking healing effect will let you select a specific area of the photo to use when blending This setting is only available with the blemish tool Color Select the color to be applied Amount Select the intensity of an effect A higher number is more intense Radius Select the size of the radius for blurring photos RGB Select an exact color with the RGB profile tools Eyedropper Select the eyedropper and click on an area of the photo to save the RGB values in the RGB profile Contrast Adjust the contrast A higher contrast darkens the darks and lightens the lights Brightness Adjust the brightness A higher number is brighter Using the Retouch Methods Retouch methods determine how your selected tool will be applied Think of the retouch tools as paint and the methods as different sizes of paintbrushes Select your retouch method from the right toolbar 233 Using Retouch Workshop Brush This is the default softw
204. ily relations and birthdays Reporting 28 Getting Started Create pricing packages and templates Wireless FTP capture Tethered capture Quick import via memory card or disk Image archiving Speedy creation of professional proof sheets and online galleries Unique borders templates and composites Apply graphic templates turning photos into profitable products Unique slide shows Nesting and load sharing Built in Canon printer color management Retouch photos in the Studio Solution retouch module or Adobe Photoshop Integrated Picture Styles for RAW editing Send orders electronically to professional labs with Labtricity Green screen shooting and editing Reading the Manual We re here to help The manual is designed not just to tell you where buttons are located but with tutorials on how to perform every necessary task within the software Although you can easily move around the manual with links depending on your experience with the software you might want to jump ahead right away Setting Up Start at the beginning We ll guide you through setting up your studio piece by piece in the right order No jumping around or missing important options Click here to start setting up Using the Software If you don t need to worry about setting things up you can jump ahead and start learning about using the software Click here to start using the software 2
205. ing items uantity Purchased Juantity On Hand Used Item Information Enter a description or reason the item was used Big mess in studio 3 Quantity Used 18 Date Used 6 3 2009 as Save Item Cancel Employee Setup Any person using the software can be set up as an employee This will allow the Administrator to manage the time of every employee Each employee can have their own login schedule permissions and can be assigned tasks and bookings 84 Setting Up Your Studio Find the employee options in Manage Studio gt Employees Studio Employees Tol iN Employee Name Role Next Schedule Check In Out 9 Yaz Akrout yakrout Photographer NA Check Out Nicole Riddle Nriddle Manager NA Check I Adding a User Role We will begin with creating user roles because each employee will need to be assigned one during the employee creation process User roles determine which parts of the software the employee can access For instance a manager will probably be given access to every part of the software while an entry level sales or photographer will probably not be given access to system settings inventory or networking options To add a user role 1 Select Edit Roles from the right side of the window 2 Alist appears of existing user roles Select one of these roles to edit or select New Role to add one 3 Enter or edit the Role Name 4 Set the permissions to determine which features of the software this
206. ing method select the Edit or Delete options on the right Handling Cost Handling costs are optional fees that can be charge to each order A single cost will be applied to all orders To add a Handling Cost enter an amount then select Save Handling at the bottom of the page Tax Information You will need to set up tax information for your studio Find these options in Manage Studio gt Products gt Tax Information Note Make sure all client stations are closed prior fo making any changes to Tax Information The clients will automatically update upon launch Local Order Sales Tax If you wish to automatically charge sales tax for orders created on this computer enter the sales tax rate 80 Setting Up Your Products Shipping and Handling Tax Most states and provinces charge sales tax on shipping and handling By default the software will charge sales tax on shipping and handling Note You must check the box if you do not want to charge the local fax rate for shipping and handling on your local orders 81 Setting Up Your Studio Setting Up Your Studio Now that the software is set up and you have products ready to go it s time to prepare your studio for business We ll start by adding users vendors and customers to your database Vendors and Inventory Running a studio can require a lot of materials Setting up your vendors and inventory will help you keep track of all your supp
207. is necessary if you are running the software on more than one computer The client can access all of the photos and data on the server computer and is typically used as a sales station capture station retouch station or reception station The Server Computer must be set up before the Client Computers A client computer means that This computer will be used on a network All photos and data will be stored on the server computer All print requests will be sent to the server computer To set up a Client Computer l 2 Click Client Computer on the left side of the screen so that a check appears Verify that the Server Name IP Address and Workgroup are pointed at the correct server Print Server Status Not Connected Server Photos Folder Not Con Database Connection Not C ed Automatically detect the server computer Test Server Manually specify the computer name of the server computer The default is to automatically detect the server computer If you wish to connect to the server computer manually select Manually specify the computer name of the server computer and enter the computer address Select Test Server to test the connection If the connection fails you will need to check your network connections and settings If all connections are working select Apply Check the Print Server Status Server Photos Folder and Database Connection These should all show Connected If they show Not Connected
208. is on is very important In this example if the effect were on top of all other layers all photos would be grayscale To add an effect click add effect on the toolbar The Effect Object window appears Select the effect you want to use Transparency Options Select the transparency option If you do not want any special transparency effect select None If you want to create effects where a section is masked off so the effect is not applied select Pre defined Mask and select a mask you want to apply You can create your own masks if you want a transparent shape that is not available in the pre defined masks For example you might want to create a color mat effect with a cut out as in the example below 289 Tutorial Border Workshop To create a custom mask effect you must first create a graphic file that contains the shape you want to be masked from the effect On the Choose Mask window check the Custom Mask checkbox and browse for your mask file The mat effect above uses the Color effect and the following mask JPG file 290 Tutorial Border Workshop The inner shape is the area masked from the effect When you add the mask file to the effect the effect is applied only to the area outside the mask area The default color for the outer edge of a mask file is white Had the color effect not been applied the non transparent portion of the mask would be white See the mask example in the Adding Photo Placeholder
209. ished in the future Publish an event with no photos and customers will at least know they are looking in the right place and can return later when the photos are available Unpublishing Catalogs To remove a catalog from your online storefront 1 Select the catalog you want to Unpublish 2 Select Catalogs located at the very top left of the software 118 Using Photo Library 3 Select UnPublish Catalog 4 Confirm that you want to unpublish the catalog 5 Select Yes You can also unpublish a catalog by right clicking on it and selecting UnPublish Catalog which contains all of the previous options Batch Publishing and Unpublishing Catalogs To publish or unpublish more than one event at a time select a catalog or group containing more than one event or photo group and follow the previous steps Select which events you want to publish or unpublish and select Publish or Unpublish Archiving Catalogs Archiving catalogs will backup your catalogs data folders and photos to another location You can archive to CDs external hard drives networks or any computer location big enough to hold the information Archiving can also open up space on your current computer making it faster to use and easier to navigate You can archive individual photo groups or entire catalogs To archive a catalog 1 Select the catalog or photo group you want to archive 2 Select Catalogs located at the very top left of the software 3 Se
210. it amp Delete Role Sales A Sales role can be given all permissions with the exception of any management related tasks These roles are only suggestions and can be named and assigned any permission that can work in your studio Adding an Employee Now that we have created or updated a user role we can add some employees to your studio From Manage Studio gt Employees you can view a list of all existing employees their roles schedules and an option to sign them in Let s start with creating an employee To add an employee l 2 Select New Employee from the right side of the window Enter the employee s name an employee ID or internal username and an optional password they will use to check in and out of the software Select a Studio Role for the employee Select Edit Roles to edit or create a new role following the steps in the previous section Select a status for this employee Select Add Status to create a new one Enter the employee contact information Select Save 87 Setting Up Your Studio You will be taken back to the employee list Click on an employee s name to see the employee details Here you will find the employee s home page complete with contact information notes schedule and all assigned tasks You will learn more about these options later Editing an Employee Select an employee s name from the list to enter their home page Select Edit Employee from the bottom of the wind
211. it Sitting Enter Description This is a test booking for a tutorial Update Status Booked M Add Status Renar Choose Room Studio M Add Room Rena Schedule Call Y Add a reminder call to the calendar for this booking Assign Employee s Unassigned Assign Employee If you will not be the employee handling the booking you can assign another employee to handle the shoot by selecting Assign Employee 240 Tutorial Running a Shoot e Select Save Booking You will be returned to the customer details page Your new booking will appear under the Current Bookings column Wey Test Customer Current Bookings 123 Road e Portrait Sitting 6 3 2009 7 15 AM Austin TX Previous Bookings No previous bookings available Setting Up Your Camera Most studios will be using a tethered or wireless camera that can instantly import photos into the software as they are captured If you will be importing from a folder or from a camera media card skip ahead to capturing and importing photos Setting Up a Tethered Camera Any Canon EOS DSLR cameras can shoot and send photos directly to the software while connected through a USB or firewire cable Follow these steps to set up your tethered camera for the shoot l Ov 2 oA O Select the Manage Studio tab from the bottom of the software and select the Cameras from the top of the studio Select Tethered Camera from the left side of the software under Sele
212. ize in inches i Select Cell Orientation best fit vertical or horizontal b Specify by the Number of Rows and Columns to select size by the number of cells total i Select Square Cells to make each cell size an equal square 6 Select the Photo Orientation use the existing orientation or rotate photos clockwise or counter clockwise to match cells 7 Select Create 8 Click and drag photos from the photo bar into the composite Adjusting Focus Use focus to sharpen a photo for a crisp look or to soften an image to al loj create a gentle glow focus Focus options include e Select to sharpen the photo by 1 point e Select the triangle to set the focus to 5 points e Select to soften the photo by one point e Select the circle to set the focus to 5 points e Select the box to reset the focus to the digital negative settings e Select focus to open a dropdown menu with preset focus values Applying a Vignette A vignette is an effect where the photo edges will gradually fade to min med max white or black a vignette e Select the white bordered box to apply a white vignette o Select min med or max to change the intensity of the vignette 193 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets e Select the black bordered box to apply a black vignette o Select min med or max to change the intensity of the vignette e Select the middle box to remove any vignette Using the Correct Toolset T
213. ize options found here 8 Select OK You can also add a photo item by selecting Add from the top of the software and selecting Photo which contains the previous options Adding a Multiple Photo Item You can add a composite item to the border that will contain a number of different photos but count as one item Each photo in the composite will contain a separate placeholder To add a photo composite to your border 1 Select add multiple photos from the left toolbar 2 Awindow appears 3 Select the Photos tab for basic photo options a b Select the number of rows and columns or a fixed number of photos Select to look up photos by query Click here for more information on queries c Select the aspect ratio of each photo d Select the area to fill photo arrangement orientation spacing overlapping and uneven photo distribution 222 Using Border Workshop 4 Select the Labels tab to set visible labels as guides for each photo a Select Show Labels b Enter the text to show or select Insert Special Text to select a data type c Select font properties 5 Select the Options tab for more options a Select Transparency options i None draw entire photo ii Simple set a preset for transparency 0 is opaque and 100 is invisible ii Predefined Mask select Edit to choose a predefined vignette or transparency setting iv Chroma key select a green or blue screen background b Select
214. l size Edit width arrangements color profile and offsets iii Select Reset List to set the list to printer defaults iv Select Delete to delete a roll size c Sheet sizes i Select a sheet size and select Edit to modify an existing sheet setup Select width height media arrangements and a color profile 56 Setting Up Your Network Select Delete to delete a sheet size Select Reset List to set the list to printer defaults d Margin Text Select Control options for if and when to print margin text Enter text to appear on lines 1 and 2 at left center and right justification Select Insert Special Text to enter pre made text for customers dates packages and other information Select Restore Default Text to set the text to printer defaults 5 Select OK to save printer settings Setting Up a Canon or Windows Printer The steps for adding a Canon and Windows printer are the same except some Canon printers will be automatically detected and added to the list To add and set up a Canon or Windows printer l 2 Attach the printer to the computer The printer will be automatically detected and added to the Canon or Windows Printers list If your printer is not automatically detected select Add Printer using standard Windows Driver and select your printer from the list Select Setup to the right of the printer A window appears Select Properties to set up basic Windows printing preferences
215. lat een dlls dle del 126 REMOVING PARO 1O EE E nidad sanidad 126 Hiding PROTOS TONV PUBISIING tt oras 127 ROMINA AO OS 400 EPEA tdanete te as TE 127 Adding Service NOTES vecccic ecccstcee cs cavbesse cave cudeeeUbecsicandecdicebdacdech esau dodebiedea cdudestbectiecdedaaseicudehvessechigesdeetbesgncenees 128 EGiting SAIDDING IO eenei er iara eA Eere r E AE EA KEER AA L ERa k TE ie S Siaa RaT 128 Table of Contents LON PIAS 5 tt A A RN 128 Viewing RA Properties permira R E EEEE EEE E R Ees 129 Showing PhotoFitogramsand Dalia scans ces en ee ee 130 SAVING ATM DUOTCS secs csi asol 130 ADDIVING ATIND UTES EA E E E in ele his heed ide E Nel esl cdo 131 Editing CUSTOM ATHIDUTES x cc cccs cccevssccs cavscccedessaccicaniedendeuleedecatiascpetiecsactidedsecetbasshcetsessidedseccdcansedencesssccacsced 132 Qrenting E d EIEEE ise O add 132 EMNGNCING RINOTOS EAE a a car o O AE E EEA 133 Previewing PROTOS iia i ineeie i e Re aaao SE EE iias aae Ee ees akie iE SRE ie Taai 133 PUBISNING PNO O S tne ne a 133 URSPUBISING PROTOS is ceccadaze e o edad Mo o aL 133 Batch Publishing and UN Pobra EVENTS ii A ais 134 COPYING PHOTOS muii Enoc Siae kiea Sree b iesin ries 134 Creating Balci Orders e A ads es as ee ET O ene 134 PIOOHNO RAOLOS 3 ats EAE EEE tere a teat thes ea ON re Mea Albee sie ere o leo de cae ee 136 Creating a Custom Proof Sheet case EE aS ai Eae eeii ae TE ai 138 USTED a E E ae A 139 Showing and Hiding the Ca a Aiea cbs 139 Nela G
216. le digit for the first nine months and two digits for the last three months For example February is represented by the number 2 and December is represented by the number 12 This option will print the date in extended form meaning the month will be spelled out completely February 14 2006 This option will print the month as a two digit number For example February is represented as 02 and December is represented as 12 This option will print the month in numeric form If the month is a single digit for example February is the second month it will add a zero in the front 02 This option will print the customer back print information submitted by the customer will the order This will print the first line of customer information This option will print the customer back print information submitted by the customer with the order This will print the second line of the customer information This option will print the order comments for the order This option will print the order date associated with the print job The order date is represented by numbers that are divided by front slashes All single digit numbers will have a zero placed before them February 14 2006 will appear as 02 14 2006 This option will combine both the ORDERDATE with the ORDERTIME It will look like this 02 14 2006 01 52PM 355 ORDERDISCOUNT ORDERID ORDERMULTIPLE ORDERPARTIALSHEETS ORDERPRINTCOMMANDS ORDERSHEETS ORDERSHIPCOST
217. lect Archive To A window appears 4 Select a location to archive to A folder will automatically be created within this location 5 Select OK a If you are archiving to a remote media device such as a CD the software can remind you which media you used when trying to unarchive Select Yes to have this reminder appear 6 You will be prompted to remove the catalogs that you just archived from the software This will save soace on your computer and the files can be unarchived at any time 7 Select Yes to remove the catalogs 119 Using Photo Library If you set up a quick archive path in Setup you can select Quick Archive to automatically archive the selected catalogs without choosing a location You can also archive or quick archive catalogs or photo groups by right clicking on the catalog or photo group and selecting Archive To which contains the previous options Unarchiving Catalogs To restore archived catalogs or photo groups you will first need to be connected to the location or media of the stored data To unarchive a catalog 1 Select Catalogs from the very top left of the software 2 Select Unarchive From 3 Awindow appears 4 Select or browse to the path of the stored catalogs or select Find to search for it 5 Once you have located the catalog select it 6 Select OK If you set up a quick unarchive path in Setup you can select Quick Unarchive to automatically unarchive the selected catalogs with
218. lect Quick Import Setup or press SHIFT I as a hotkey 3 4 5 A window appears Browse to the location for automatically importing photos Select how to copy the files a Simply copy the files to the destination without changing the file type b Or Convert the files to another format while copying i Select a new file format for the imported photos If you want to rename the imported photos select Rename copied files a Select a file name prefix b Select a starting number c Select Reverse Chronological to rename photos starting with the last first Select Delete files after copying them if you want to permanently remove these files from this location after importing 175 8 9 Using Photo Workshop Select Recurse Subdirectories if you want to import all photos from subfolders and subdirectories in this location Select OK To use quick import 1 2 3 4 5 Select Photos from the top of the software Select Quick Import or press I as a hotkey Photos will be automatically imported from the location defined in quick import setup You will be prompted for confirmation when importing these photos The photos will be added to the current catalog Importing Photos from a Camera If you have a tethered or WiFi camera connected and set up in the software you can import photos into the current catalog as they are taken To import photos from a tethered or WiFi camera as they are captured
219. lect Reset List to revert to the default list Select Move Up or Move Down to change position of an aspect ratio in the list Select and check Automatically add package aspect ratios to list to have all aspect ratios from your packages added to the list This option is enabled by default 10 Select OK 168 Using Photo Workshop Viewing Guides You can turn on guides to help while editing photos To turn on guides 1 Select View from the top of the software 2 Select Guides 3 Select and check Show Guides or press CTRL as a hotkey 4 There are two guides available check the one you wish to use a School for school portraits This guide will show dotted lines for the 4x6 5x7 and 8x10 aspect ratios and an oval and line F for centering student faces in the frame b Standard for aspect ratios This guide will show dotted lines for the 4x6 5x7 and 8x10 aspect ratios Clearing Photos from the Workspace To clear the workspace select View from the top of the software and select Clear or press ESC as a hotkey Sorting Photos To sort photos in the Photo Workshop 1 Select Sort from the top of the software 2 Select to sort photos by e Rating sort by your assigned 1 to 5 star rating e Time sort by the time stamp on each photo e Photo Number sort by the assigned photo numbers e Filename sort by the photo filename e Full Pathname sort by the entire computer pathname 169 Using Pho
220. lect Save Booking 10 The booking will now appear on the customer details page and the calendar QO Booking Information O Choose Customer Search Add New Customer Info Edit Customer Delete Booking Choose Date 9 26 2009 cn Start Time 8 30 AM X End Time 9 30 AM X Enter Name Phillies Reunion Enter Description Update Status Booked v Add Status R Choose Room Studio X Add Room Goto Schedule Call V Add a reminder call to the calendar for this booking s Session Reminder None Recurring Recurring Options Assign Employee s Unassigned Assign Employee Save Booking Cancel Booking Notes No notes found Adding a Note To add a note from the customer details page Select Add Notes from the bottom of the window Type a note and select Save Note You can also view and remove existing notes listed by date and time Select Remove to delete a note 103 Using Your Studio Va New Customer Note Nicole has a discount on her next photo shoot Notes must be less than 512 characters Save Note Clear Note Back Customer Notes No notes found Adding a Call To add a call from the customer details page 1 Select Add Call from the bottom of the window Choose a date and time for the call Enter a name for the call You must enter a name Enter details for the call This is optional Update or add a status to the call Examples assigned call again
221. lect a lab to fulfill the item If you select a lab the product list will only show items they offer Select Print Group to filter the list to a particular print size Click on an item to add it to your package Use the arrows under Count to select the number of prints 65 Setting Up Your Products If you wish to add additional items to the package click on another item and select the number of prints There is no limit to the number of items you may add Select Clear Quantities to reset the list and start over When finished select OK 4x6 5 00 Edit Product Remove Product 4x6 Print 1 copy tem Add Item Fulfillment Print Locall Select Media Add Pri Editing a Product Once you have created a product it will appear in your selected package with a list of possible commands and preferences Select Edit Item to change the product name price size fulfillment or any of the options from the list below Select Remove Item to delete it Click on any available link to quickly add or edit a product feature Fulfillment Select where the product will be printed local or lab This option can only be changed by selecting Edit Item Media and Print Commands Select to add or edit the type of printing material or special printing commands Template Select to assign a template with this product Templates can be graphics layouts overlays or text To associate a template with this product 1
222. lication Local Settings Fulfillment Options Click here to change your settings that affect Click here to change yo Application Shared Settings Image Preview Settings Click here to change your settings that are d Click here to change settings ass Application General Settings Spell Checker Settings Back to Main Click here to navigate ba O Application Local Settings These settings apply only to this computer e Station Select a unique name for this computer This will allow you to identify specific actions performed on or by this computer by recognizing the Station name Your computer name as displayed in Windows can be used as a default e Archive Path Select or browse to a location to archive past events Archiving will remove the events from the software while keeping them handy in case you ever need them again You can also archive to a disc if your computer supports it select Test Compatibility to check if your computer can write information to a CD If not you will need to save the data to another location then write with other software e Backup Path Select or browse to a location if you would like to make a backup archive to a second drive or location on your network e Restore Browse to your previously archived events to bring them back into the software Note Your Archive and Restore path must be set to the same location 40 Setting Up Software Options Application Shared Settings These setting
223. lies and usage Find these options in Manage Studio gt Vendors Adding a Vendor Keeping a list of vendors in the software will make it easy to reorder supplies Find these options in Manage Studio gt Vendors gt Setup Vendors Vendors Name Phone Contact Dunder Mifflin 528 723 8592 Michael Scott e Office Store 333 222 6646 Jim Supplies To add a vendor 1 Select New Vendor 2 Entera Vendor Name and Account Number 3 Enter Contact Details 4 Select Save Vendor Editing a Vendor All vendors are listed by name with a contact name and phone number Click on an existing vendor name to view the information Select Delete Vendor from the information screen to remove it 82 Setting Up Your Studio Adding an Inventory Item Keeping track of your inventory will reduce costs and ensure that you never run out of an item Find these options in Manage Studio gt Vendors gt View Inventory On Hand Inventory Name SKU Quantity PurchasedQuantity On Hand Cost Purchase Date e Paper Towels 2872 24 24 0 00 6 3 2009 To add an inventory item 1 Select New Item 2 Enter the Item Name and Description 3 Select a Vendor from your list of vendors If you need to set up vendors scroll up to the previous section 4 Enter the Vendor SKU This is the vendor s serial or product number they use to keep track of their products 5 Select an Inventory Type or select Add Type to create a new one such as Paper o
224. lly on the page Gaps Vertically Equally spaces the gaps between objects lined vertically on the page Centers Horizontally Equally spaces objects from their centers Use with objects lined horizontally on the page Centers Vertically Equally spaces objects from their centers Use with objects lined vertically on the page Order Tool You can change the layer order of a selected object As you add objects to the page they are layered one on top of another The back or bottom layer is covered by new layers The front or top layer covers all previous layers To achieve the look you want you might need to rearrange the order in which objects appear on the page You can use the Order tool on only one selected object at a time Send to Back Sends the selected object to the bottom of the layer stack The object becomes the first item in the Border Items list Bring to Front Sends the selected object to the top of the layer stack The object becomes the last item in the Border Items list Send Backward Sends the selected object one layer toward the bottom of the layer stack The object moves closer to the first item in the Border Items list Bring Forward Sends the selected object one layer toward the top of the layer stack The object moves closer to the last item in the Border Items list 294 Tutorial Border Workshop Rotate Tool Use this tool to rotate photo text and graphic objects You can rotate 90 degrees 180 deg
225. logs by days o Arrange Catalogs By Week organize all catalogs by week o Arrange Catalogs By Month organize all catalogs by month o Arrange Catalogs into 4 groups organize catalogs alphabetically into 4 groups o Arrange Catalogs into 6 groups organize catalogs alphabetically into 6 groups o Arrange Catalogs into 26 groups organize catalogs alphabetically into 26 groups Show Number of Catalogs show the number of catalogs per catalog type Show Catalog ID show the event ID information in the catalog name Show Archived Catalogs view only archived catalogs 31 Reference Photo Library Top Photo Viewer Menu STUDIO SOLUTION EAS Catalogs Sort View Photos y Soriw Viewwv EE Show Data Hide Cart PhotoLibrary Portrait Sifting your collection of pt lalogs Jescription 6 Image catalog v Find Info Add Photo y Find rient Enhance Preview Publist py Ba 3 8x10 Photos e Rename Photo rename selected photo e Describe Photo add photographer note to selected photo e Remove Photo delete selected photo e Hide Photo s do not publish the selected photo when publishing the catalog e Hide Hidden Photos do not display the hidden photos selected when viewing the catalog e Hide 1 Star Photo do not display photos rated with one star e Rate Photo assign a 1 to 5 star rating to selected photo e Orient Photo set the orientation of the selected photo e Service Notes view and edit services to be applied
226. mber sort by the assigned photo numbers Sort Photos by Filename sort by the photo filename Sort Photos by Full Pathname sort by the entire computer pathname Sort Photos by File Size sort by file size Sort Photos by Published sort by published and unpublished Sort Photos by Archived sort by archived and unarchived Sort Photos by Exif Comment sort by Exchangeable Image File information Sort Photos by Custom manually click and drag photos to their positions Sort Photos in Ascending Order sort by the previous criteria in ascending order Sort Photos in Descending Order sort by the previous criteria in descending order e Show Photo Icons show information icons above each photo e Show Photo Rating show 1 to 5 star rating below each photo e Refresh Photos refresh all photos in the current catalog e Reset Photo Numbers reset all photo numbers from a specified number e Set Starting Photo Number set a starting number for all new imported photos e Set Capture Filenames set filename options for all new imported photos e Find Photo find a photo with search string and method e Find Next Photo find next photo in the catalog with previous search criteria Find Previous Photo find previous photo in the catalog with previous search criteria 332 Reference Photo Workshop Create New amp Import check to create and import photos when adding a catalog or event Create New o Add Photo Group to
227. mplate of that type The left 75 Setting Up Your Products most template title is the current group you are viewing all group titles to the right are subgroups of that group STUDIO SOLUTION 0 x z User Admin Logout La Products gt Templates O N d Ki a E Golf Magazine Cove Soccer Memory Mat Soccer Memory Mat Soccer Team Photo Sports Memory Mate Sports Memory Mate Sports Smart Memor For advanced viewing options select Options from the top right of the window e Change Group select a different group to view the templates of that group e Show File Description select this to list the file description beneath each template e View Border Thumbnails or View Border List select thumbnails to view miniature previews of the template or select list to view a vertical list of file descriptions e View Border Info select a template and select this option to view the filename path file size creation date and file description of your selected template e Thumbnail Size select to change the size of the template thumbnails e List select any template subgroup to view the templates of that group new delete edit make new import delete edit group group group deault template template template template 76 Setting Up Your Products Adding Groups To add a new group l 2 3 4 Select New Group from the bottom of the software Select to create
228. must have Auto Detect Address checked for this option Once Login Method appears on your camera use either Anonymous or match the username and password defined below You must have Anonymous Username checked to login anonymously without a password 10 Once Target Folder appears on your camera select Root Folder 11 Complete the Wizard 12 Your WiFi camera is now ready to shoot wirelessly Ensure that your camera has been detected and appears in the software in both the Cameras studio tab and in the status bar located at the very bottom left of the software 242 Tutorial Running a Shoot Starting the Shoot Your customer is entered into the studio and ready to go your booking has been created and your camera is connected and ready to shoot let s start the booking Select the Manage Studio tab from the bottom of the software and select the Home tab from the top of the studio Wednesday June 3 2009 4 June 2009 ES Bookings SMTWTEFS CO Nicole Smith 6 3 2009 5 15 AM Nicole s Portraits 1 2 4 56 _ 7 8 9 10111213 MA Test Customer 6 3 2009 7 15 AM Portrait Sitting 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Tasks July 2009 FD Not Assigned Call to Nicole Smith NA ES V Nicole Riddle Clean Studio 3 to 567891011 Your booking should appear on your home page with the customer name booking time and booking information Select the customer s name to go to the booking information
229. n This option will bring up a drop down list of available alignments Left Center Right Center of Page Top Middle or Bottom Adding a Border Graphic Most borders contain a graphic whether it is a decorative border that surrounds the photo or a simple logo in the corner of the page You can add one or more graphics to your border template by clicking add graphic on the toolbar The Graphic Object window appears Click the Browse button to select the graphic file you want to appear on the page The Border Workshop can use several different types of files while making graphics The Workshop will convert these files to PNG files automatically as the border is created Transparency Options If you want the graphic to appear as is leave the Transparency option on None If you want the graphic to be transparent select the Simple option and enter a transparency percentage If you want to make a single color in the image transparent select the Drop Out a Specific Color option and choose the color you want to drop out If your graphic has an alpha channel you want to make transparent select the Use Image Aloha Channel option Movement Options The Movement setting determines if you can move the graphic when you apply the border in the Photo Workshop The Fixed setting does not let you move the graphic at all The Floating setting gives you freedom to move the graphic anywhere on the page The Relative setting allows you to move the g
230. n bookings and history Perform action ie al li iS by clicking the appropriate tools at the bottom of the page Test Customer Current Bookings 123 Road No current bookings available Austin TX Previous Bookings No previous bookings available Calls 2 No current calls available Customer Notes e No notes found Orders No orders available 239 Tutorial Running a Shoot This is your customer s details page When you create a booking it will appear under the Current Bookings heading e Select Add Booking from the bottom of the software O Edit Customer Tf Delete Customer Add Booking Add Notes Add Cal a u g f This is the booking information page Here you will set the date time and booking descriptions e Select the calendar next to Choose Date to select the date of the booking e Select a Start Time and End Time e Entera name for the booking You must enter a name e Entera description for the booking This is optional e Set the Update Status to Booked e Select a room for the booking if applicable e Select and check Schedule Call This will remind us to confirm the booking the day before it is scheduled to take place Booking Information Choose Customer Test Customer mj Search Add New Customer Info 123 Road Austin TX Edit Customer 123 456 7890 testing customer net Choose Dat e 6 3 2009 start Time 7 15 AM w End Time 8 15 AM y Enter Name Portra
231. n Camera Heli a A E DANG RR ada 305 Carn Connect to INS DORIS rita ada 305 Can t Access The PHOTOS Fold snno iii 306 Canna PONS eso inn pt 306 Can t Send Orson naan ecvinmaisane eeaue E iia 307 O 308 PROTO Libram RETSFEIIG Casas die a ea a E a a E a R R a 309 TOP GaldloG D AE A E A da dd 310 TOD PHOTO Viewer MENU aeasreee a E e EE E E A EAE EAA E EEI TETAN EEEa 312 Bottom Catadog Menu nerse A A a lana Get 314 B tom PRoto Viewer Meie aaa anar 315 Noe el ajo oO 0 e AAA O RN 316 RIDNECIEIA TEA FAAO ee 318 Shopping Cart Referee tt drin keira nnna aa a a eaaa focesiusteasinreiet 320 Hiding and Showing Data and ThE Cal ee a a e eaaa a kia 320 SHOPPING Cart OpHONS rrn e R E E ai a e niy 320 Right clicking an ltem in the Shopping CPT esssscssscesstscsecceescecnsccsessecnecceessecnscessnsesssceeensesnscessnsesnscesnsess 321 Orders Workspace Reference ssseseseeresesssseeeeeesesssseseeeceessssesreceeessssoseeeeressssoseseeeesesssseseete 322 EOD MONG e A e E E S 323 Boton MENU woun n EA E E a E EN 323 Right eliekno GN Order nn an consents a a a ios 324 26 Table of Contents Presentation MOC Stk EA ea haunts et 325 UI EE A EE E E EE S E E S E E 325 PROTO Workshop RETEST N O a aaa aaia 328 ONAE AE A EA E IAEE S 329 Sol foals AAE E EEEE E E E A E na ONT E A ES E AEE TE 331 Right eliekng PINON A a en a Nl E En 333 B rder Workshop REfSr NCE i esna a a a a a a eben a iE 334 Op Me E 335 LTE Toolbars meranen a aaa eh A eR
232. nal cyan and magenta in daylight and incandescent bulbs e Flash Strobe compensates for the additional red and yellow from camera flashes e Fluorescent compensates for the additional red and yellow from fluorescent bulbs e Tungsten compensates for the additional red and yellow from tungsten bulbs Select None to remove the preset color balance from your photo You can also select color balance to open a dropdown menu with all of your preset and attribute settings Applying Attributes The C1 through C4 buttons correspond to your saved attribute settings To save your color balance attributes 1 Set the color balance for your photo 2 Click on the numbers between the color swatches 3 Anew color balance tool appears 4 Adjust the color balance by dragging the bars or typing values into the text boxes 203 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets 5 Select Save Changes As and select Custom 1 2 3 or 4 6 Select Apply 7 Cl C2 C3 or C4 will now hold your color balance settings To apply your color balance attributes select C1 through C4 depending on where you saved your attributes Manually Adjusting Color Balance To manually set the color balance Click a color swatch to add that color to the photo The colors on the right are the colors associated with the numbers from 1 to 255 OR Click on the numbers between the color swatches 1 Anew color balance tool appears 2 Adjust the color balance
233. name or select it and select OK b If you need to add or edit an existing customer read the previous section on setting up customers Choose a date starting time and end time for the event Enter a name for the event You must enter a name before saving the booking Enter a description for the event This is optional Update or add a status to the event Examples booked completed complete no show Choose or add a room for the event If you want to automatically add a confirmation call for this event to your calendar select Add a reminder call to the calendar for this booking This call will appear on the calendar schedule 24 hours prior to the event If you want to make the booking a recurring event select Recurring Options to setup the event Assign an employee or multiple employees to the event Select Save Booking 95 Using Your Studio 13 The booking will now appear on your Tasks and Events calendar on the specified date and time aie Booking Information O Choose Customer EII Search AddNew Customer Info Edit Customer Choose Da e 9 26 2009 a Start Time 8 30 AM kd End Time 9 30 AM Enter Name Phillies Reunion Enter Description Update Status Booked Choose Room Studio v Add Room Rename Room Delet Schedule Call Y Add a reminder call to the calendar for this booking Reminder None Recurring Recurring Options Assign Employee s Unassigned Assign Employee
234. nce selected photo i add package a clear order service notes change cropping remove item Top Menu compare ratingy sorty fullscreen music orientation view v Customer Test Portrait Sitting 325 Reference Presentation Mode Compare lock selected photo while navigating the catalog to compare other photos with it Stars select a 1 to 5 star rating for selected photo Rating select a 1 to 5 star rating for selected photo Sort e Sort Photos by Rating sort by your assigned 1 to 5 star rating e Sort Photos by Time sort by the time assigned to the photo e Sort Photos by Photo Number sort by the assigned photo numbers e Sort Photos by Filename sort by the photo filename e Sort Photos by Full Pathname sort by the entire computer pathname e Sort Photos by File Size sort by file size e Sort Photos by Published sort by published and unpublished e Sort Photos by Archived sort by archived and unarchived e Sort Photos by Exif Comment sort by Exchangeable Image File information e Sort Photos by Custom manually click and drag photos to their positions e Sort Photos in Ascending Order sort by the previous criteria in ascending order e Sort Photos in Descending Order sort by the previous criteria in descending order Fullscreen view selected photo as a fullscreen preview with slideshow options Music e Off check to turn off music e Play Music Folder select a music folder from the list
235. nce you have entered a name you are ready to add it to the list Click the Add button to add the custom object to the list The Custom Objects list is a list found throughout different parts of the program under the Borders options Modifying the list here will also modify the Custom Objects list in the Photo Workshop as well as the Edit amp Proofing page The other options available are Move Up Move Down and Remove To move an object up or down in the Custom Objects list select it and choose the appropriate option To remove the object from the list entirely select the object and click Remove Note Removing a custom object from the Custom Objects list will delete it entirely Edit Custom Objects will bring up the current list of Custom Objects allowing you to move them up or down in the list or to remove them Add Custom Object will allow you to add a custom object from the Custom Objects list into the border you are currently working on 265 Tutorial Border Workshop Edit The Edit menu allows the user to quickly modify objects in the current border Duplicate Ctrl D Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Delete Del Duplicate copies the selected object and pastes at the exact same location The shortcut key for this is Ctrl D Cut copies the selected object and deletes it The shortcut key for this is Ctrl X Copy copies the selected object The short
236. nd the customer s home page complete with all bookings calls notes and orders You will learn more about these options later Note Duplicate customers can be created Make sure you enter all the pertinent information middle name email adaress etc to differentiate the customers Editing a Customer Click on a customer s name to see the customer details Select Edit Customer from the bottom of the window to edit any customer information Select Delete Customer to remove them Import and Export File Information from an external program in either csv or txt format can be imported in the software This can make the setup faster to complete Once the customer setup has been completed you can export the data for backup purposes The file can also be used by other external programs as well 89 Using Your Studio Using Studio Solution Now that we ve set up the software your products and added customers and employees it s time to get to work We ll start with basic functions and navigating around the studio Find and select the Manage Studio tab at the bottom of the software Basic Studio Functions Although there are many different windows within the studio these functions are always available STUDIO SOLUTION 0 x User Admin Products gt Package Wizard Title Bar The title bar is located at the very top of the software and includes various resizing controls and information
237. ndow or press SHIFT Z as a hotkey o 3x Represents an image 300 larger than the image size displayed in the window or press ALT Z as a hotkey o 4x Represents an image 400 larger than the image size displayed in the window or press ALT SHIFT Z as a hotkey To zoom out right click the mouse on the photo Select Zoom to bring up a dropdown menu with additional options e High Quality Zoom select and check this option to view zoomed photos as high quality images e Floating Loupe select and check this option to zoom in with a floating magnifying glass This option is enabled by default Disabling this option will zoom in on the entire photo within the sheet Using the Enhance Toolset The enhance toolset includes tools for retouching and enhancing photos To open the enhance toolset select the Enhance tab from the bottom of the Photo Workshop workspace The enhance tools will appear either to the right or below the workspace 185 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets Enhance toolset options are in order Color Borders Sheets Focus Vignettes and Retouching color black amp white sepia retro duotone borders sheets v focus v vignette on text off min med max choose IN a To a Saving Changes The software will not save enhancement settings for a photo if you select another photo To save your settings for a photo use the save options detailed here Retouching a Photo Studio
238. ng Package Groups Although only your default package group will be displayed for each event you can switch between your different package groups from the shopping cart To manually navigate through all your package groups select Prev and More from the bottom of the package window in the cart To change the default package group select Add Package from the bottom of the cart and select Change Default Group Select the package group you want to display and use as the default Adding an Item to the Cart To add an item to the cart as part of the packages you set up CONS al 4x6 1 Select the photo or photos you want to add to the cart Enter Number of Copies 2 Select the package you want to add for this photo from 2 3 the product list at the top of the shopping cart If you 1 45 selected more than one photo the package will be a added for each photo 6 z 8 9 3 Select the number of this package you want to add for your photo OR 140 Using Photo Library 1 Select the photo or photos you want to add to the cart 2 Select Add Package from the bottom of the shopping cart 3 Select the package you want to add for this photo from the list If you selected more than one photo the package will be added for each photo 1 Select a package you want to add from the product list at the top of the shopping cart 2 Anumber of blank frames will appear in the shopping cart for this package 3
239. ng and dragging the mouse or manually clicking each one holding CTRL or SHIFT Select how to copy the files a Simply copy the files to the destination without changing the file type b Or Convert the files to another format while copying i Select a new file format for the imported photos If you want to rename the imported photos select Rename copied files a Select a file name prefix b Select a starting number c Select Reverse Chronological to rename photos starting with the last first Select Delete files after copying them if you want to permanently remove these files from this location after importing Select Import to import selected photos or select Import All to import all photos in the current location You can also import photos by pressing the hotkey CTRL and following the previous steps 174 Using Photo Workshop How would you like to copy the files Simply copy the files to the destination Convert the files to another format while copying New Type Jpeg Compressed JPG v Options Rename copied files Insert special text File name prefix CustomerName E vent Starting Count 11 Sample Mary J SmithEventl1 jpg Order 7 Reverse Chronological C Delete files after copying them Using Quick Import Quick import will automatically search and import photos from a predefined location To set up quick import l Select Photos from the top of the software 2 Se
240. ng example uses four different photos To add a photo to the border template click add photo on the toolbar The Photo Object window appears When you add the first photo Photol appears in the Photo field automatically Photo 1 is the photo you have open in the photo workshop when you apply the border When you add a second photo to the template Photo2 appears in the Photo field but if you want to add Photo 1 again click the Lookup button and select Photol from the Photos menu or type Photol in the Photo field See the Using the Photo and Graphic Object Query section later in this chapter for more information on using the lookup 273 Tutorial Border Workshop General Position and Size Pot Pht Options None draw entire photo O Simple preset value D J O Pre defined Mask bo Ed O Chromakey Green screen or Blue screen background O Highkey white background O Lowey black background Movement outside of border editor Adjustable may be moved and scaled within image cell default O Fixed cannot be moved O Floating can be freely moved throughout border template O Relative moves relative to a previous object E Advanced C Allow photo to overlap composite objects O Display image on screen as guide but do not print C Draw a frame around the photo C Draw a drop shadow C Require photo to be manually selected ES Rotation i C Rotat
241. ng it and editing the date and time from the details page To edit a calendar item double click it and enter the details page Here you can edit any options for the item To delete a calendar item double click it and enter the details page Select the Delete Item button to the right of the details Customers The Customers tab will keep track of all your past current and possible future customers o view details and bookings or choose an action on the particular customer Click email to send them an emai ey Customer Name Phone Email O 1 Nicole Smith 456 2203 nico e et com net Custome LL Sam Spade 344 223 2212 Spy Studio Customers A Jack Sparow After selecting the tab a list of customers will appear alphabetized by last name with a phone number and email address e Clicking a customer s email link will open a new message to them in your default email program e Clicking on a customer s name will take you to the details page for that customer Customer Details This is your customer s home page It keeps track of all their booking and order info and is where you can view and manage general info bookings notes and calls The right 100 Using Your Studio side of the window will always display the time and date of the event or information The following info will always be displayed Contact Info The left of the window will show the customer address phone number and email address Clicking th
242. nnel Border Workshop Menu There are several options available in the Border Workshop that are only available via the Border Workshop menu This menu allows the user to access both the front and 255 Tutorial Border Workshop back view of a template via tabs This menu also provides the user with a way to turn on a grid system or activate an auto alignment system which is used in the creation process Finally users can access the undo and redo options Front amp Back Tab The Border Workshop provides a way for users to access both the front side and backside of a template This feature is important to photographers who use borders and templates that have backs For example sport and event photographers may offer photo trading card products or small photo business cards This unique Border Workshop feature allows professional users to access the back of templates to create products that customers want The first option available on the border Workshop menu is the Front tab and Back tab These options are available in the upper left portion of the Border Workshop screen In order to visualize the purpose of this feature imaging you are a sport photographer that is shooting the local Little League baseball teams One of the most popular product offerings is a small trading card that the players can take out and trade with their friends just like people do with professional Major League baseball cards In order to make the cards m
243. non iPFS1C gt Windows Printers add Printe Raster File Printers 55 Setting Up Your Network Setting Up a Canon Printer with Direct Connectivity Some Canon printers have direct connectivity with the software You ll only need to plug it in turn it on and attach it to the computer The software will instantly recognize it and set it up no drivers are necessary when connected directly via USB The following Canon printers support direct connectivity e Pixma Pro 9000 9500 Mark and II e IPF 5100 6100 6200 8100 9100 To add and set up a Canon printer with direct connectivity via USB 1 Attach the printer to the computer 2 The printer will be automatically detected and added to the Canon printers list If itis not automatically detected select Add Canon Printer and select your printer from the list 3 Select Setup to the right of the printer A window appears 4 There are four tabs of options Main Roll sizes Sheet sizes and Margin Text a Main i Select Enable this printer to activate the printer This is turned on by default ii Select a Paper Source Roll Width Media Type Media Rule and whether to auto cut and allow borderless printing ii Select Advanced Printing Preferences for the Windows printing preferences b Roll sizes i Select New to add a new roll size Select width arrangements color profile and offsets ii Select a roll size and select Edit to modify an existing rol
244. not working or connected to the computer you will not be able to start the software If you installed Studio Solution into the default directory you can open it by double clicking the Studio Solution icon from your Desktop or from the Start Menu at Start Menu gt Programs gt Studio Solution Supported CD DVD Software When using Windows XP or Vista the software will automatically use the CD authorizing capabilities of the operating system Supported File Formats The following file formats are supported e crw Canon e omp e png e cr2 Canon e jpg e tif e psd Adobe Logging In The first time you activate the software you will automatically login as Admin with access to every part of the software As the Administrator you have the option to set up the rights and privileges for other Studio Solution users Setting an Admin Password The first thing you should do after logging in is set a password to protect your Administrative settings 32 To set a password for the Administrator l Getting Started Start the software with the USB protection MUDO key installed SOLUTION Ensure you are in the Manage Studio tab Enter your assigned user name and password to login to the application Select Logout located at the very top ou a ES right of the software Automatically log in to Online Account You will be returned to the login screen Select to login as Admin with no Copyright 1
245. o the barcode This can be anything from the date to an order number to price to a combination of all of those things You can even type custom information into the text field There is also an option available for predetermined data options Click the Insert Special Text button to see the available data You may choose as many types of data as you want to be included in the barcode 261 Tutorial Border Workshop Insert Special Text Date and Time File and Path Package Order Customer Data Back Print Codes Photo Data Kodak Photo Metadata Photo Metadata TT T E ETF AE A A Many of the data options are queries A query is a search function that will search and find the appropriate data This data is entered when the border is first applied or from various information in Studio Solution For instance the barcode below has a query for the order ID 262 Tutorial Border Workshop Barcode Object General Size and Position ZOrderld4 Barcode Format Codabar v Show Text Insert Special Text Orderld 8 Although the Order ID was never entered in the border as soon as the order was created the query was made When the border is applied to a photo the query ZOrderld searches for the order ID and puts it into the barcode The end result is this L2M2B SIJUE Barcodes can be set with any of the data available to be used on the back of items for pricing on
246. o your template the application prompts you for values for those text fields when you apply the border to a photo You can test the variable input form from the Border Workshop to make sure fields are correct and text appears correctly on the page To test the form click test form on the toolbar The Text Fields window displays your variable text fields You can enter values into the fields to check your layout Using the Photo and graphic Object Query When you add photos and graphics to a border template you can select a variable that instructs the application to generate the border at the time it is applied based on images found in the catalog The simplest photo variable is Photo e g Photo1 This variable is entered automatically as you add single photos to the template This variable simply adds to the border the first second third etc photo you select while editing a photo in the Photo Workshop There are two other types of predefined variables you can select graphic and query variables Graphic Variables If have a graphic element you consistently want to add to your photos you might add the graphic to your catalog Common graphic elements in a border are a background and a logo Once added to the catalog the graphics are available to be used by graphic variables you specify in your border template For your border template to access these graphics you must add photo data to the graphic file so the border can find th
247. ocations of the currently selected item s top left and bottom right corners in that order e The width and height of the currently selected item measurements X 4989 Y 3702 212 Using Border Workshop The top of the list is the background of the border Items will always appear in the border workspace beneath items listed below it in the border list The bottom of the list is the front of the border Items will always appear in the border workspace on top of items listed above it in the border list e Selecting any item in the border items list will select it in gee ee the workspace as well Y Photo Photo1 C Photo Photo2 e Right clicking any item in the border item list will bring up E noes the same options as right clicking the item in the border O Photo Photos E Graphic frame png workspace e Double clicking any item in the border item list will bring up the item properties To rearrange items in the border items list 1 Select a border item in the list 2 Hold and drag the item to a new location in the list 3 The item will now appear in a different order in the workspace Viewing and Using the Grid You can display a grid for aligning border items To view the grid select Options from the top of the software and select and check Show Grid To edit grid options 1 Select Options from the top of the software Select Grid Options or press CTRL G as a hotkey Select Display Grid to show t
248. of Canon Studio Solution is installed on a single studio computer so ks e This computer will be used by itself 2 Select a Photos Folder This IS e All photo and data will be stored locally 3 e All print requests will be sent to printers automatically selected and it connected directly to this computer i The Photos Folder is the path name where all your photos are stored Is rare that you would need The Database Connection is the Sain aes aaa your studio info is stored The current locations of the photos and the data are provided below to change it If you do so you will need to manually copy the existing folder contents Photos Folder C Documents and Settings All Users Docum 3 Select a Database Database Connection Connection This is also _ automatically selected If you change it the database will need to be migrated to the new location 4 Select Apply 50 Setting Up Your Network Setting Up a Server Computer A server computer is necessary if you are running the software on more than one computer Note A dongle must be attached to the server computer to activate the network The server computer will contain all of the photos and data and will share them with the client computers Note The server computer must be configured before the client computers A server computer means e A computer will be used as a server on a network e All photos and data will be stored locally on t
249. of the contained items from the cart by right clicking on the package or any item in it and selecting Remove Package Clearing the Order If you want to clear all packages and items in the cart and start over select Clear Order from the bottom of the cart Changing Cropping for an Item The software will automatically determine how to crop the photos you add to the cart If you want to change the cropping from vertical to horizontal or vice versa select the photo in the cart and select Change Cropping from the bottom of the cart Adding or Subtracting Copies of Packages You can add or subtract the number of packages for photos already in the shopping cart To change the number of packages 1 Select Copies located next to any package in the cart 2 Select the new number of total packages for this item a Select More and enter a number if your number does not appear 143 Using Photo Library Adding Services to an Item 7 Ordered Packages 18 00 If services have already been added to a photo 2x 8x10 8 00 copies they will appear in the cart next to Services immediately after adding the item To add or edit a i 8x10 Print services for an item in the cart id Services none ada 1 Select Add next to Services located beneath any item in the cart 2 Select the service to add to this item 3 Select OK You can press the Y or right click on any number of photos and select Service Notes for the previous
250. of the software Browse to the location of the templates Select individual templates and select Add Selected to import them Select Add All to import all templates in this location oe On eee Select Add All Subdirectories to import all templates in this location and in any folders and subdirectories of this location Deleting Templates Select an individual template and select Delete Template from the bottom of the software to remove it from this group The file will not be deleted Editing Templates To edit an existing template in the Border Workshop select an individual template and select Edit Template from the bottom of the software The template will open in the workshop where you can edit and save your changes 78 Setting Up Your Products Shipping Options You will need to set up shipping options for different methods and for shipping to different countries This is where you will create and edit all shipping methods groups and prices Find these options in Manage Studio gt Products gt Shipping Options Shipping Groups Handling Cost 0 00 ing Group Local y Add Group Rename Group United States v Add Country Priority 0 00 and over Add Shipping Back Note Make sure all client stations are closed prior to making any changes to Shipping Options The clients will automatically update upon launch Setting Up the Default Group A default shipping group is created automatic
251. oftware The Photo Library is for organizing and managing your photos and albums The Photo Workshop is for editing and retouching your photos The Orders tab is for managing and printing all orders Client Presentation is a customer friendly way of running the software while your customer watches appearing as a kiosk for presenting and ordering photos Manage Studio Here you will take care of all daily business such as adding events customers employees and setting products services and settings The tabs at the top of the screen will manage different aspects of your studio Home This is your home page Here you will see all bookings and tasks available for a scheduled date Calendar This is your studio calendar You can add bookings tasks or calls for specific times and dates These will show up on your homepage You can also schedule and view employee schedules and rooms here 34 Overview Customers Here you will add view or edit customer information This is where their contact information will be stored in the software Employees Here you will add and register employees of your studio You can assign events to them control their access to the software and keep records of their actions Vendors Here you will add and monitor vendors and inventory for your studio operations Products Here you will add and edit your products services templates packages and prices including shipping and tax co
252. olorimetrically almost identical to the actual colors shot under standard daylight conditions By maintaining the colors of the subject the colors remain true even in highlight areas so the expression of the colors is strong giving a reliable impression that is close to what is seen with the naked eye The colors are absolutely true to life ensuring faithful reproduction no matter how subdued or vivid This setting is also suitable for replicating existing photographs and product photography where the original colors must be accurately expressed Monochrome Monochrome photography is a means of boldly expressing form light and shadow The Monochrome Picture Style isn t merely zero saturation image processing it s a faithful successor to monochrome film Sharpness is set relatively strongly Sepia blue or other toning effect is applicable to create a monochrome image in that color Also red green or other filter effect can be applied to control the color The Monochrome Picture Style can give you a thrill of monochrome shooting and bring to completion all within a camera Customization of Picture Styles By using the Detailed Setting function you can refine the six preset styles Depending on shooting situations it is possible to adjust the camera settings and reflect the 199 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets photographer s color taste In addition to the six preset styles three more Picture Styles can be
253. on by 5 points down to 100 e Select the box to reset the saturation to 0 196 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets e Select color to open a dropdown menu with preset values To manually enter a saturation value select the color number below the tool and manually type in a value Adjusting Tone Use the tone tool to add warm or cool tones to a photo Tone options include e Select warm to increase the warm tones by 1 point e Select cool to increase the cool tones by 1 point e Select the box to reset the tones to 0 e Select tone to open a dropdown menu with preset values To manually enter a tone value select the exposure number below the tool and manually type in a value Warm tones are positive numbers cool tones are negative numbers Adjusting Redeye The redeye tool helps to eliminate redeye glare It is recommended to z adjust redeye before tone as the redeye tool looks for red in an image a and might interfere with your tone settings redeye To adjust redeye 1 Select the eye icon in the redeye tool This will automatically adjust redeye 2 If some redeye still remains select the tool and click the redeye in the photo to remove it 3 If some reds were removed accidentally select the tool and click the area in the photo to return the colors 4 Select the box in the redeye tool to remove all redeye adjustments 5 The word corrected will appear below the redeye tool after adjusting red
254. on this computer you will need to disable it to allow database sharing Select Disable Firewall a For Windows XP The Windows Firewall window appears Select to turn the firewall off or to enable Studio Solution as an exception To do this select the Exceptions tab and select Add Program Select Studio Solution and select OK b For Windows Vista The Windows Firewall window appears Select to turn the firewall off or to enable Studio Solution as an exception To do this select the Exceptions tab and select Add Program Select Studio Solution and select OK 8 Select Apply Viewing and Managing Client Stations If you are on the Server Station you can view all clients attached as Stations to the Server To view all clients 1 Select Server Computer from the left side of the screen so that a check appears 2 Select View Clients from the bottom of the server screen 3 A window appears showing a list of all connected clients a The clients are listed by Workstation name and type client or server b The Jobs column shows all current print jobs for each client c The Status column shows all current print jobs sent from each client station Select a command at the top of the window to manage clients 53 Setting Up Your Network Restart restart the printing process for all clients Stop stop the printing process for all clients Power Off turn off the print server Setting Up a Client Computer A client computer
255. oom in and out by selecting zoom and using the mouse wheel Fitting the Page Select fit page from the right toolbar to view the entire photo at the size of the workspace Viewing at Actual Size Select actual size from the right toolbar to view the photo at full size in pixels Before Retouching Before you start retouching remember that all retouches will not be applied to the digital negative of your photo Retouches are saved to a separate preview file and applied to your photo only when sent to print Your original photo file will always be safe and can be reloaded at any time Applying and Removing Select applying or removing from the right toolbar to determine whether you are adding or removing an effect 231 Using Retouch Workshop Saving Retouches Select save retouches from the bottom of the workspace to save your retouches to the current photo and return to the Photo Workshop Select save as new to save this photo as a new photo in the current catalog and return to the Photo Workshop leaving your original photo intact and in the catalog Understanding the Retouch Settings Each retouch tool and retouch method will have its own specific set of settings for retouching photos These settings will be displayed on the top toolbar after selecting a retouch tool or method Read on for a list of all retouch settings Opacity Select the tool opacity 100 is opaque and 0 is invisible Choose Source Some tools w
256. options Changing Media for an Item To change the printing media for an item 1 Right click on the item in the cart and select Change Media A window appears 2 Select a media type from the list or select Add to type in a media 3 Select OK Changing Print Commands for an Item To change the print commands for an item 1 Right click on the item in the cart and select Change Print Commands A window appears 2 Selecta print command from the list or select Add to type in a print command 3 Select OK Editing Shipping Info To edit a customer s shipping info right click on and select Edit Shipping Info Edit the billing and shipping info and change the shipping type and cost and select Save Changes You can also press CTRL H for the previous options 144 Using Photo Library Photo Paths You can view the computer folder and paths that contain the photos To open the folder containing the photos 1 Right click on a photo 2 Select Open Containing Folder 3 This is the location and subdirectory containing your selected photos To copy the file location containing the photos 1 Right click on a photo 2 Select Copy Path to Clipboard 3 The location is now saved in your clipboard Selecting Paste or CTRL V will paste the photos 145 Using Orders Workspace Using the Orders Workspace The Orders Workspace is where you can monitor all new pending and completed orders The status of every order is av
257. or Back Borders can have both a front and back The back of a border is often used for information and identification but can be as complex as the front Select Front or Back from the top left of the software to view and edit the front or back of your border A will appear to indicate which side you are currently viewing If your border does not have a back you can select Back to create one Selecting Items To select items in the workspace choose select from the right toolbar You can now click and right click on items in the workspace e Select and drag an item to move it around the workspace fit e Select and drag edges of the item fo stretch it ial actua e Use the mouse wheel to resize the object with the same size proportions Panning within the Border To use pan mode select Pan from the right toolbar Panning is quickly moving and viewing by clicking and dragging an area in the direction you want to move it This is a viewing option and will not actually move the border You cannot select items while panning Zooming In To zoom in on areas of the border select zoom from the right toolbar e Left click on an area of the border to zoom in e Right click to zoom out e Click and drag a box around an area to zoom in and fill the workspace with that area 210 Using Border Workshop You can also zoom in and out by selecting zoom and using the mouse wheel or by right clicking an area and selecting Zoom
258. or input color profile to apply when loading image C Automatic Use embedded profile or determine profile automatically Default None Do not use a color profile image is in sRGB colorspace C Adobe RGB Image is in Adobe RGB colorspace Custom Use a specific color profile EM Cancel Using the Drop Out Toolset The drop out toolset is for shooting green screen photography with backdrops replacing the backdrop color with other backgrounds or images You can select between choma key backdrops of blue or green To open the drop out toolset select the Drop Out tab from the bottom of the Photo Workshop workspace The drop out tools will appear either to the right or below the workspace Drop Out toolset options are in order Borders Presets Backdrop Color Hue Percent Shadows and Protection 205 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets on text off choose A alos El shadows n m ES i gt aol 7 4 presets chroma key hue percent v expanded threshold protect white protect black v backdrop borders y Saving Changes The software will not save drop out settings for a photo if you select another photo To save your settings for a photo use the save options detailed here Applying Borders Border options in the Photo Workshop are detailed here Selecting the Chroma Key Backdrop The first step in green screen editing is to select either the green or blue A swatch that corresponds to your backdrop S
259. order in the Border Workshop and add an additional text field Click here for a guide Editing Borders You can edit some border properties from the Photo Workshop or open the Border Workshop to quickly edit any border property To edit the current border in the Border Workshop l Apply a border to your photo 190 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets 2 Select the pencil icon from the border tool 3 The border will open as an editable border in the Border Workshop 4 Click here for guides to using the Border Workshop OR 1 Select borders from the border tool 2 Select Edit Border 3 Select Edit in Border Workshop 4 The border will open as an editable border in the Border Workshop 5 Click here for guides to using the Border Workshop You can also open and edit the current border in by pressing CTRL W as a hotkey To add a shape to the border 1 Select borders from the border tool 2 Select Add Border Shape 3 Select a border shape from the list or select Add New Shape to create a new one Press CTRL P as a hotkey for adding new shapes 4 Select your shape settings detailed here Some borders will have colors you can edit To edit border colors 1 Select borders from the border tool 2 Select Edit Border Colors or press CTRL E as a hotkey 3 Select your border colors Some borders will have graphics you can edit To edit graphics 1 Select borders from the border tool 2 Select Edit Graph
260. orders to print Print to CD print the order information on a CD to be delivered to a lab Cancel Print cancel printing the selected order Right clicking an Order Print Order send selected order to print Print All Orders send all new orders to print Print to CD print the order information on a CD to be delivered to a lab Mark Order Shipped mark the order as printed and shipped and send it to the Completed Orders tab Edit amp Proof Order open the order in the Edit amp Proof workspace Batch Orders group all selected orders together as one print order Unbatch Order unbatch all selected orders to be individual print orders Print Simple Receipt print a quick and simple text receipt for records Find Order find an order by Order ID Delete Order delete the selected order Print Order Proof print a proof page of selected order Print Order Form print a copy of the order form and information 324 Reference Presentation Mode Presentation Mode Reference Find Presentation Mode by selecting the Client Presentation tab at the bottom of the software while viewing a photo catalog in either the Photo Library or Photo Workshop exit presentation mode tating sortw fullscreen music orientation view v Best Portrait Sitting 1 4x6 5 8x10 and 5x7 6 4 4x5s 7 35mm 8 4 5x7s and 2 8x10s 9 2 4x6s 4 prev more gt place order save order 7 Ordered Packages 0 00 choose another catalog enha
261. ore realistic it is important that there is a front side of the card and a backside to the card The front side includes a photo of the player and a baseball related graphic For example the following border is a front side of a baseball trading card 256 Tutorial Border Workshop STUDIO SOLUTION D x Front Back Add Edity Options Undo Redo border items E Graphic Basecard png E Text Team Name E Text First Name E Text Last Name B border gt r E g item properties properties H photo 4 E tont F E fill amp BH phe 7 i fit page ops E T isa f 4 yl center i effect d align space v duplicate order y cut rotate copy paste X delete next image previous image The front side of the border contains important information such as the subject s individual photo team name and the subject s first and last name However the information on the back of the card varies greatly This graphic centric template includes statistical information In the case of a Little League baseball player the subject s first and last name height weight and field position are included Information such as times at bat batting average age RBIs and homeruns can also be included to individualize the player s information Here is an example of the back of a trading card 257 Tutorial Border Workshop DO ur UL ETT ES MTS It is possible to add a back to any borde
262. orkshop and Presentation Mode located on the right side of the software Hiding and Showing Data and the Cart Show Data show photo data for the selected photo including notes and EXIF information Hide Data hide photo data Show Cart display the shopping cart Hide Cart hide the shopping cart Hide Packages hide the package window of the shopping cart Shopping Cart Options Package List 1 9 list of the packages contained in the current package group Previous view the previous packages or package group More view more packages or the next package group Place Order send the selected order to print Save Order save the order in the orders workspace Copies select the number of packages for the selected item Add add or edit services for the selected item Add Package list of packages in the current package group o Change Default Group select a new package group to display in the shopping cart Change Cropping switch cropping of the selected photo between vertical and horizontal Clear Order clear the shopping cart of all items Remove Item remove the selected item from the shopping cart 320 Reference Shopping Cart Right clicking an Item in the Shopping Cart Remove Item remove the selected item from the shopping cart Remove Package remove the selected package from the shopping cart Clear Order clear the shopping cart of all items Show Prices check to display package prices in the s
263. oto Number or Reset Photo Numbers which contain the previous options Photo Paths You can view the computer folder and paths that contain photo groups and catalogs To open the folder containing the photos 1 Right click on a catalog or photo group 2 Select Open Containing Folder 3 This is the location and subdirectory containing your selected photos To copy the file location containing the photos 1 Right click on a catalog or photo group 2 Select Copy Path to Clipboard 12 Using Photo Library 3 The location is now saved in your clipboard Selecting Paste or CTRL V will paste the location of the photos Using the Photo Viewer Selecting an event will display the photos in the center of the software This area is called the Photo Viewer Here you can micromanage catalogs by editing and organizing individual photos The event name number of photos location and event date are all located just above the photo viewer Photos Aliinvies Sorty Vieww mm Nicole s School Photos location Ann Arbor MI no description 10 images Jate 6 1 2009 Add Photo v Find Orient Publish Batch Proof Order k k kk xk kk k kk xk YA 1 nicole010 jpg 2 nicole009 jpg 3 nicole008 jpg 4 nicole007 jpg To select photos hold and drag the mouse over any number of photos Or click them individually while holding CTRL or SHIFT You can also select photos by selecting Photos from the very top center of the software and sel
264. ou can add any last minute photo services Ordered Packages 28 00 6 8x10 4 00 copies 8x10 Print M 43 Services none add e Select add next to Services and select a service from the list Photo Service Notes The services that may be applied to the selected photo are listed below along with their price Apply a service to the selected photo by clicking an the check box next to the service description Describe the selected service by recording any other details in the Service Comment field Check multiple instances of a service to apply a service more than once to a single photo For example to apply a service to two separate subjects in a photo check two instances of the same service and use the Service Comment field to identify which subject will receive the enhancement Available Services Service Charge Remove stray hair 14 00 Remove ted eye 5 00 Remove red eye 2nd Instance 5 00 Service Comment Total Service Cost 5 00 Lox cance Placing the Order Once the order is ready to go select place order in the shopping cart A receipt will appear for printing e Select to print the receipt to complete the sale e Select Shipping to edit and verify billing and shipping information The customer s order has been placed e Collect and process payment 251 Tutorial Running a Shoot Printing an Order To send your customer s order to
265. ouble click the name or select it and select OK Choose a date start time and end time for the shift Enter a name for the shift You must enter a name Enter comments for the shift a E a Update or add a status to the shift Examples assigned accepted completed or missed go Select Save Schedule 9 The shift will now appear on the Schedules calendar on the specified date and time E Schedule Information Choose Employee NAZARWW Search Add New Choose Da e 5 31 2009 shiftStart 9 15 AM le Shift End 1 00 PM m Schedule Enter Shift Name Early shift Enter Shift Comments Update Status Accepted M Add Status Rename Status Delete Status Adding Notes to Calendar Items Once an item has been added to a calendar you can add edit or view notes associated with it To add a note to a calendar item 1 Double click the item to enter the details page 2 Select Add Note to the right of the details 3 Type a note and select Save Note 4 You can also view and remove existing notes listed by date and time Select Remove to delete a note 99 Using Your Studio Moving Editing and Deleting Calendar Items Once an item has been added to either the Tasks and Events or Schedule calendars you can move edit or delete it To quickly move a calendar item click and hold the left mouse button and drag the item to a different time or date You can also move an item by double clicki
266. oubleshooting Camera Not Detected Your camera has not been detected Click here to troubleshoot camera problems Can t Connect to a Server or Client Station There are a few common reasons for not being able to connect to a station Before reading this guide click here for a walkthrough to setting up your network Hardware Problems It is possible that there is a problem with your computer equipment l Ensure that every station is physically connected to the network or that your wireless network is working properly Try restarting all of the computer stations and your router modem Confirm that all stations are functioning and connected to your local area network Permissions Your operating system permissions could be blocking the stations from accessing each other l 2 Ensure that you have administrative access to the server computer You will need to enable file sharing share photo folders and disable your firewall on the server computer You can perform these functions in the software by navigating to Manage Studio gt Options gt Network Options and selecting Server Computer from the left side of the software Select Enable File Sharing a For Windows XP Follow the Network Setup Wizard to enable file sharing on your network You will need to restart your computer before this takes effect b For Windows Vista The Network and Sharing Center window appears Turn On the following options Network
267. out choosing a location You can also unarchive or quick unarchive catalogs or photo groups by right clicking on the catalog or photo group and selecting Unarchive From which contains the previous options Setting Photo Numbers Each photo in a catalog will have an individual photo number for identification When first imported these numbers begin at 1 and are consecutive As you add and remove photos from a catalog you will create gaps in the numbering Use the photo numbering features to assign a new starting number for additional photos or to reset all of the photo numbers in the catalog To set a starting number for any new photos in the catalog 1 Select the catalog you want to number 2 Select Catalogs from the very top left of the software 120 Using Photo Library Select Set Starting Photo Number Type or select the new starting photo number Select OK OF ah ee Photos added to this catalog will start at this number and count up consecutively To reset the photo numbers for a catalog 1 Select the catalog you want to reset Select Catalogs from the very top left of the software Select Reset Photo Numbers Type or select the starting photo number Select OK SO ge eS All photos in this catalog will be reset with new numbers counting consecutively up from the one you selected You can also set starting numbers or reset photo numbers by right clicking on the catalog and selecting Set Starting Ph
268. out the Photo Workshop Navigating while Editing amp Proofing The middle of the Order Proofing page is identical to the Photo Workshop and has all of the same features tools and options Use the Enhance Correct Color Balance and Drop Out tabs at the bottom of the software to switch between the Photo Workshop toolsets detailed here The current order ID will be displayed at the top center of the window The navigation bar at the bottom of the software is designed for moving quickly between photos pages of photos and entire orders The left side moves back through photos and the right side moves forward through photos 154 Using Orders Workspace n S TO EEEE e Select the Home or End buttons to go to the first and last photos in the order respectively e Select close to return to the Orders tab You will be prompted to save any changes e Select save order to save all changes to the order and return to the Orders tab e Select begin editing to display editing tools Select finish editing to hide the tools Auto Editing Orders Enabling auto edit will display the Photo Workshop toolsets the entire time while in Order Proofing Enable auto editing by selecting and checking auto edit from the top of the software Auto edit is enabled by default Disable auto editing by selecting and unchecking auto edit from the top of the software Viewing Photos Select view from the top of the software to select viewing options
269. ow considered finished and shipped STUDIO SOLUTION 0 x New Orders Pending Orders _ Completed Orders Auto Print Print Queve View Refresh Order ID Type Customer Order Time Status Status Time Age Payment Fulfilment L2WMJ UEBDM3I Local Smith Nicole 6 1 2009 3 53 50 AM Printed 6 1 2009 4 24 32 AM 2 days old 13 00 Print Locally L2WMJ UEBDMSB Local Smith Nicole 6 1 2009 4 27 47 AM Shipped 6 1 2009 4 28 30 AM 2 days old 23 00 Print Locally __L2WMJ UEBDM2L Local Smith Nicole 6 1 2009 3 48 39 AM Shipped 6 1 2009 4 25 55 AM 2 days old 24 00 Print Locally TAWMI UEBEZSU Local Customer Test 6 3 2009 7 27 20 AM Shipped 6 3 2009 7 30 33 Today 28 00 Print Locally More Information For more information on any particular area of a shoot consult the sections on using that part of the program or check the table of contents and index for quick reference 253 Tutorial Border Workshop Advanced Border Workshop The following section offers more detailed information on how to use the Border Workshop Borders are graphical designs you can add to the photos you take Borders can be but are not limited to simple graphical overlays Borders can also be more complex layouts such as montages repeated pictures overlapping images layered graphics moveable graphics and other custom arrangements You can think of borders as layers of objects You can think of layers as clear acetate sheets containing graphics or text lay
270. ow to edit any employee information or assign them a different role Select Delete Employee to remove them Import and Export File Information from an external program in either csv or txt format can be imported in the software This can make the setup faster to complete Once the employee setup has been completed you should export the data for backup purposes The file can also be used by other external programs as well Customer Setup You can store any number of customers in the software whether they are active inactive or a lead for a future shoot Find the customer options in Manage Studio gt Customers Studio Customers se search bar above to find a particular customer Click email to send them an ema O Customer Name Phone O Nicole Smith 456 2203 m t amp Sam Spade 344 223 2212 LL Jack Sparrow Adding a Customer Customers are listed here alphabetically by last name with a contact phone number and email To add a new customer 1 Select New Customer from the right side of the window 2 Enterthe customer name address and contact information 88 Setting Up Your Studio 3 Enter the customer status Select Add Status to create a new one 4 Select Add Family Member if you want to associate relatives of the customer with this account Enter the relative information and select Add Family Member 5 Select Save Customer You will be taken back to the customer list Here you will fi
271. own on the mouse and move around the photo The user should notice that the object moves the same the way the mouse moves Zoom The Zoom tool allows the photographer to pull the border closer for better viewing This is helpful when building a border because you can see the flaws up close and thus you are able to better cover and correct those flaws To zoom the image click on the magnifying glass icon When you move over the border viewer your Cursor now appears as a magnifying glass Click on the part of the border that you wish to magnify You can either click repeatedly on the picture to zoom in or you can click on the object and use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom Whatever you click on in the border viewer will automatically center Fit to Page The Fit to Page tool allows you to zoom the entire template out to the original border size This tool will fit the entire image into the confines of the border viewer Actual Size 100 The Actual Size tool allows the user to view the border at the actual pixel size of your monitor The Border Viewer portion of the editing screen shows a condensed version of the image By viewing the image at its Actual Size you are able to see every imperfection available for display For extremely large borders this is a great way to identify parts of the border that would not be noticeable in a small 4x6 print 296 Tutorial Border Workshop Testing Variable Text fields If you add variable text t
272. p some products and prices Creating Products Find these options in Manage Studio gt Products gt Packages and Prices This is where you will create and edit all packages products and prices for your studio Products are structured like this package groups will contain individual packages and each package will contain individual products Setup your Products a a p z Package Group 1 Package Group 2 Add New Group Y 4x6 5 00 Edit Product Remove Product 4x6 Print 1 copy y Add Item Note Make sure all client stations are closed prior to making any changes to Packages and Prices The clients will automatically update upon launch Creating a Package Group Package groups are convenient for holding a number of packages and products specific to an event By creating multiple package groups you can switch between the offered groups depending on your event removing unnecessary packages and clutter from the Shopping Cart To create a new package group 1 Select Add New Group from the tabs near the top of the Products window A prompt will appear 2 Type in new group name for this package group 3 If you want to copy an existing package group select Copy of and select the group you wish to copy from the dropdown menu 63 Setting Up Your Products 4 If you want this package to be available online through your PhotoReflect site select Allow this package to be used with your online store
273. print open the Orders workspace Manage Studio Photo Library Photo Workshop Orders ent Presentation Select the Orders tab from the bottom of the software and select the New Orders tab from the top of the workspace STUDIO SOLUTION NewOrders Pending Orders Completed Orders Auto Print Order ID Type Customer L2WMJ UEBE28U Local Customer Test L2WMJ UEBCHQ Local North Basketball L2WMJ UEBCZ0E Local North Basketball 0 x Print Queue View Refresh Order Time Status 6 3 2009 7 27 20 AM Waiting to be Printed 5 28 2009 9 10 29 PM ave 5 28 2009 9 19 51 PM 1of 2Printed Status Time Age None Today 28 00 Print Locally None 5 days old 9 00 Print Locally 5 28 2009 9 20 51 PM 5 days old 9 00 If you have auto print enabled the order was already sent to print when it first entered the Orders workspace Look for it in the Pending Orders tab if it was recently sent and might still be printing or the Completed Orders tab if it has finished printing If auto print is not enabled select your order and select print order from the bottom of the workspace cS print order Once the order has printed it needs to be prepared and shipped to the customer Take whatever steps necessary to prepare the order for shipping or pickup Select the order in the Completed Orders tab and select mark order shipped from the bottom of the workspace 252 Tutorial Running a Shoot mark order shipped The order is n
274. products let s move on to other product related options A service is any kind of retouching or editing in addition to normal photo editing such as removing stray hairs or erasing braces Services may be added to any product or order Each service has a cost that will be included in the order total Find service options in Manage Studio gt Products gt Studio Services Studio services will appear in a list with the description your price the lab wholesale price and printing information You will need to determine the service the cost and if it will be a pre print or post print process E Studio Services Service Description Your Price Lab Charge Lab Remove stray hair 14 00 N A Print Locally Edit Remove Remove red eye 5 00 N A Print Locally Edit Remove Add Local Service Add Lab Senice Note Make sure all client stations are closed prior to making any changes to Studio Services The clients will automatically update upon launch Adding a Local Service A local service is something you will provide for the customer on your own time without the use of a lab To add a local service Select Add Local Service Add Local Retouching Service 2 Select a predefined Service Name or type your own custom service f a A til tt si a 1 Select a service from the list or create a new service sed ae ee Service Name Remove red eye y 2 Selecta pre print or post
275. properties for the photos including shadows and frames c Header and Footer this text will appear on the top and bottom of your proof sheets respectively Select to show the header or footer Select the text alignment and font iii Select Insert Special Text to add in specific information such as dates filenames customer data or catalog info d Labels this text will appear beneath each photo Select to Show Labels 138 li Select the position alignment and font iii Select Insert Special Text if desired 4 Select OK when finished with all the tabs Using the Shopping Cart Using Photo Library The shopping cart is where you will create and modify orders before sending them to print You can create new orders to print immediately or save orders for later Find the shopping cart in the Photo Library Photo Workshop and in Presentation Mode always located at the very right of the software The shopping cart will remain the same while using the software saving items and settings while navigating through different areas of the program Once an item is added to the shopping cart a preview image will appear next to the quantity package type price and services You can change or edit any item or packages after it has been added to the cart Showing and Hiding the Cart The shopping cart is hidden by default to leave more room for organizing and editing photos To show or hide the shopping cart s
276. ps Click here for more information on border options 4 Select OK when you have selected a border 5 The border will be applied to the photo If the border is a different aspect ratio that aspect ratio will be automatically applied to the photo You can also search for and add a border by pressing B as a hotkey The top portion contains your local templates you can currently select The bottom portion is the template marketplace where you can purchase new templates to use For more information click on the Help button below local borders online templates ff Classic Frames 188 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets Using Basic Border Functions Basic border options include e Turning borders on select on from the border tool or select borders and select Border On Press HOME as a hotkey Your most recently used border will appear e Turning borders off select off from the border tool or select borders and select Border off Press END as a hotkey e Refreshing borders select borders from the border tool and select Refresh Borders e Reset current border settings select borders from the border tool and select Reset Border Press ALT R as a hotkey Switching between Borders in the Current Group To switch between templates in the current border group e Select the lt and gt arrows in the borders tool The borders will cycle back or forward through the current group applying each to the photo OR 1 Sel
277. r Ink 6 Enter your current quantity 7 Enter the item cost 8 Enter the purchase date manually or select the calendar button and choose a date 9 Select Save Item Inventory items are listed by name SKU quantity purchased quantity on hand cost and purchase date Click an item name to return to the information page and edit or delete it Item Information Item Name Paper Towels Description Bounty Choose Vendor Office Store m Vendor SKU 2872 2 2 3 2 gt 3 R fe 3 2 3 a E Add Type Rename Type Delete Type Quantity 24 Cost 517 00 Purchase Date 6 3 2009 83 Setting Up Your Studio Updating Used Inventory It is important to keep track of each used item to ensure that your inventory is accurate Find these options in Manage Studio gt Vendors gt View Used Inventory Inventory Name SKU Quantity PurchasedQuantity On Hand Cost Purchase Date i Paper Towels 2872 24 24 0 00 6 3 2009 To update your used inventory 1 Select Enter Used Item or click an item name from the list Select an inventory item Check the SKU to verify you have the right one The new window will show all information for the item Enter a reason for using the item Enter the quantity used Ss Or o N Enter the use date manually or select the calendar button and choose a date 7 Select Save Item Your current inventory will update automatically with your total used and remain
278. r available services to be applied to the photo 4 Select OK 5 These services will be applied to this photo in any size in any order You can also add or edit services by pressing as a hotkey Comparing Photos You can lock specific photos in Presentation Mode to compare it to other photos as you move through the catalog To lock a photo for comparing select a photo and select compare from the top of the software or right click a photo A red dog ear will appear in the upper right hand corner of the photo when it is locked Select unlock from the top of the software to unlock a photo While a photo is locked you can move freely through the album but your locked photos will remain in the workspace At any time you can quickly unlock and lock other photos 162 Using Presentation Mode Playing Background Music You can play background music to set a classy and calming atmosphere for your customers as they preview their photos To play music 1 Select music from the top of the software 2 Select Play Music Folder or Play Music File and select the music you want to play a Selecting a folder will loop all music files in the folder b Selecting a file will loop the single music file over and over 3 Select Choose Music Folder or Choose Music File to search for and select your own music To turn off music select music from the top of the software and select and check off Using the Shopping Cart The
279. r is here and ready to preview their photos It s time to switch over to Presentation Mode e Select Client Presentation from the bottom of the software Manage Studio Photo Library Photo Workshop Orders Client Presentation Presentation Mode will open If you need to select a different catalog or photo group select choose another catalog from the bottom of the workspace At any time you can open a selected photo and catalog in a presentation friendly version of the Photo Workshop to enhance a photo at the customer s request Select enhance selected photo from the bottom of the workspace Select View from the top of the software to view a specific number of photos or press and as hotkeys for viewing less and more photos 248 Tutorial Running a Shoot One Photo Two Photos Three Photos Four Photos Six Photos Eight Photos Nine Photos v Twelve Photos View Less Photos View More Photos v Show Filenames v Show Photo Numbers Viewing Aspect v High Quality Preview Double click a photo to preview that photo fullscreen Once in fullscreen use the arrow keys on your keyboard to switch photos Click here for more details on how to present photos to your customers Creating an Order After previewing their photos your customer has chosen a number of favorites and is ready to place an order with you This order can be placed in the Photo Library Photo Workshop or in Presentation Mode Since we hav
280. r or template This Border Workshop feature is available by selecting the Back tab while creating or editing any border The application will ask the photographer if they would like to create a back for the border Specifically the application will indicate This border does not have a back Would you like to create a back now To create a back select Yes To exit the window without altering the back settings select No Add The Add menu allows you to quickly add items to your border The menu options include Photo Multiple Photos Graphic Text Effect Shape Barcode Line Save Custom Object Edit Custom Object Add Custom Object add edit optior Photo Multiple Photos Graphic Text Effect gt Shape gt Barcode Save Custom Object Edit Custom Objects Add Custom Object gt 258 Tutorial Border Workshop The following is a list of each option followed with a brief description Photo When creating border templates you need a placeholder for one or more photos You add photo placeholders to the border template in the position where you want a photo to appear These photo placeholders are called image cells In most cases you will probably have only one image cell because the border is designed for only one photo Multiple Photos Adding multiple photos using the Add Photo tool lets yo
281. range Catalogs o Arrange Catalogs By Day organize all catalogs by days o Arrange Catalogs By Week organize all catalogs by week o Arrange Catalogs By Month organize all catalogs by month o Arrange Catalogs into 4 groups organize catalogs alphabetically into 4 groups o Arrange Catalogs into 6 groups organize catalogs alphabetically into 6 groups o Arrange Catalogs into 26 groups organize catalogs alphabetically into 26 groups e Remove Photo delete the selected photo e Hide from Publishing do not publish the selected photo when publishing the catalog 318 Reference Photo Library Rename Photo rename selected photo Orient Photo options listed here Rate Photo assign a 1 to 5 star rating to selected photo Describe Photo add photographer note to selected photo Service Notes Service Notes view and edit services to be applied to selected photo Edit Shipping Info view and edit billing and shipping information for customer Select All select all photos in the catalog Deselect All deselect all photos in the catalog Refresh refresh photos in the catalog Open Containing Folder open and view the location containing the selected photo Copy Path to Clipboard copy the folder location of the selected photo to the clipboard Properties view and edit photo properties notes and data 319 Reference Shopping Cart Shopping Cart Reference Find the Shopping Cart in the Photo Library Photo W
282. raphic but its position remains relative to 284 Tutorial Border Workshop the object on the previous layer This is useful if you want to keep the relationship between two graphics or a graphic and text Using this option is like grouping objects Advanced Options You can add a frame to the graphic and specify the frame color size and offset from the graphic edges If you want a graphic to have a shadow select the Draw a Drop Shadow option With this selection you can have the shadow appear either below the photo or on top of the photo so the photo appears inset Specify the offsets and radius of the shadow Finally you can set a rotation angle for the graphic Size and Position It is possible to select the size and position for the graphic elements from the Graphic Object window This is available in the Size and Position tab Before you choose a position or size for your object first check the drop down box in the upper right hand corner there are four possible units of measure pixels default inches centimeters and millimeters You can change the unit of measure at any time and the numbers in each field will automatically change to accommodate the new units without changing the position or size The Position fields determine exactly where each side of the shape is located The farthest point up down left and right of the shape will be placed at these coordinates A Top entry of O means the
283. rate a comma separated value CSV file that includes the number of events by type and their details This file can be used in any data management program that accepts csv files Select Save after the report is generated you cannot print this report Orders Summary Export This report will generate a comma separated value CSV file that includes orders and their details This file can be used in any data management program that accepts csv files Select Save after the report is generated you cannot print this report Package Export This report will generate a comma separated value CSV file that includes all the packages sold This file can be used in any data management program that accepts csv files Select Save after the report is generated you cannot print this report Package and Products This report will display all purchased packages and products for your specified time period 111 Using Photo Library Products Export This report will generate a comma separated value CSV file that includes all products sold This file can be used in any data management program that accepts csv files Select Save after the report is generated you cannot print this report Sales by Package This report will display a summary of all purchased packages and the sales generated by each Session Trends This report will display a pie chart for the percentage of types of task types Tasks by Type Export This report will generate
284. rder Reference Orders Workspace STUDIO SOLUTION 0 x New Orders Pending Orders Completed Orders Auto Print Print Queve View v Refresh Order ID Type Customer Order Time Status Status Time Age Payment Fulfillment WM I DEBCH 5 28 2009 9 10 2 Saved None 5 days old 9 00 Print Locally L2WMJ UEBCZOE Local North Basketball 5 28 2009 9 19 5 1of 2 Printed 5 28 2009 9 20 5 5 days old 9 00 Print Locally e Auto Print check to enable and automatically print new orders e Print Queue view and organize the order of printing and suspend or resume print jobs e View only available for Completed Orders select a time period to view orders of that age e Refresh refresh all orders Bottom Menu find delete markorder edit amp proof print order print print print print orders order shipped order proof order form order all orders tocd print Manage Studio Photo Library Photo Workshop Orders Client Presentation e Find Orders find an order by Order ID e Delete Order delete the selected order e Mark Order Shipped mark the order as printed and shipped and send it to the Completed Orders tab e Edit amp Proof Order open the order in the Edit amp Proof workspace 323 Reference Orders Workspace Print Order Proof print a proof page of selected order Print Order Form print a copy of the order form and information Print Order send selected order to print Print All Orders send all new
285. rders tab as a new order To save the current order as a new order select Print from the top of the software and select Save Current Order as New Order or press ALT S as a hotkey The new order will be saved the Orders tab To save the current order select Print from the top of the software and select Save Current Order or press as a hotkey You can also select save order from the bottom right of the software Printing Orders To print your selection as a new order 1 Select a package or product 2 Select Print from the top of the software 3 Select Print Selection as New Order or press CTRL P as a hotkey 4 The item will be printed and a new order added to the Orders tab To print the current order select Print from the top of the software and select Print Current Order 157 Using Presentation Mode Using Presentation Mode Presentation Mode combines features from each other part of the software for an easy to use interface free of distractions You can show slideshows play background music compare photos within a catalog preview photos in digital frames and purchase packages The Presentation Mode is made for walking customers through selecting and rating their photos choosing services and purchasing packages all during the same session To activate Presentation Mode you must have a catalog open in either the Photo Library or the Photo Workshop Turn on Presentation Mode by selecting the Client
286. read the previous section on setting up employees zN Select Save Task 8 The task will now appear on the employee details page and the calendar KA Task Information Choose Date 6 3 2009 Start Time 5 15 AM x End Time 6 15 AM Y Enter Task Name Clean studio 3 Enter Description It s messy Update Status Assigned ly Add Status Rename Status Delete Status Assign Employee s Yaz Akrout Remove Assign Employee Adding a Note To add a note for this employee 1 Select Add Notes from the bottom of the window 2 Type a note and select Save Note 3 You can also view and remove existing notes listed by date and time Select Remove to delete a note Adding a Shift To add a shift for this employee 1 Select Add Schedule from the bottom of the window 2 Choose a date start time and end time for the shift 107 Using Your Studio Enter a name for the shift You must enter a name Enter comments for the shift This is optional Update or add a status to the shift Examples assigned accepted completed or missed Select Save Schedule The shift will now appear on the employee details page and the Schedules calendar Printing a Schedule To print this employee s schedule l 2 Select Print Schedule from the bottom of the window You will be taken automatically to the Employee Activity section of the Reports tab Select a Quick Date period from the left to view a sche
287. rees or an angle you specify When you rotate photo objects the photo rotates within the image cell For example if you have a portrait image cell and you rotate 90 degrees the image cell remains portrait but the photo within the cell rotates 90 degrees e Reset Resets the rotation to the original setting e 90 Clockwise Rotates the selected object 90 degrees to the right e 90 Counterclockwise Rotates the selected object 90 degrees to the left e 180 Rotates the selected object 180 degrees e Angle Allows you to set a specific degree angle of rotation Select The Studio Solution Border Workshop provides more control for the border creator The Select tool provides the photographer with a simple way to click select border objects This tool provides a way to click and drag objects around the template or to perform subtle changes in a zoomed in view To use the Select tool highlight the icon This will activate the feature Click on items in the Border Preview All selected items will highlight by displaying an outline This is what a selected item in the Border Workshop looks like An outline will appear on the avart Aitina af 295 Tutorial Border Workshop Pan The Pan tool allows the photographer to move around a photo quickly while zoomed in To use this tool click on Pan Move the cursor over to the border viewer and notice that the cursor now appears as a small hand Hold the left button d
288. rends An overview of all the event types and orders To run a report Select a report type from the Reports tab Select Generate Report 109 Employee Activity Export Export CSV file that lists and details all acti specified employee Employee Schedules A list of employee schedules Event Categories vity for a Report detailing the number of events by type and their details Orders Summary Export An exportable report of order Package and Products A report of all the packages and products s Sales by Package A report of all the packages and products s Tasks by Type Export A report of all task counts old old Select a time period for the report by selecting a Quick Date from the left of the software or by entering specific start and end dates into the text field by typing or selecting dates on the calendar To print the report once it has appeared select Print from the top left of the software Using Your Studio Employee Activity Studio Solution From 11 15 2009 To 11 22 2009 Generated 11 17 2009 16 40 Employee Information Admin Summary Event Type Count Call 1 Bookings Name Start Date Time End Date Time Description Tasks Name Start Date Time End Date Time Description Calls Name Start Date Time End Date Time Description Call to Dan Brown Nov 17 2009 4 31PM Nov 17 2009 4 46PM Schedules Name Start Date Time End Date Time Comments Read on for information on t
289. right toolbar 3 Select an option a b Es d Send to Back make this item the very back layer of the border Bring to Front make this item the very front layer of the border Send Backward send this item one layer towards the back Bring Forward bring this item one layer towards the front To rearrange items in the border items list 1 Select a border item in the list 2 Hold and drag the item to a new location in the list 3 The item will now appear in a different order in the workspace You can also right click an item and select Order from the dropdown menu for the previous options Rotating Items You can rotate items by preset or custom angles 1 Select a border item 2 Select rotate from the right toolbar 3 Select an option ad b Reset reset the orientation to the original angle 90 clockwise c 90 counter clockwise d 180 Angle view and select the angle and which direction to rotate 218 Using Border Workshop You can also right click an item and select Rotate from the dropdown menu for the previous options Hiding Items You can hide items from view You can still select and move the item through a dotted outline but it will be transparent Use this to line up items or see what lies beneath To hide an item 1 Right click a border item 2 Select Hide Object 3 An H will appear next to the item name in the border items list 4 Right click the
290. ring in the software from left to right e Photo Bar select view and mange photos within the workshop e Workspace select toolsets tabs tools and edit photos e Shopping Cart select packages and photos for purchase and add to orders 8 4 5x7s and 2 8x10s 9 2 4x bs 4 prev more place order save order F Ordered Packages 18 00 de 9 2x8x10 8 00 ial sheets v pela ol focus min med max 165 Using Photo Workshop Viewing Photos Once in the workshop you can view sort and manage photos using many of the same features from the Photo Library without needing to exit the Photo Workshop tab Viewing Modes There are two different viewing modes in the workshop Select Single or Multiple from the very top left of the software to choose one e Single the photo bar appears at the left side of the software for selecting and navigating through photos Use the arrows at the very top left and very bottom left to scroll between photos within the current catalog Selecting a photo will display it in the workspace for editing e Multiple the photo bar does not appear All photos in the current catalog will appear in the workspace as smaller images You can edit any or all of the photos at once while editing to apply the edits to all of the selected photos Ka STUDIO SOLUTION Single Multiple Photos y Altributes Sortw Vieww fullscreen mm 7 MM M 4 10 nicole001 jpg 9 nicol
291. rom the right side of the window Using Auto Print Auto Print will automatically send all local orders straight to the print queue and begin printing To turn auto print on select and check Auto Print from the very top center of the software Selecting Auto Print again will uncheck and disable auto printing 150 Using Orders Workspace Managing Orders Marking Orders Shipped Any new or pending order can be marked as shipped and sent to the Completed Orders tab Shipped orders will be treated as finished orders To mark an order as shipped select the order and select mark order shipped from the bottom of the software or right click the order and select Mark Order Shipped Cancelling Orders If an order has been sent to print but has not yet printed you can cancel it and remove it from the print queue Select the order from the Pending Orders tab and select cancel print from the bottom of the software or right click the order and select Cancel Print Deleting Orders To completely delete an order from the software select the order and select delete order from the bottom of the software or right click on an order and select Delete Order You will be prompted for confirmation A deleted order will be completely removed from every part of the software and is unrecoverable Batching and Unbatching Orders You can group individual orders together and treat them all as one large print order This is useful when you have many separ
292. rom the left toolbar A window appears Enter the text for the item q Select Insert Special Text to select a data type Select font properties Select Color Attributes Select Movement options Select the alignment character spacing and line spacing Select Advanced options ad b C d Select to Display text on screen as guide but do not print Select to draw an outline around the text Select to draw shadows beneath or inside the text Select Rotation 224 9 Using Border Workshop e Select to wrap words f Select to make the text editable This is enabled by default Select Position and Size options found here 10 Select OK You can also add text by selecting Add from the top of the software and selecting Text which contains the previous options Adding an Effect You can add a preset effect as an item which can then be set on top of another item to create a unique effect The following effects are available Brightness e Hue e Watermark Color e Invert RGB e Antique Darken e Negate RGB e Blur Duo Tone e Overlay e Monochrome Duo Tone Color e Sepia Tone Grayscale e Saturation To apply an effect ae oe Select add effect from the left toolbar A window appears Select the effect type from the dropdown menu Select Transparency options a Predefined Mask select Edit to choose a predefined vignette or transparency setting Select Movement options Select the
293. rt photos from your quick import location select and check Create New amp Import Select Add Photo Catalog a Select Add Portfolio instead if you want to add a new portfolio to your PhotoReflect A wizard opens Select a category type from the drop down box Enter a customer name You must enter a last name The first name is optional Enter a description event city state two letter abbreviation and country This is optional Enter an event date You must enter an event date Enter event notes 10 Select Next 11 Enter customer information 12 Select Finish when complete or select Web Options if you would like to enter information for PhotoReflect 115 Using Photo Library You can also add catalogs by right clicking on any catalog type and selecting New Catalog which contains all of the previous options Viewing Catalog Info To view catalog info select a catalog or photo group and select Info above the catalog list You can also right click a catalog or photo group and select Info for the same options Editing Catalog Info To edit catalog info l OR Select the catalog you wish to edit Select Info located directly above the catalog list 2 3 4 Edit the catalog info See Adding Catalogs for a detailed guide Select Finish a Select Next if you want to edit customer info Then select Finish Select the catalog you wish to edit 2 Select Catalogs located at the ve
294. ry top left of the software 3 4 Select Catalog Info Edit the catalog info You can also edit catalog info by right clicking on the catalog and selecting Catalog Info which contains all of the previous options 116 Catalog Information Complete the fields below to describe your event or sitting Using Photo Library These fields will be associated with your event on PhotoReflect com Provide as much information as possible to allow your customers to easily find their photos online Type Last Name Description Event City Event State Event Country Event Date Event Notes Removing Catalogs To remove a catalog Red colored fields are required information Portrait Sitting Jackson First Name Reggie Austin Texas United States 11 17 2009 Ey End Date 11 17 2009 This event is not yet published to PhotoReflect com 1 Select the catalog you want to remove Select Catalogs located at the very top left of the software Confirm that you want to delete the catalog 2 3 Select Remove Catalog 4 5 Select Yes You can also remove a catalog by right clicking on the catalog and selecting Remove Catalog which contains all of the previous options Adding a Photo Group to a Catalog Photo groups are subcategories of catalogs For example one customer could have several different photo groups one for each portrait sitting To add a photo group to an existing cat
295. s Publish Catalogs Publish Catalogs publish selected catalogs to your online storefront UnPublish Catalogs remove selected catalogs from your online storefront New Portfolio create a portfolio for your online storefront Add Photo s adding photos to a catalog Quick Archive Quick Archive quickly store backups of photos for the selected catalog Archive To back up and archive the selected catalog to a root folder Quick Unarchive quickly unarchive photos for the selected catalog Unarchive From select a location and event to unarchive photos from 317 Reference Photo Library e Open Containing Folder open and view the location containing the selected photo e Copy Path to Clipboard copy the folder location of the selected photo to the clipboard Right clicking a Photo View e Sort Catalogs by Time sort catalogs by time and date of the event e Sort Catalogs by Name sort catalogs by the event name e Sort Catalog in Ascending Order sort catalogs by time in chronological order or by name in alphabetical order e Sort Catalog in Descending Order sort catalogs by time in reverse chronological order or by name in reverse alphabetical order e View Catalogs by Default view catalogs by software default view e View Catalogs By Date view catalogs by time and date of the event e View Catalogs Alphabetically view catalogs in alphabetical order e View Catalogs By Type view catalogs by the event type e Ar
296. s cm or mm 3 Select the X and Y position of the top left corner of your item 4 Select the width and height of your item 5 Select to align your item with the page Click here for alignment options 6 Select to have your item fill and fit to the page Click here for fill amp fit options To use X and Y coordinates for adjusting position and size 1 Top select a Y coordinate for the top edge of your item 2 Left select an X coordinate for the left edge of your item 3 Bottom select a Y coordinate for the bottom edge of your item 4 Right select an X coordinate for the right edge of your item Select OK only when you have selected all of the new item options not just the position and size options 220 Using Border Workshop Adding a Photo Item A photo item is a placeholder for the border where photos can be dragged and dropped into after the border has been applied Each photo placeholder will have its own photo assigned to it If you have assign multiple photo placeholders to Photo 2 for example then once a photo has been added to one of the Photo 2 placeholders it will be automatically added to all of the other Photo 2 placeholders To add a photo placeholder to your border 1 Select add photo from the left toolbar 2 Awindow appears 3 Select the Photo to use as this photo a Remember that photo placeholders with the same will automatically add the same photo to all of those placeholders
297. s gt Network Options and select Server Computer from the left side of the software Ensure that the Server Name IP address and Workgroup are all accurate a You must be in the same Workgroup to view client computers Select View Clients to locate client computers If no clients are active ensure that you have followed all of the steps in both Setting Up Your Network and Troubleshooting Restart your computers to reset the connection repeat the steps Contact customer care if the problem persists Can t Detect a Printer or Camera There are a few common reasons for not being able to detect a printer or camera Before reading this guide click here for a walkthrough to setting up your printers and cameras 303 Troubleshooting Hardware Problems It is possible that there is a problem with your equipment l 2 Ensure that the printer or camera is turned on Ensure that you have properly connected the printer or camera to the computer If Windows cannot recognize the device Studio Solution will not be able to detect it Canon Printer Help Canon printers should be automatically detected in the software To view detected printers navigate to Manage Studio gt Printers and view the printer list Canon Printers Canon i560 Setup e Add Canon iPF Printer Windows Printers Add Printer using standard Windows Driver Raster File Printers Raster Image Printer Remove Setup Add Ras
298. s apply to all computers on a networked system Caption Logo Path Set your logo to appear at the top of the screen during Presentation Mode The height cannot exceed 32 pixels and the width cannot exceed 600 pixels File Management Select an option for storing catalogs none by day by week by month All catalogs during the selected time period will be stored in the same folder ry Application General Settings Set the general options for the software A checkmark indicates the option is activated Many of the options are activated upon installation as the default Allow text to be added on the fly to images and borders in the Photo Workshop while editing photos in the workshop you will be able to quickly add an empty text box and format it independently of the image and any borders Automatically delete an event after it is archived to disc after archiving an event to a backup location the event will be automatically removed from the software without a warning prompt Fill package with current photo when adding to cart if you have a photo selected and add a package to the cart the package will be automatically populated with that photo Normally the package will be blank and you will need to click and drag photos into the package slots Show the Desktop in the library to browse folders your computer desktop will appear in the catalog list in the Photo Library so that you can easily browse to and add photos from locations
299. s section Movement Options If you want to be able to move the effect in relation to the object just below it in the layer order select the Relative option This groups the effect with the object on the previous layer Otherwise the effect object is fixed it cannot be moved when the border is applied to a photo Advanced Options In the Advanced options you can enter a rotation angle for the effect object If you selected a mask you can invert the mask Inverting the mask blocks off the area outside the mask shape so the effect is applied to the shape instead of around the shape Other Options Some of the effects have additional options The Brightness Darken and Saturation effects allow you to enter an amount The Color effect allows you to select a color and enter a transparency value The DuoTone effect allows you to select a color and enter saturation and hue values The remaining effects have no extra settings Size and Position It is possible to select the size and position for the effect from the Effect Object window This is available in the Size and Position tab Before you choose a position or size for your object first check the drop down box in the upper right hand corner there are four possible units of measure pixels default inches centimeters and millimeters You can change the unit of measure at any time and the numbers in each field will automatically change to accommodate the new units without
300. s to modify any individual setting Adjusting Hue Percent The hue percent tool determines the range of colors within your backdrop comz color that should be removed A higher hue percent will remove more green or blue depending on your backdrop hue percent v Basic hue percent options include e Select to increase the hue percent by 5 up to 60 e Select to decrease the hue percent by 5 down to 0 e Select the box in the hue percent tool to reset to the default value of 36 e Select hue percent to open a dropdown menu with preset values To manually enter a hue percent value select the hue percent number below the tool and manually type in a value Adjusting Shadows Lighting conditions are often difficult and will leave shadows on the background after the backdrop is removed The shadows tool will shadows remove unwanted shadows from the photo expanded e f shadows are turned off the software will attempt to show only the foreground image e If shadows are turned on the shadows cast on the backdrop will be transferred to your new background Select expanded to allow lighter colors to appear along with shadows such as smoke clouds and translucent surfaces such as glass and water This option is only available if shadows are turned on 207 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets Adjusting Threshold The threshold tool is for cleaning up unwanted noise in a photo A higher threshold will remove more noise
301. schJassuahdedsecehdedsncetbecsiaansecss 51 Viewing and Managing Client STATIONS ccccccessecessssseceessececsenseceessasecssssesecsessececeeasecsesseeecseauececeeasecsesseeesessaess 53 Table of Contents Setting Up a Client COMPUTE 23 dave a eins beaded Geng thi Hate eee 54 CONNEC MAG PIII iaa 55 Setting Up a Canon Printer with Direct Connectivity cecccccesssssecesssececesscecsensececesssececeeasecseeeeecsesueeesneaaeseenes 56 s ting Upa Canomror WINGOWS PANIED nisin A id 57 Setting UP GQ Raster PINTE ormieresi in nE a E E eea E A EEE E E S dade Ea Eia 58 Managing Connected PINE 4 22 8 tac Ste ec ate E A N R a 59 Connecting Camera S rele naaa sania ricino aT OA 59 SEMING UP a Tethered Caner a rta O A E E a O E 60 Setting Upa WIFE COMEMG ove cosetccccocaveessncizcedsvcavces eee ida 60 Seting Up a HORA is l IMPOrING WHNOUFO CAOMEIG EEE EAE ET E AEE 62 Setting Filename OPTIONS senosiose si riei eni ie riii asp i anie iesenii ik 62 Sening Up Your Products n E R E E ene esaoes 63 Eol os a A E A TAE 63 Sepe Ke kaea e CREE PAETE EE EE EEEE 63 Editing Hole lt ee ACA ea cueluesss siieedsucetbesdhceasescidedseccacangedeneeseccdacsiesds 64 Adang PACKAGES is skein id etl nti eats ee 64 EGUING A PACK a a AHA OAR A Cetec 65 Creating d FO UE aa re e a dr re o e e e dl 65 EIA ProdUCt rres eine ntie di Edi 66 Adding Digtal Delivery PlOGUGIS A A a NE 67 PRA AING A E wetden A 74 Addinga Local S SMICOS srir iie rE Ee seen EEE
302. se the blemish tool to blend an area of a photo with the surrounding area Select opacity and select healing effect to select a source for blending Paint Use the paint tool to paint a selected color Select opacity and the color Dodge Use the dodge tool to lighten an area and increase contrast Select the dodge amount Burn Use the burn tool to darken an area and increase contrast Select the burn amount Sharpen Use the sharpen tool to increase focus of an area for a crisper look Select opacity and an amount Blur Use the blur tool to decrease focus of an area for a softer look Select opacity and a radius Color Saturation Use the color saturation tool to increase and decrease the amount of color in selected areas Select a color amount Color Balance Use the color balance tool to adjust RGB values for selected areas Select opacity and the value Use the eyedropper to import values from an area of the photo 235 Using Retouch Workshop Color Accents Use the color accents tool to convert the photo into a black amp white image Select opacity contrast and brightness Redeye Use the redeye tool to manually remove any red glare Click the areas with redeye to remove the glare 236 Tutorial Running a Shoot Running a Shoot So far we ve walked you through setting up your studio using the different functions managing photos editing photos and creating orders This section will guide you
303. search by type select an item type from the right side of the window Item types include All Types Bookings Tasks Calls Customers Employees and Photos Studio Tabs These tabs take you to different parts of the software Help This brings up the user guide Status Bar Below the studio window to the left of the software tabs is the status bar The status bar will alert you to current processes in the software Learn more about the status bar here 91 Software Tabs Using Your Studio These tabs take you outside the studio to different parts of the software ES Home Page Find your home page by clicking the Home button in the studio tabs Your home page gives you a quick view of all bookings and tasks for the selected day Calendar Customers Employees Vendors Products Printers Cameras Reports tions Bookings ON There are no bookings available for this date Tasks Y There are no tasks available for this date 21 22 23 2 28 29 30 Hel Wednesday June 3 2009 22009 p 385 ojo 12 13 14 15 16 1718 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 28 29 30 31 Bookings will be listed by customer name date and time and with a brief description of the job Tasks will be listed by the employee assigned and a brief description of the task Viewing Dates You can view your current information for any day by navigating the small calendars on the home page and clicking on a date Select the lt and
304. selected photos Proof Options Proof Template y Title Page Size 8x10 iv Proof Size 35mm slide iv Orientation Portrait Page Copies 1 J Print Filenames Print Create a print order O Add proof sheet to shopping cart Advanced Options Restore Defaults Print All Print Selected 137 Using Photo Library Creating a Custom Proof Sheet To create a custom template for proofing photos 1 Select any number of photos 2 Select Proof from above the photo viewer A window appears 3 Select Advanced Options from the bottom of the window A new window appears with tabs a Page Setup set the basic functions for your template iv Enter a template name Select Save if you want to save this template for later Select to orient the proof as a portrait landscape or custom If you select Custom select next to Custom Layout at the bottom of the window and load a pre made border proof sheet Select the page size color and media of the paper you will be printing Select the margins and select to load any background or overlay images such as a watermark b Images set the individual photo properties for the template Select an image size for the photos from the dropdown box or select custom and enter a number of rows and columns Select the photo orientation the padding between photos and how to align the last row Select
305. shopping cart is where you will create and modify show packages orders before sending them to print You can create place order save order new orders to print immediately or save orders for later Ordered Packages 18 00 6 2x 8x10 8 00 Find the shopping cart in the Photo Library Photo Workshop and in Presentation Mode always located at the very right of the software The shopping cart will remain the same while using the software saving items and settings while navigating through different areas of the program H 8x10 Print Services none aca B 0 2x 4x6 10 00 copies 4x6 Print You can hide your packages and prices within the shopping cart by selecting hide packages from above the shopping cart when the cart is displayed Services Inonel For a detailed guide to using the shopping cart click here 163 Using Presentation Mode Running a Slideshow You can view a catalog as a slideshow presentation complete with music and digital frames The slideshow will preview photos at fullscreen with a black background and few software tools To run a slideshow select fullscreen from the top of the software or double click a photo e Press ENTER to begin and stop the slideshow e Select a photo or press ESC as a hotkey to return to normal Presentation Mode Slideshow options e Auto select auto to run an automatic slideshow Select slideshow intervals and to gently fade photos in
306. ssssececsssceeessnececsssaececseeeeeessaeeecsesaeeecaaeeceesaececseaseescseeesessaeescseaaeeess 204 Automatically Adjusting Color Balance iii i ne ee tn SE hn a Rese soi 204 Selecting a Color Profiles 05 a da oe ella one 205 Using ia dels lia AAA a riders qerterrenr ims recta er eters eer ryt a 205 SAVIO ENANA se eee as ee ee et Se ees ae eee 206 ADDPIYING BOFdelsin e hicks e O ane 206 Selecting the Chroma Key Backdrop sscsssccensscessccensecsssceensecessevensesssaevensecsssevensesssaesensesesssvoneeessassensesenaes 206 Applying PIOSETS rsen cscs ees ieres iera Ee EaR EEEE EEr EES decsucecegestieteesinecceuuabeeddesideudavcaneeaseecses 206 AUS HUE EA E A E E A E A AEE eee E E A bes eed ee E 207 Table of Contents AUS NATIONS ora ended Salcedo 207 Adjusting Threshold viii aiii 208 ACJUSHAD PLE CHON icc oe Be Sate has RRR A bea 208 Using the Border Workshop cccciccccccccccccccsceccccccceccsccsceccsccsdeccscsntecesccedescscsedecesccedesesese 209 Navigating the Border Workshop iS A aaa 209 VIEWING ld theBorder WOOD tas do 210 Viewing oN OT BOCK a ian ee An ee een denen ets ne et eek 210 SEIS STING MOIS e dd rl a A EET 210 PANNING within the Bore ada i ae R ees 210 LA A o 210 VIEWING at PAGS Zi a ds ans 211 VIEWING OLACTUGI SIZE dd E A 211 Viewing and Editing Border Properties cooococooncnnnoononccinonnncnnnnnncnononnccnnonnnononn nc nono nnncnnnn nn nro nn nc nnnnnnrccinn nooo 211 Viewing ana Editing Item Properties iii
307. st and payment e Order History all order statuses and times 148 mer Informa North Basketball Austin TX Packages amp Prints Quantity Package 4 4x5s 6 00 4 4x5 Prints Package 35mm 3 00 35mm Side Printing Orders Order LAWMJ UEBCHQZ_1 Recieved 5 28 2009 Photos amp Detais x sample data1200204151ed_00051sport2jpg x sample data 200204151ed_00051sport jpg Order Summary Customer Payment 9 00 Read on for information on sending orders to print Printing an Order Using Orders Workspace nipping Informatior North Basketball Austin TX Shipping Method Standard Fulfilment Print Locally Print Locally If Auto Print is disabled you will need to manually send orders to print To print a single order select the order and select print order from the bottom of the software or right click an order and select Print Order To print multiple orders select any number of orders using CTRL or SHIFT and select print order from the bottom of the software or right click on any of the order and select Print Order To print all orders select print all orders from the bottom of the software or right click the order list and select Print All Orders Printing an Order to CD To print an order to CD l Ze 3 Ensure that there is a CD in your disc drive Select any number of orders Select print to cd from the bottom of the software or right click the order and select Print to CD T
308. sts Printers This is your printer configuration page Add edit or troubleshoot printers here Cameras This is your camera configuration page Add edit or troubleshoot cameras here Reports Here you will view export and print various reports including event sales employee and trend information Options This is your settings page Here you will manage all software options Photo Library Here you will store organize and manage all photos and catalogs The library is divided into three sections appearing in the software from left to right Catalog Menu Catalog Viewer Shopping Cart or Photo Data with Histogram 35 STUDIO SOLUTION Catalogs y Sort View Photos Ali Sov Vieww NM Overview EM Show Data Hide Cart PhotoLibrary your collection of phot Nicole s School Photos location no description 10 Images 1 4x6 2 2 5x7s New Catalog v Find Info Add Photo v Find Orient Publish 3 8x10 a e PhotoReflect 3 kk kek kik 4 wallets W Events 1 3 8 Portrait 3 5 8x10 and 5x7 e Jones Elaine 6 4 4x5s ag pap Nicole 7 35mm Nicole s School Photos 10 amp Smith Tina 8 4 5x7s and 2 8x10s School 1 A j 9 2 4x6s RZ Sports 1 a arp A 1 nicole010 jpg 2 nicole009 jpg 3 nicole008 jpg 4 prev more a Desktop tek kik tx place order save order 7 Ordered Packages 0 00 Y y a 4 nicole007 jpg 5 nicole006 jpg 6 nicole005 jpg Catalog Menu
309. t Increments DOWN SHIFT PAGE h 2 Add Package 2 to Cart Scale Out in Smallest Increments DOWN 3 Add Package 3 to Cart PAGE UP Scale In 4 Add Package 4 to Cart CTRL PAGE UP Scale In Largest Increments 5 Add Package 5 to Cart SHIFT PAGE UP Scale In Smallest Increments Moves to next photo row 6 Add Package 6 to Cart RIGHT Enhance Presentation Mode Move photo right Moves to next photo row Enhance Presentation Mode 7 Add Package 7 to Cart CTRL RIGHT i i Move photo right in Largest Increments Moves to next photo row Enhance Presentation Mode 8 Add Package 8 to Cart SHIFT RIGHT j Move photo right in Smallest Increments 344 Shortcut Keys Presentation Mode 9 Add Package 9 to Cart TAB Moves to next photo 4 Moves user one photo O Clockwise Orientation UP before up in catalog Moves one row back up in i the catalog In editing mode SHIFT O Counter Clockwise Orientation CTRL UP moves Image UP in Larger Increments Moves one row back up in the DELETE Remove Photo SHIFT UP catalog In editing mode moves Image UP in Smaller Increments Move to next photo Enhance DOWN i F1 Photo Rating 1 Star Presentation Mode Move photo down CTRL Enhance Presentation Mode Move 7 x F2 Photo Rating 2 Star DOWN photo down in Largest Increments SHIFT Enhance Presentation Mode Move F3 Photo Rating 3 Star DOWN photo down in Smallest Increments
310. t and selecting Share and allowing all users on your network Select Apply Return to the client computer Navigate to Manage Studio gt Options gt Network Options Select Client Computer from the left side of the software Select Test Server to reconnect to the Photos folder The Server Photos Folder status should change from Not Connected to Connected Can t Find a Portrait Session If you cannot find a particular catalog or photo group follow these steps to locating it 306 Troubleshooting Select the Photo Library tab from the bottom of the software If you created the session through the Manage Studio tab it will automatically be saved in the Portraits tree a Select Portrait from the Catalog Menu b Search for your event by customer name listed last name first To search for a catalog select Find above the catalog list Enter the text and type to search for and select whether to search archived photos If the photo event is not in the Catalog Menu or archived it is possible that it has been deleted Can t Send Orders to Print If an order in the Orders workspace will not print l 4 Ensure that the target printer is turned on and connected to the network a Click here to troubleshoot printer and network options It is possible that you have created an order containing print items or sizes that your printer cannot produce It is possible that your print job has been suspended a S
311. t database a Use Select Database to edit SQL database options Select Apply Return to the client computer Navigate to Manage Studio gt Options gt Network Options Select Client Computer from the left side of the software yO 20 LOs Y Select Test Server to reconnect to the database 10 The Database Connection should change from Not Connected to Connected 305 Troubleshooting Can t Access the Photos Folder Your network will share photos between stations If your client and server station are not connected view this help guide If your client station is connected to the server but cannot access the Photos folder l 2 3 4 a E 10 Go to your server computer Navigate to Manage Studio gt Options gt Network Options Select Server Computer from the left side of the software View the Photos Folder address and ensure it is the correct location a Select Browse Folders to change the Photos folder Select Share Photo Folder a For Windows XP Select the Sharing tab and select Share this folder on the network The Share Name should be Photos Select Allow network users to change my files Select Apply Select OK b For Windows Vista Once you have enabled File Sharing the Photos folder is automatically shared as a subfolder If you wish to share the folder manually you can disable sharing of public folders and enable sharing specifically on your photos folder only by right clicking on i
312. t photo settings to all photos in the catalog Catalog Defaults apply the catalog default photo settings to all photos in the catalog Custom 1 4 apply custom photo settings 1 4 to all photos in the catalog e Sort Photos by Rating sort by your assigned 1 to 5 star rating e Sot Photos by Time sort by the time assigned to the photo e Sort Photos by Photo Number sort by the assigned photo numbers e Sort Photos by Filename sort by the photo filename 313 Reference Photo Library Sort Photos by Full Pathname sort by the entire computer pathname Sort Photos by File Size sort by file size Sort Photos by Published sort by published and unpublished Sort Photos by Archived sort by archived and unarchived Sort Photos by Exif Comment sort by Exchangeable Image File information Sort Photos by Sort by Custom manually click and drag photos to their positions Sort Photos in Ascending Order sort by the previous criteria in ascending order Sort Photos in Descending Order sort by the previous criteria in descending order Show Photo Filenames show filenames under each photo Show Photo Icons show information icons above each photo Show Photo Number show the photo number under each photo Show Photo Rating show the 1 5 star rating above each photo Show Hidden Photos show photos hidden from publishing View Photo Thumbnails view photos as thumbnails View Photo Filename List view photos as filenames
313. tch UnPublish remove a number of selected photos from your online storefront Copy copy and paste selected photo to a new file location Batch create a batch order from all or select photos in the catalog Proof create a proof template for all or select photos in the catalog Order show or hide the shopping cart Right clicking a Catalog View 316 Reference Photo Library Sort Catalogs by Time sort catalogs by time and date of the event Sort Catalogs by Name sort catalogs by the event name Sort Catalog in Ascending Order sort catalogs by time in chronological order or by name in alphabetical order Sort Catalog in Descending Order sort catalogs by time in reverse chronological order or by name in reverse alphabetical order View Catalogs by Default view catalogs by software default view View Catalogs By Date view catalogs by time and date of the event View Catalogs Alphabetically view catalogs in alphabetical order View Catalogs By Type view catalogs by the event type Arrange Catalogs o Arrange Catalogs By Day organize all catalogs by days o Arrange Catalogs By Week organize all catalogs by week o Arrange Catalogs By Month organize all catalogs by month o Arrange Catalogs into 4 groups organize catalogs alphabetically into 4 groups o Arrange Catalogs into 6 groups organize catalogs alphabetically into 6 groups o Arrange Catalogs into 26 groups organize catalogs alphabetically into 26 group
314. ter Printer If your printer is not detected oe Oe wL Ensure that your printer is turned on and connected to the computer Select Add Canon iPF Printer If the printer is still not detected look for it as a Windows Printer Select Add Printer using standard Windows Driver If the printer is still not detected use Canon s printer troubleshooting Select Troubleshoot Printer issues If the problem persists select Contact Canon Service Center 304 Troubleshooting Canon Camera Help Canon cameras should be automatically detected in the software To view detected cameras navigate to Manage Studio gt Cameras If your camera does not appear below Select Camera Type 1 Ensure that your camera is turned on and connected to the computer Select Detect Camera 2 3 If the printer is still not detected use Canon s camera troubleshooting 4 Select Troubleshoot Camera Issues 5 If the problem persists select Contact Canon Service Center Can t Connect to the Database Your network will share information between stations through a database If your client and server station are not connected view this help guide If your client station is connected to the server but cannot access the database 1 Goto your server computer Navigate to Manage Studio gt Options gt Network Options Select Server Computer from the left side of the software gt 2 View Database Connection and ensure it is the correc
315. tes to Select Attributes from the very top center of the software Select to a Apply Attributes from if you want to apply the attributes only to your selected photos b Apply to All from if you want to apply the attributes to the entire event Select to a Use the attribute settings on the clipboard Press as a hotkey for this option b Use the default system attributes 131 Using Photo Library c Use the default catalog attributes d Use Custom attributes 1 4 e Use a New custom setting you created it will appear below Custom 1 4 Editing Custom Attributes To edit custom attributes select Attributes from the very top center of the software and select Save Attributes to gt Edit You can rename or delete your custom attribute settings Orienting Photos To quickly change the orientation of a photo select any number of photos and select the arrows on each side of Orient located above the photo viewer The left arrow rotates clockwise and the right arrow rotates counter clockwise For other orientation options select Orient from above the photo viewer and select an option Vertical oriented as a portrait e Horizontal oriented as a landscape e Vertical Flipped oriented vertically but upside down compared to the original e Horizontal Flipped oriented horizontally but flipped sideways compared to the original e Rotate Clockwise rotate the photo 90 clockwise Press O as a hotk
316. than what you allow for the application overrides the size and row column setting to fit all images on the page If you want space between the photos select Spaced Choose how to handle overlapping photos and how you want to align the last row if it is not full Photo Labels On the Labels tab check the Show Labels checkbox if you want the composite to have labels below each photo Enter the label you want to appear and click the Font button to set the font attributes of the text The label can be any text or any variable name enclosed in percent signs If you use a variable label the application prompts you to enter the variable value for each photo when the composite is generated Choose the position of the label in relation to the photo If you want the label text to be white on a black background click the Invert checkbox You can label with predefined variables such as the date or copyright by clicking the Insert Auto Text button and selecting a variable Composite Options The Transparency setting you select depends on the type of photos you will use with the border If you want the photo to be transparent select the Simple option and enter a transparency percentage If you want to create effects where a section is masked off so the effect is not applied select Pre defined Mask and select a mask you want to apply If the border is for green screen photos select the Chroma key option You can add a frame to the photo an
317. the box next to Would you like to add a slideshow to the digital media Un checking this box will disable the slideshow option The Slideshow page has four options after enabling the slideshow To enter the number of seconds for each photo to be shown before switching to the next click the number and type in the desired number of seconds or use the arrow keys to increase or decrease seconds by one To enable smooth fades between photos check the box next to Do you want a smooth fade in out transition in the slideshow If the option is enabled each photo will slowly fade to black and the next will fade in from black If the option is disabled the slideshow will instantly jump from photo to photo when the time has elapsed 70 Setting Up Your Products e Toadda music file to the slideshow click the Browse button under Select the music file you would like played for the slideshow Select the file on your computer network or drive that you would like in the slideshow and click OK Leaving this field blank means no music will be played during the slideshow e To add promotional images to the slideshow click the Browse button under If you would like to add promotional images to the slideshow select the directory that contains the promotional and stock photos Select the directory or folder on your computer network or drive that contains your stock or promotional images and click OK
318. the composite displays the females in the grade Select a male photo to view all males By entire school you can select a query that displays all the photos in the school i e all photos in the job You can select queries that display only the administrative staff only the teachers or only the students in the school If you want to specify a Type query of a name other than those predefined select Find type from the Add Query menu and replace the question marks with a type value you use in your photo data When you apply the composite border to a photo the application looks in the catalog for the photos having the type value you specified and adds it to the composite You can add multiple queries to the composite For example if you want to create a composite that displays the teacher first and then all the students in a class you can add the Teacher by Class query and then add the Students by Class query The order of the queries determines the order in which the photo types display in the composite In the example below the Teacher by Class query is first therefore the teachers will appear on the composite first 281 Tutorial Border Workshop Photo Query Specify one or more search strings to lookup photos Find Class Photol Class Type Teacher Find Class Photol Class Type Student Add Query Change Query Remove Solting Choros r Search Options Draw all matching photos including placeholders
319. the program For a detailed guide to using the shopping cart click here 180 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets Using Toolsets in the Photo Workshop Once you have imported or captured photos into the Photo Workshop you can use a series of tabs and toolsets to edit enhance or adjust every aspect of a photo The following toolsets are available Basic Toolset this toolset is always visible either to the left or above the photo workspace It includes moving scaling orientation and zoom options Enhance Toolset this toolset includes basic photo effects such as frames borders color softwares vignettes and all retouching tools Correct Toolset this toolset includes tools for correcting brightness contrast exposure tones and redeye Picture Style this toolset includes tools for correcting photos using EOS Picture Styles Color Balance Toolset this toolset includes color profiles and tools for correcting lighting and color balance Drop Out Toolset this toolset includes chroma key settings for shooting with green screen Enhance Correc Color balance Drop Out Manage Studio Photo Library Photo Workshop Orders Editing photos in the Photo Workshop will not affect the saved photo files Your edits will be saved and applied separately keeping your original files intact and making it possible to remove edits at any time by reverting to the original photo file Using the Basic Toolset The basic toolset is
320. ties Select one or more text objects and click font on the toolbar You can set font attributes for the text and view a sample of your font selections before applying them Adjusting the Page Layout After you add border objects you might need to adjust how they are presented on the page For example you might have three small photos you want to align and space evenly Or you might need to change the layer order of overlapping objects to achieve the look you want Use the following tools to make these kinds of layout adjustments Fill amp Fit Tool Use this tool to size a selected object in relation to the page e Fill Entire Page Sizes the object to the exact size of the page e Fill Width Sizes the object to the exact width of the page 292 Tutorial Border Workshop e Fill Height Sizes the object to the exact height of the page e Fit Within Page Sizes the object proportionally until its boundaries reach the edge of the page Make Same Tool The Make Same tool gives one object the same attributes as another The order in which you select objects before using this tool is important First select the object from which you want to copy attributes and then select the objects you want to copy to Click make same on the toolbar and select the attributes you want to copy e Make Same Size Sizes the object to the exact size of the object you selected first e Make Same Size amp Position Sizes the object to the
321. tl de threshold y Basic threshold options include e Select to increase the threshold by 5 up to 50 e Select to decrease the threshold by 5 down to 0 e Select the box in the threshold tool to reset to the default value of 10 e Select threshold to open a dropdown menu with preset values To manually enter a threshold value select the hue percent number below the tool and manually type in a value Adjusting Protection Sometimes dark objects will accidentally be removed in the drop out process or the backdrop will be reflected on lighter clothing and hair The protect tool will prevent green halos and accidental drop outs Select the following options for protect white if the backdrop is j reflecting select protect black if dark areas are being removed with the esas drop out process A higher protection will leave more of those colors in the photo e a protect black Basic protection options include e Select to increase the protection by 1 up to 10 e Select to decrease the protection by 1 down to 0 e Select the box in the protection tool to determine protection automatically e Select protection to open a dropdown menu with preset values To manually enter a protection value select the protection number below the tool and manually type in a value 208 Using Border Workshop Using the Border Workshop Borders can be as simple as a text box or graphic overlay or as complex as
322. to Workshop e File Size sort by file size e Published sort by published and unpublished e Archived sort by archived and unarchived e Exif Comment sort by Exchangeable Image File information e Sort by Custom manually click and drag photos to their positions 3 Select to sort photos by the previous criteria in either ascending or descending order You can also sort photos by right clicking on a photo in the photo bar and selecting View or by selecting Catalog from the bottom left of the software and selecting Sort Photos which contain the previous options Finding Photos To search for a photo in the photo bar 1 Select Catalog from the bottom left of the software and select Find Photo or press CTRL F as a hotkey 2 Enter the text and type to search for Filename Path Photo Notes Film Number or Exif Comments 3 Select to match only whole words 4 Select to match case of words 5 Select to search up or down within the photo bar 6 Select Find To search for additional photos with the same search criteria select Catalog from the bottom left of the software and select Find Next Photo or press F3 as a hotkey or select Find Previous Photo or press SHIFT F3 as a hotkey the software will search the previous and next photos in the photo bar matching your search criteria Refreshing Photos To refresh photos in the photo bar select Catalogs and select Refresh Photos or press CTRL F5 as a hotkey You can
323. to from the catalog right click a photo in the photo bar and select Remove Photo A prompt will appear for confirmation If you want to permanently delete the photo file select Delete the picture file s as well Select OK Saving Changes and Photos Once you are finished editing a photo you ll want to save it The save options are located in the basic toolset menu You must be viewing the toolsets to save the current photo Select a save option e Save changes save the changes to the current photo replacing the current photo in the catalog e Save as new photo save the changes as a new photo that will be added to the catalog leaving the original in the catalog unchanged 179 Using Photo Workshop e Save to select save to for the previous options or to save to file Saving to file will bring up a window Browse to the location you want to save in enter a filename and select Save Editing Photos Click here for guides to editing photos and using the different toolsets Using the Shopping Cart The shopping cart is where you will create and modify orders before sending them to print You can create new orders to print immediately or save orders for later Find the shopping cart in the Photo Library Photo Workshop and in Presentation Mode always located at the very right of the software The shopping cart will remain the same while using the software saving items and settings while navigating through different areas of
324. to histogram to automatically adjust contrast e Select contrast to open a dropdown menu with preset values To manually enter a contrast value select the contrast number below the tool and manually type in a value 195 Using Photo Workshop Toolsets Adjusting Exposure pe You can adjust the exposure of a photo by plus or minus 2 stops exposure v Exposure options include e Select to increase the exposure by 25 points up to 2 e Select to decrease the exposure by 25 points down to 2 e Select the box to reset the exposure to 1 e Select exposure to open a dropdown menu with preset values To manually enter an exposure value select the exposure number below the tool and manually type in a value Adjusting Shadows Use the shadows tool to lighten darker areas or darken lighter areas targeting the shadows Shadows options include da e Select to brighten shadows by 10 points up to 80 shadows 0 e Select to darken shadows by 10 points down to 80 e Select the box to reset the shadows to 0 e Select shadows to open a dropdown menu with preset values To manually enter a shadows value select the shadows number below the tool and manually type in a value Adjusting Color You can adjust the color saturation of a photo by adding or reducing eye color color Color options include e Select to increase the saturation by 5 points up to 400 e Select to decrease the saturati
325. to selected photo e Edit Shipping Info view and edit billing and shipping information for customer e Select All select all photos in the catalog e Deselect All deselect all photos in the catalog e Refresh refresh photos in the catalog e Open Containing Folder open and view the location containing the selected photo e Copy Path to Clipboard copy the folder location of the selected photo to the clipboard e Properties view and edit photo properties notes and data 312 Attributes Reference Photo Library e Save Attributes To O Clipboard save current photo settings to the clipboard System Defaults save current photo settings as system defaults Catalog Defaults save current photo settings as catalog defaults Custom 1 4 save current photo settings as custom settings 1 4 New create a new custom setting for saving attributes to Edit edit any custom settings you ve created for saving attributes to e Apply Attributes From O O O Clipboard apply photo settings from the clipboard to the selected photo System Defaults apply the system default photo settings to the selected photo Catalog Defaults apply the catalog default photo settings to the selected photo Custom 1 4 apply custom photo settings 1 4 to the selected photo e Apply to All From O O Current apply the selected photo settings to all photos in the catalog System Defaults apply the system defaul
326. to use you just need to determine how photos will be captured and imported Find the camera settings in Manage Studio gt Cameras Photos can be captured and brought into the software in a number of ways e Tethered Camera the camera will be directly connected to the software through a USB or select Camera Type Firewire cable Each time you take a photo it ka Saldana Camors will appear instantly in the software e WiFi Camera the camera will wirelessly a Connected via USB cable WIFI Camera amera Wireless File Transmitter transmit photos to the software as they are Hot Folder Camera No Camera 59 Setting Up Your Network captured If you roam out of range of the network all new photos will be transmitted when you return e Hot Folder Camera a hot folder is a folder on your computer that is continuously sending any new photos from that folder straight to the software Set a hot folder if your camera or cameras are importing photos to a specific folder e No Camera no camera will be connected All photos will need to be manually imported from Compact Flash file folders or external drives Setting Up a Tethered Camera Any professional Canon compatible cameras can shoot and send photos directly to the software while connected through a USB or Firewire cable To set up your tethered camera 1 Select Tethered Camera from the left side of the software under Select Camera Type 2 Connect the camera to the comp
327. to view or edit details If a booking has been completed you can click on View Photos to see the photos from that event Calls These are all current calls scheduled for a customer Previous calls will not appear here Click on the name of a call to view or edit details Employee Notes These are all notes created for the employee Click Remove to delete a note Schedules These are all past and current shifts for the employee Click on a shift name to view or edit schedule details ew Yaz Akrout Tasks yakrout e No tasks assigned to this employee Bookings Nicole s Portraits Customer Calls No calls associated with this employee Employee Notes No notes found Schedules Editing an Employee Select Edit Employee from the bottom of the window to edit any employee information or assign them a different role Select Delete Employee to remove them 106 Using Your Studio E Edit Employee T Delete Employee V Add Task Sf Add Note E Add Schedule B Print Schedule Adding a Task To assign a task to this employee 1 Select Add Task from the bottom of the window Choose a date starting time and end time for the task Enter a name for the task You must enter a name Enter a description for the task This is optional Update or add a status to the task Examples assigned completed os o eb Assign an employee or multiple employees to the task If you need to add or edit an existing employee
328. top of the software 214 Using Border Workshop Editing Border Font To edit the font properties of any text item select font from the right toolbar A window appears with basic font properties Select properties and select OK when finished Filling and Fitting the Page You can increase the size of any border item to fill the width height or the entire area of the page size To fill and fit an item to the page size 1 Select a border item 2 Select fill amp fit page from the right toolbar 3 Select an option a Fill Entire Page the item width and height will match the page size and be centered Proportions will be changed if this option is selected b Fill Width the item width will match the page size width c Fill Height the item height will match the page size height d Fit Within Page the item will match the width or height of the page size without Changing proportions You can also right click an item and select Fill amp Fit from the dropdown menu for the previous options Making Items the Same You can adjust the size position and font of an item to copy an existing border item To make an item the same as an existing item 1 Select the border item you want to modify a You can select any number of items to modify at once using CTRL or SHIFT but the item you want to copy must be selected last 2 Hold CTRL and select the border item you want to copy 3 While both items are selected select
329. topmost part of the object will extend to the very edge of the top border A Left entry of 50 means the object will start 50 pixels from the leftmost edge of the border To change the position of the edges of your object use the arrow buttons or click in the text fields and type in the desired amounts Note Changing the coordinates within the Position fields can change the size of your object To quickly change the position of object you can click the Alignment Options button This option will bring up a drop down list of available alignments Left Center Right Center of Page Top Middle or Bottom The Size fields determine the width and height of your shape Click the arrow buttons or click in the text field to enter the desired size of your object To quickly change the size of a object you can click the Fill Options button This option will bring up a drop down list of available fill options Fill Entire Page Fill Width Fill Height Choosing one of these will extend those parameters to the edge of the border 285 Tutorial Border Workshop Adding Text You can add either static text or variable text to a border Static text appears as is when the border is applied to a photo When you apply a border to a photo that contains variable text you are prompted to enter text to replace the variable For example you might have a static text label Name and a text variable for the name When you apply
330. ts you for confirmation when burning information to disk e Always show the hide photos confirmation dialog when hiding photos this prompts you for confirmation when hiding photos from the catalog e Allow borders to be edited from the Photo Workshop select to allow imported borders to be locked or editable in the workshop Select an image format when using another program to edit images e omp e jpg e png e tif Select Template Marketplace options e Display template marketplace on the Choose Border dialog in the Photo Workshop when selecting a template in the workshop you can browse purchase and download online templates e Purchased Template Download Dialog select one of the following options o Always show the dialog when a template downloads o Donot show the dialog and do not add purchased templates to the current border group o Do not show the dialog and always add purchased templates to the current border group 42 Setting Up Software Options Select Shopping Cart options Show Service Notes as a branch of the Shopping Cart s Tree you can select items in the shopping cart and add edit or delete service notes Show Print Commands and Media in the Shopping Cart menu you can select items in the shopping cart and add edit or delete print commands and print media settings Select Color Management options Use Monitor Color Profiles set the default Windows color profile for photo display in both the
331. tting Filenames To show photo filenames below photos in the photo bar right click a photo in the photo bar and select View gt Show Filenames To rename a photo right click on a photo in the photo bar and select Edit Photo gt Rename Photo This will be the new photo filename To set filenames for all new photos imported into the catalog from a camera 1 Select Catalog from the bottom left of the software Select Set Capture Filenames Type a prefix for the Customer Identifier Select a starting Picture Number An example of your filename will appear next to Resulting filename Select OK AS Showing and Copying Photo Paths To view the entire filename path below photos in the photo bar right click a photo and select View gt Show Paths You can also view the computer folder and paths that contain selected photos To open the folder containing the photos 1 Right click on a photo in the photo bar 2 Select Open Containing Folder 3 This is the location and subdirectory containing your selected photo To copy the file location containing the photos 1 Right click on a catalog photo in the photo bar 2 Select Copy Path to Clipboard 3 The location is now saved in your clipboard Selecting Paste or CTRL V will paste the location of the photos 172 Using Photo Workshop Showing and Setting Info Tooltips To display a tooltip containing photo comments while mousing over a photo in the photo bar right cl
332. turing and Importing Photos Once you have started the booking you will be in the Photo Workshop with a new catalog and photo group open for your customer Verify that you are in the right catalog by checking the catalog and photo group from the top of the Photo Workshop workspace Press the camera shutter or press SPACE on the keyboard as a hotkey to automatically take a photo 244 Tutorial Running a Shoot A STUDIO SOLUTION D0 x A Multiple Show Data Show Cart 1 nicole010 jpg duotone on text off 21 gt borders y The photo will automatically appear in the Photo Workshop workspace Finish taking your photos ws STUDIO SOLUTION ES D x A RATA 3 La 4 eventi13b9 Gan color y black amp white sepia retro move duotone iS i C e on text off ie nee OAD event12ipg borders v PA z Q 4 Y orientation eventl3 jpg Live View When Live View is activated on a tethered camera two additional selections will appear on the top menu STUDIO SOLUTION Single Multiple OY Live View 0 Toke Picture Photos y Attributes v Sort y e Live View When the Live View mode is activated on the camera and Live View is selected from the top menu a new window will appear on the desktop This window allows you to see the live feed as it is fed from the camera 245 Tutorial Running a Shoot e Take Picture Selecting Take Picture allows you to operate the shutter on the camera
333. twares 12 Select Finish Creating a Photo Group Photo groups are subcategories of catalogs For example one customer could have several different photo groups one for each portrait sitting To add a photo group to an existing catalog in the workshop l 25 PL 2 8 Select Catalog from the bottom left of the software If you want to create a new photo group and automatically import photos from your quick import location select and check Create New amp Import Select Add Photo Group to and ensure that it lists the correct catalog Enter a name for the photo group You must enter a name Enter notes Enter the event date You must enter a date 177 Using Photo Workshop 7 Ifyou are using 3 party studio management software enter your session ID 8 Select Finish Managing Photos Read on for guides to managing your photos in the Photo Workshop Selecting Photos Often you will want to edit multiple photos at once To select multiple photos hold CTRL or SHIFT and select the photos from the photo bar To select all photos right click on any photo in the photo bar and select Select All To deselect all photos right click on any photo in the photo bar and select Deselect All Applying and Saving Attributes Attributes are a series of edits or settings for a photo that can be saved and applied to other photos and catalogs You can quickly assign and apply up to four different attribute settings at once or
334. u create layouts where photos are positioned anywhere on the page However there may be times when you want to have multiple photos on the page in a row column format as in a composite Graphic Most borders contain a graphic whether it is a decorative border that surrounds the photo or a simple logo in the corner of the page Once the Graphic Object window appears click the Browse button to select the graphic file you want to appear on the page Text You can add either static text or variable text to a border Static text appears as is when the border is applied to a photo When you apply a border to a photo that contains variable text you are prompted to enter text to replace the variable For example you might have a static text label Name and a text variable for the name When you apply the border to a photo the application prompts you to enter the name of the person in the photo so his or her name appears Effect You can add an effect object to overlay other objects in your template The effect object takes on the effect you specify such as grayscale or color saturation When you layer the effect object on top of another object on the page the effectis applied to the object Shape 259 Tutorial Border Workshop You can add a shape object to your border complete with transparency and text It is possible to add and modify shadows outlines placement and rotation Once you select the Shape option from
335. uter with a USB or Firewire cable 3 Turn the camera on 4 Wait for Windows to detect the camera and prepare it for use Detect Camera 5 Ifthe software does not detect the camera and display it on the left side of the software select Detect Camera 6 The camera name will appear in the status bar at the bottom left of the software and at the top center of the Cameras page 7 Your camera is now ready to shoot tethered While you are using a tethered camera you can press SPACE on your keyboard to automatically capture and import photos into the Photo Library or Photo Workshop For a detailed guide of capturing and importing photos go here Setting Up a WiFi Camera The software can receive photos wirelessly from any Canon Wireless File Transmitter WFT using an FIP server You will need to have a wireless internet connection set up on your computer to use a WiFi camera 60 Setting Up Your Network To set up your WiFi camera Select WiFi Camera from the left side of the software Under Select Camera Type l 8 9 Make sure the Canon WFT is connected to your camera Turn the camera on Use the WFT connection wizard through the camera menu For more details on finding the WFT wizard refer to the camera manual Select FTP as the communication method in the camera wizard Enter your wireless network amp router settings in the camera wizard Once the FTP Server settings appear on your camera ent
336. w appears Select to turn the firewall off or to enable Studio Solution as an exception To do this select the Exceptions tab and select Add Program Select Studio Solution and select OK 4 Select Apply Testing the Server Once the hardware network connection and your server settings have been verified go to one of your client stations to test the server connection 302 7 8 Troubleshooting Go to a client computer and navigate to Manage Studio gt Options gt Network Options and select Client Computer from the left side of the software Ensure that the Server Name IP address and Workgroup are all accurate a You must be in the same Workgroup to connect to the server computer Select Test Server to locate the server computer If the test fails select Manually specify the computer name of the server computer and enter the server name or IP address of the server computer Select Test Server to manually locate the server computer If the test fails ensure that you have followed all of the steps in both Setting Up Your Network and Troubleshooting Restart your computers to reset the connection repeat the steps Contact customer care if the problem persists Testing the Clients Once the hardware network connection and your server and client settings have been verified return to the server computer to view the connected clients l Go to the server computer and navigate to Manage Studio gt Option
337. w employees Note This role should be limited to the Administrator Edit Employee has access to edit existing employees Note This role should be limited to the Administrator Delete Employee has access to delete existing employees Note This role should be limited to the Administrator Create Edit amp Delete Role has access to create edit and delete roles Note This role should be limited to the Administrator Add Note has access to creating notes for bookings customers and employees Edit Note has access to editing existing notes for bookings customers and employees Delete Note has access to delete existing notes for bookings customers and employees Online has access to PhotoReflect options Labtricity has access to Labtricity options 86 Setting Up Your Studio Suggested Role Setups The following are examples of how the roles should be assigned Administrator The studio administrator should have all of the permissions checked If a password was not assigned when the software was first installed it should be created and saved before adding other employees Manager The manager role can be assigned all permissions with the exception of Edit Employee and Create Edit amp Delete Role These permissions should be left to the studio administrator Photographer The photographer role can be assigned all permissions with the exception of Add Employee Edit Employee Delete Employee and Create Ed
338. will combine all the layers and copy the images as one single image layer o Copying the images will keep all layers intact and copy the files exactly as they are in Studio Solution o Converting the images to another format while copying will only convert the format of the images on the new media the originals will remain in their current format unchanged If you choose Convert the images to another format while copying you will be able to click the drop down box and select an image format If you do not select an option from the list the images will be copied as JPG files The other available formats are Windows Bitmap BMP ZSoft PCX Photoshop PSD Portable Net Graphics PNG Targa TGA Tagged Image File TIF Photo Size Photo Size determines the dimensions in pixels of the copied photos There are four size options Preview Size smallest size approx 640x480 pixels Medium Size approx 1280x800 pixels Full Size largest size full resolution and Custom Size To enter a size click on the drop down menu under Choose the size of images you would like to save for the customer and select one of the options If you choose a custom size the Width and Height boxes will become available Use the arrow keys to increase each dimension by 1 pixel or click the text field and type in a number Custom sizes will not automatically keep an aspect ratio If you enter a width or height that does not keep

Canon Studio Solution User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents